[Federal Register Volume 59, Number 241 (Friday, December 16, 1994)]
[Unknown Section]
[Page 0]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 94-30503]


[[Page Unknown]]

[Federal Register: December 16, 1994]


=======================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE

Office of the Secretary

32 CFR Part 184

[DoD 4145.26-M]

 

Contractors' Safety for Ammunition and Explosives

AGENCY: Office of the Secretary of Defense, DoD.

ACTION: Proposed rule.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

SUMMARY: The Department of Defense (DoD) proposes to codify its revised 
explosives safety standards for ammunition and explosives (A&E) work 
performed under DoD contracts. This proposed rule is necessary to 
minimize the potential for mishaps that could interrupt DoD operations, 
delay project completion dates, adversely impact DoD production base or 
capability, damage or destroy DoD-owned material/equipment, cause 
injury to DoD personnel, or endanger the general public.

DATES: Comments are requested by February 14, 1995.

ADDRESSES: Send inquiries, data, views, and arguments concerning the 
proposed standards to: Chairman, Department of Defense Explosives 
Safety Board, (DDESB), 2461 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22331-
0600.

FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT:
Ray B. Sawyer, Director, Technical Programs Division, DDESB, telephone 
(703) 325-8624.

SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:

    Pursuant to the authority vested in the Secretary of Defense in 
accordance with 10 U.S.C. 172, DoD Directive 6055.9 established the 
Department of Defense Explosives Safety Board as a joint activity of 
the Department of Defense subject to the direction, authority and 
control of the Secretary of Defense. The majority of the standards 
impacting upon the public were adopted prior to the enactment of the 
Administrative Procedure Act. This proposed rule is intended to ensure 
public awareness of the extent of the explosives safety standards as 
well as offer the public an opportunity to comment on the standards. 
Written comments may be submitted to the addressee above. All comments 
will be available for examination upon request.
    Subpart Q is under development. When complete, it will provide 
information only--no requirements. The information will address the 
HCSDS sometimes furnished with solicitations or contracts to provide an 
insight into potentially hazardous characteristics of the materials 
involved in the production of the item addressed in the solicitation. 
Contractors retain the ultimate responsibility for assuring the safety 
of their personnel and establishment.
    Information provided by the HCSDS is derived from other sources. 
Verification of such data as shipping and storage hazard division and 
storage compatibility group information must be done through the DoD 
Joint Hazard Classification System (JHCS) or Title 49, Code of Federal 
Regulations.
    As stated in Sec. 184.47(d) to Subpart E, these classifications 
pertain to A&E packaged for transportation or storage. Such hazard 
classification information may not be valid when applied to the hazards 
associated with manufacturing or loading processes, For such processes, 
the materials and processes must be analyzed on a case-by-case basis. 
Sources of information to support this analysis are available from 
service research and development organizations through contract 
channels and other sources. The methodologies described in 
Sec. 184.199(d) to Subpart P for propellants is an example of an 
acceptable approach. Subpart H, Sec. 184.73 through Sec. 184.81 
provides examples of processes requiring analysis to determine the 
hazards.
    The benefits of this proposed rule in terms of the protection of 
the public and ensuring contract performance are expected to balance 
its potential cost or administrative impacts. Only provisions related 
to conventional A&E operations have been included in this proposed 
rule. No attempt was made to encompass general industrial safety, 
occupational health concerns, chemical warfare agents, radiation, or 
over-the-road transportation requirements, because these are either the 
responsibility of other regulatory agencies (for example, DOT, DOL/
OSHA, or NRC) or may be addressed elsewhere in the contract by the 
procuring activity. Budgetary effects of this proposed rule are minimal 
since existing DoD Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement coverage 
already requires compliance with safety requirements in A&E 
solicitations and contracts. Finally, because this proposed rule is 
needed to minimize the potential for A&E mishaps that could adversely 
impact DoD and the public, timely publication in the Federal Register 
is important.

E.O. 12866, Federal Regulation

    This proposed rule does not: (1) Have an annual effect on the 
economy of $100 million or more or adversely affect in a material way 
the economy, a sector of the economy, productivity, competition, jobs, 
the environment, public health or safety, or state, local, or tribal 
governments.
    (2) Create a serious inconsistency or otherwise interfere with an 
action taken or planned by another agency.
    (3) Materially alter the budgetary impact of entitlement, grants, 
user fees, or loan programs or the rights and obligations of recipients 
thereof; or
    (4) Raise novel legal or policy issues arising out of legal 
mandates, the President's priorities, or the principles set forth in 
this Executive Order.

Paperwork Reduction Act

    The proposed rule imposes no obligatory information requirements 
beyond internal Department of Defense needs.

Regulatory Flexibility Act

    It has been certified that this proposed rule, if promulgated, 
shall be exempt from the requirements under 5 U.S.C. 601-612. This 
proposed rule does not have a significant economic impact on small 
entities as defined in the Act.

Lists of Subjects in 32 CFR Part 184

    Arms and munitions, Civil defense, Hazardous substances, 
Organization and functions (Government agencies).
L. M. Bynum,
Alternate OSD Federal Register Liaison Officer, Department of Defense.
    Accordingly, it is proposed that 32 CFR chapter I, subchapter H, be 
amended to add part 184 to read as follows:

PART 184--DOD CONTRACTORS' SAFETY FOR AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVES

Subpart A--Introduction

Sec:
184.1  Acronyms.
184.2  Purpose.
184.3  Applicability.
184.4  Mandatory and advisory requirement.
184.5  Responsibilities.
184.6  Compliance with mandatory requirements.
184.7  Site and construction plans.
184.8  Pre-award safety survey.
184.9  Pre-operational survey.

Subpart B--Mishap Investigation and Reporting

184.11  General.
184.12  Reporting criteria.
184.13  Mishap scene.
184.14  Telephone report.
184.15  Written report.
184.16  On-site government assistance.
184.17  Technical mishap investigation and report.

Subpart C--Safe Practices

184.19  General.
184.20  Personnel and materials limits.
184.21  Standing operating procedures (SOPs).
184.22  Storage in operating buildings.
184.23  Housekeeping in hazardous areas.
184.24  Explosives waste in operating areas.
184.25  Procedure before electrical storms.
184.26  Explosives in process during shutdown.
184.27  Maintenance and repairs to equipment and buildings.
184.28  Safety hand-tools.
184.29  Operational shields.
184.30  Special clothing.
184.31  Conductive footwear.
184.32  Materials handling equipment.
184.33  Parking of privately owned vehicles.
184.34  Prohibited articles in hazardous areas.
184.35  Photographic materials in hazardous areas.
184.36  Operational explosives containers.
184.37  Intraplant rail transportation.
184.38  Intraplant motor vehicle transportation.
184.39  Inspection of pyrotechnic, propellant and explosive mixers.

Subpart D--Principles and Application of Quantity/Distance (Q/D), 
Standard Explosives Facilities, and Siting Requirements

184.40  General.
184.41  Quantity/distance (Q/D).
184.42  Establishment of quantity of explosives and distances.
184.43  Permissible exposures to blast overpressure.
184.44  Ammunition and explosives facilities.
184.45  Specific siting requirements.

Appendix A to Subpart D of Part 184--Determination of Barricade Height 
(Level Terrain)

Appendix B to Subpart D of Part 184--Determination of Barricade Height 
(Sloping Terrain)

Appendix C to Subpart D of Part 184--Determination of Barricade Length

Subpart E--Storage Compatibility System

184.47  General.
184.48  Storage compatibility grouping.
184.49  Explosives hazard classification procedures.

Appendix A to Subpart E of Part 184--Storage Compatibility Mixing Chart

Subpart F--Hazard Classification and Q/D Criteria

184.51  General.
184.52  Hazard classes and class divisions.
184.53  Hazard Division 1.1--mass detonating.
184.54  Application of intermagazine distances for Hazard Division 
1.1 only.
184.55  Hazard Division 1.2--nonmass detonating, fragment producing.
184.56  Hazard Division 1.3--mass fire.
184.57  Hazard Division 1.4--moderate fire, no blast.
184.58  Hazard Division 1.5 and 1.6.
184.59  Airfields.
184.60  Pier and wharf facilities.
Appendix A to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.1-Inhabited 
Building Distance And Public Traffic Route Distances

Appendix B to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.1-Intraline 
Distances

Appendix C to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.1-Intraline 
Distances From Earth-Covered Magazines

Appendix D to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.1-
Intermagazine Hazard Factors and Distances

Appendix E to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.1-Fragment 
Hazard (Primary/Secondary)

Appendix F to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.1-Minimum 
Fragment Protection Distances for Selected Items

Appendix G to Subpart F of Part 184--Effects of Magazine Orientation 
on Q/D

Appendix H to Subpart F of Part 184--Category (04), Hazard Division 
1.2-Nonmass detonating, Fragment Producing

Appendix I to Subpart F of Part 184--Category (08), Hazard Division 
1.2-Nonmass detonating, Fragment Producing

Appendix J to Subpart F of Part 184--Category (12), Hazard Division 
1.2-Nonmass detonating, Fragment Producing

Appendix K to Subpart F of Part 184--Category (18), Hazard Division 
1.2-Nonmass detonating, Fragment Producing

Appendix L to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.3-Mass Fire

Appendix M to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.4-Moderate 
Fire, No Blast

Appendix N to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.6N and EIDS 
Components

Appendix O to Subpart F of Part 184--Quantity/Distance Criteria for 
Hazard Division 1.6 Ammunition

Appendix P to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.1-Q/D 
Requirements for Airfields

Appendix Q to Subpart F of Part 184--Application of Ammunition and 
Explosives Safety Distances (Airfields, Heliports, and Seadromes)

Appendix R to Subpart F of Part 184--Application of Separation 
Distances for Ship and Barge Units

Appendix S to Subpart F of Part 184--Q/D Separations for Pier and 
Wharf Facilities

Subpart G--Liquid Propellants Requirements

184.62  Application.
184.63  Determination of propellant quantity.
184.64  Measurement of separation distances.
184.65  Q/D considerations.
184.66  Hazard grouping.
184.67  Hazards.
184.68  Incompatible storage.
184.69  Compatible storage.

Appendix A to Subpart G of Part 184--Liquid Propellants Hazard and 
Compatibility Groupings

Appendix B to Subpart G of Part 184--Quantity/Distance for 
Propellants

Appendix C to Subpart G of Part 184--Liquid Propellant Explosives 
Equivalents

Appendix D to Subpart G of Part 184--Distances for Separation of 
Propellant Static Testing, Launching, and Storage Sites From Other 
Facilities

Appendix E to Subpart G of Part 184--Factors To Be Used When 
Converting Gallons of Propellant Into Pounds

Subpart H--Manufacturing and Processing Pyrotechnics

184.71  General.
184.72  Machinery, equipment, and facilities.
184.73  Weighing of raw materials.
184.74  Drying of materials.
184.75  Mixing and blending.
184.76  Pressing, extruding, and pelleting.
184.77  Assembly operations.
184.78  Granulation, grinding, and screening.
184.79  Transportation.
184.80  Rebowling.
184.81  Machining of pyrotechnic material.
184.82  Spill control.
184.83  Collection of pyrotechnic wastes.
184.84  Cleaning of pyrotechnic processing equipment.
184.85  Personal protective equipment.
184.86  Additional controls.
184.87  Reworking pyrotechnic components.
184.88  Fire protection.

Subpart I--Storage of Explosives and Ammunition

184.90  General.
184.91  Storage considerations.
184.92  Magazine operational regulations.
184.93  Stacking.
184.94  Loose rounds, damaged containers.
184.95  Repairs to magazines.
184.96  Open storage (outdoors).
184.97  Storage of bulk initiating explosives.
184.98  Rocket and rocket motors.

Subpart J--Fire Protection

184.100  General.
184.101  Fire plan.
184.102  Firefighting agreements.
184.103  Smoking.
184.104  Hot work permits.
184.105  Portable fire extinguishers.
184.106  Hazards in fighting fire involving ammunition and 
explosives.
184.107  Automatic sprinkler systems.
184.108  Clearance under sprinklers.
184.109  Deluge systems.
184.110  Hazards in fighting fires involving liquid propellants.
184.111  Firebreaks.

Subpart K--Specific Chemicals

184.113  General.
184.114  Repairs to acid equipment.
184.115  Mixed acids.
184.116  Waste acids (spent acids).
184.117  Nitric acid.
184.118  Sulfuric acid (oil of vitriol).
184.119  Oxidizing agents.
184.120  Handling oxidizing agents.
184.121  Chlorates.
184.122  Perchlorates.
184.123  Peroxides.
184.124  Nitrates.
184.125  Powdered metals: aluminum, magnesium, and aluminum alloys.
184.126  Charcoal.
184.127  Sulfur.
184.128  Flammable solids.
184.129  Volatile flammable liquids.
184.130  Calcium carbide.
184.131  Sodium hydroxide (caustic soda) and potassium hydroxide.
184.132  Metallic sodium.
184.133  Nitrocellulose and derivatives.
184.134  Red phosphorus.
184.135  Thermite (TH).
184.136  Incendiary bombs.
184.137  Colored smoke mixtures.
184.138  Smoke.
184.139  Adamsite (DM).
184.140  O-chlorobenzylidene malononitrile (CS).
184.141  Sulfur trioxide-chlorosulfonic acid mixture (FS).
184.142  Titanium tetrachloride (FM).
184.143  Hexachloroethane mixture (HC).
184.144  Burning mixture (CN-DM).
184.145  Phosphorus munitions agents.
184.146  Storage for phosphorus munitions.
184.147  Special protective equipment for phosphorus munitions.
184.148  First aid for phosphorus burns.
184.149  Leaking phosphorus munitions.
184.150  Removal of phosphorus munitions.
184.151  Incendiary and smoke munitions.
184.152  Special protective equipment for incendiary and smoke 
munitions.
184.153  First aid for incendiary and smoke munitions injuries.
184.154  Leaking incendiary and smoke munitions.
184.155  Fire in incendiary and smoke munitions magazines.

Subpart L--Safety Requirements for Explosives Facilities

184.157  General.
184.158  Requirements.
184.159  Requirements for buildings.
184.160  Electrical requirements.
184.161  Lightning protection.
184.162  Static electricity and grounding.

Subpart M--Safety Requirements for Specific Explosive Materials and 
Operations

184.164  General.
184.165  Properties of explosives.
184.166  Handling low-energy initiators.
184.167  Laboratory operations.
184.168  Electrical testing of ammunition and ammunition components.
184.169  Heat-conditioning of explosives and ammunition.
184.170  Spray painting.
184.171  Drying freshly painted loaded ammunition.
184.172  Rework, disassembly, renovation, and maintenance.
184.173  Munitions loading and associated operations.

Appendix A to Subpart M of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.1-Laboratories 
Q/D

Appendix B to Subpart M of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.3-Laboratories 
Q/D

Subpart N--Testing Requirements

184.175  Program requirements.
184.176  Operating precautions.
184.177  Test hazards.
184.178  Test clearance.
184.179  Warning and communication systems.
184.180  Specific items for test.
184.181  Malfunctions.
184.182  Ammunition and dud recovery.
184.183  Personnel shelters.
184.184  Testing of ammunition or devices for small arms.
184.185  Velocity and pressure tests.
184.186  Primer drop tests.

Appendix A to Subpart N of Part 184--Misfire of Machine Guns, Rifles, 
Pistols, and Other Automatic Weapons

Appendix B to Subpart N of Part 184--Misfire of Automatic Guns, 20mm 
and Larger

Appendix C to Subpart N of Part 184--Misfire of Fixed or Semi-fixed 
Ammunition

Appendix D to Subpart N of Part 184--Misfire Under Possible Cook-off 
Conditions

Appendix E to Subpart N of Part 184--Misfire of Lever- (Trigger-) Fired 
Mortar Ammunition

Appendix F to Subpart N of Part 184--Misfire of Fixed Firing Pin- or 
Lever-Type (Set for Drop Fire) Mortar Ammunition

Appendix G to Subpart N of Part 184--Misfire of Rockets

Appendix H to Subpart N of Part 184--Misfire of Separate Loading 
Ammunition

Appendix I to Subpart N of Part 184--Emplacement of Bombproofs at 
Firing Points

Subpart O--Collection and Destruction Requirements for Ammunition and 
Explosives

184.188  General.
184.189  Protection during disposal operations.
184.190  Collection of ammunition and explosives.
184.191  Destruction sites.
184.192  Destruction by burning.
184.193  Destruction by detonation.
184.194  Destruction by neutralization.
184.195  Destruction chambers and incinerators.
184.196  Support in disposal of waste.

Subpart P--Manufacturing and Processing Propellants

184.198  General.
184.199  In-process hazards.
184.200  Quantity/distance (Q/D) requirements.
184.201  Separation of operations and buildings.
184.202  Equipment and facilities.
184.203  In-process quantities and storage.
184.204  Ingredients processing.
184.205  Mixing.
184.206  Casting and curing.
184.207  Extrusion processes.
184.208  Propellant loaded items.
184.209  Disassembly.

Appendix A to Subpart P of Part 184--Remote Control and Personnel 
Protection Requirements for Certain Propellant Processing Operations

Subpart Q--Hazardous Component Safety Data Statements (HCSDS) 
[Reserved]

Subpart R--Bibliography

184.230  List of Publications.

Subpart S--Glossary

184.240  Terminology.

    Authority: 10 U.S.C. 172.

Subpart A--Introduction


Sec. 184.1   Acronyms.

ACO  Administrative Contracting Officer
A&E  Ammunition and Explosives
CBU  Cluster Bomb Unit
COCO  Contractor-Owned, Contractor-Operated
DNT  Dinitrotoluene
DoD  Department of Defense
DOT  Department of Transportation
DTA  Differential Thermal Analysis
EIDS  Extremely Insensitive Detonating Substances
ES  Exposed Site
FAA  Federal Aviation Administration
FAE  Fuel Air Explosive
HC  Hexachloroethane
HCSDS  Hazardous Component Safety Data Statement
H/D  Hazard Division
HE  High Explosive
IBD  Inhabited Building Distance
ILD  Intraline Distance
IMD  Intermagazine Distance
IMO  International Maritime Organization
IR  Infrared
LP  Liquified Petroleum
MCE  Maximum Credible Event
MILVANS  Military Vans/Tractor Vans (i.e., 8'x8'x20' container)
MK  Mark
MOD  Model
NATO  North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NAVFAC  Naval Facilities Engineering Command
NEC  National Electrical Code
NEW  Net Explosive Weight
NFPA  National Fire Protection Association
OCE  Office of Chief of Engineers
PCO  Procuring Contracting Officer
PES  Potential Explosive Site
PETN  Pentaerythritol Tetranitrate
POPO  Privately Owned-Privately Operated
PSI  Pounds Per Square Inch
PSIG  Pounds Per Square Inch Gauge
PTR  Public Traffic Route
PWP  Plasticized White Phosphorous
Q/D  Quantity/Distance
RDX  Cyclonite
RF  Radio Frequency
SCG  Storage Compatibility Group
SOP  Standing Operating Procedure
TEA  Triethylaluminum
TNT  Trinitrotoluene
TP  Target Practice
TPA  Thickened TEA
UL  Underwriters' Laboratories
UNO  United Nations Organization
UV  Ultraviolet
WP  White Phosphorus


Sec. 184.2   Purpose.

    This part provides reasonable, standardized safety principles, 
methods, practices, requirements, and information for contractual work 
or services involving ammunition and explosives (A&E). Understanding 
and compliance with the applicable requirements of this part and any 
additional safety requirements of the contract, if any, shall minimize 
the potential for mishaps that could interrupt DoD operations or delay 
production, damage or destroy DoD material, cause injury to DoD 
personnel, or endanger the general public. Adherence to the part's 
requirements and principles shall support DoD mission, provide a safe 
environment, and foster cooperation between contractor and DoD 
personnel.


Sec. 184.3   Applicability.

    The requirements of this part apply to contractors performing work 
or services on DoD contracts, subcontracts, purchase orders, or other 
purchasing methods for ammunition or explosives. These are minimum 
requirements and shall be accepted as final authority over applicable 
A&E contractor operations, whether inside or outside their 
establishment.


Sec. 184.4   Mandatory and advisory requirement.

    The term ``shall'' is used in this part to indicate mandatory 
requirements. Waivers to these requirements may be authorized by the 
procuring contracting officer (PCO) as explained in Sec. 184.6 (a) and 
(b). The terms ``should'' and ``may'' are advisory. When advisory 
provisions are not met, adverse consequences could develop, becoming 
proximate causes of A&E mishaps.


Sec. 184.5   Responsibilities.

    The contractor or subcontractor shall: (a) Comply with the 
requirements of this part and any other safety requirements contained 
within the contract;
    (b) Develop and implement a demonstrable safety program, including 
operational procedures, that ensures prevention of A&E-related mishaps;
    (c) Designate qualified individuals to administer and implement 
this safety program;
    (d) Provide information to the Administrative Contracting Officer 
(ACO) pertaining to subcontractors retained for A&E work;
    (e) Provide advice and assistance to subcontractors during their 
work performance; and
    (f) Conduct mishap investigations in accordance with, but not 
limited to, provisions of this part.


Sec. 184.6  Compliance with mandatory requirements.

    (a) During pre-award safety surveys, violations of mandatory 
requirements contained in this part shall be resolved. The contractor 
may choose to correct the deficiencies immediately, submit a written 
letter of intent to correct the deficiencies (which will become binding 
if awarded the contract), or request acceptance of specifically 
identified existing conditions or facilities by the purchasing 
activity.
    (b) When the contractor cannot comply with the mandatory safety 
provisions of the contract, the contractor shall develop and submit a 
request for a waiver through the ACO to the Procuring Contracting 
Officer (PCO) for final determination. The request shall contain 
complete information concerning the requirements violated, actions 
planned to minimize the hazard, and a proposed date for correction of 
the deficiency.


Sec. 184.7  Site and construction plans.

    (a) Development and submission of site plans, modifications, 
construction, and utility drawings pertaining to DoD-owned facilities 
shall be processed in accordance with the requirements of DoD Directive 
6055.9,\1\ as implemented by the applicable military service 
requirements.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\Copies may be obtained, at cost, from the National Technical 
Information Service, U.S. Department of Commerce, 5285 Port Royal 
Road, Springfield, VA 22161.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) For contractor-owned, contractor-operated (COCO) facilities, 
the contractor shall submit, through the ACO to the PCO, site and 
construction plans for all new construction or major modification of 
facilities for ammunition and explosive activities and for the 
facilities that may be exposed to A&E hazards if improperly located. 
The contractor shall provide sufficient copies for the review process. 
The contractor shall not begin construction or modification of proposed 
facilities until receiving site and construction plan acceptance from 
the PCO through the ACO.
    (c) Modification or rehabilitation plans for existing facilities 
that are essentially minor, introduce no new hazards, and do not 
increase the net explosive capacity for which the facility was designed 
or sited, need not be submitted. The ACO shall make the final 
determination as to whether a site plan is necessary.
    (d) Site plans shall comply with the following specifications:
    (1) Drawings shall be drawn to a scale of 1 inch to 400 feet. 
Smaller-scale drawings may sometimes be necessary to reflect certain 
distance and structure relationships within the area surrounding a 
given project. In such instances, reductions in scale are acceptable.
    (2) Drawings shall list distances between the facility or location 
proposed for siting and other establishment facilities, the 
establishment boundary, public railways and highways, power 
transmission and other utility lines.
    (3) All other facilities within the inhabited building distance of 
the proposed facility shall be identified by a brief description of 
their function and occupancy.
    (4) A&E items or hazardous materials to be stored or processed in 
the facilities shall be described. This includes items such as bombs, 
rockets, artillery ammunition, liquid propellants, or other items 
regulated by this part.
    (5) Site plans shall provide the net explosives weight, number of 
units and hazard class(es) of ammunition, explosives, liquid and solid 
propellants and other hazardous materials for the proposed facility, 
including a breakdown by room or bay.
    (6) Site plans shall provide the net explosives weight, number of 
units and hazard class(es) of ammunition, explosives, liquid and solid 
propellants and other hazardous materials stored or handled in 
facilities located within inhabited distance of the proposed facility.
    (7) All facilities whose inhabited building distance arcs include 
the facility under consideration shall be identified.
    (8) Site plans shall provide a topographical map with appropriate 
contours when terrain features are considered to constitute natural 
barricading, or when topography otherwise influences the layout.
    (e) Construction plans for the proposed facility shall contain the 
information in Sec. 184.7(d)(1) through (d)(8), and the following:
    (1) Show the personnel limits for the new or modified facility, 
including a breakdown by room or bay, when appropriate.
    (2) Give general details regarding dividing walls, vent walls, 
firewalls, roofs, operational shields, barricades, exits, types of 
floor finish, fire protection system installations, electrical systems 
and equipment, ventilation systems and equipment, A&E waste disposal 
systems, lightning protection systems, static grounding systems, 
process equipment, and auxiliary support structures, as well as general 
materials of construction.
    (3) Include information relative to the types and arrangement of 
explosive operations or chemical processing equipment.
    (4) Explain any deviations from pertinent safety requirements due 
to local conditions.


Sec. 184.8  Pre-award safety survey.

    (a) When A&E materials and operations are involved in a 
solicitation, mishaps could adversely affect production capability, 
production assets, or long lead time products or services essential to 
DoD program milestones. Therefore, the contractor's capability and 
preparedness shall be evaluated. Pre-award safety surveys shall be 
conducted by DoD safety personnel.
    (b) During the pre-award safety survey, the contractor, as a 
minimum, shall provide the following for review:
    (1) Site plans conforming to the requirements of Sec. 184.7 (d)(1) 
through (d)(8).
    (2) Safety program, organization, and training.
    (3) Fire prevention program and available firefighting resources, 
including local agreements;
    (4) Description of facilities, including size, construction design 
and materials, fire resistive capability, utilities, and current 
compliance with existing building regulations and codes;
    (5) Operational compliance with applicable Federal, state, and 
local requirements;
    (6) Required licenses or capability to obtain those required to 
perform proposed contract work;
    (7) Past safety history, including reports of safety surveys by 
Federal, state, or local safety, fire prevention, insurance, or other 
authorities; current status of waivers or exemptions issued by Federal, 
state, or local authorities; and mishap experience;
    (8) A&E collection and disposal systems and procedures (The 
contractor may wish to request specific clarification of A&E residue/
reject item disposition at this time); and
    (9) Hazard analysis, as appropriate.


Sec. 184.9  Pre-operational survey.

    After contract award, a significant mishap or completion of new 
construction or major modifications, DoD review and evaluation of the 
facilities and operations may be necessary before startup of production 
or services. The contractor shall contact the ACO to offer an 
opportunity for a pre-operational review by authorized DoD personnel.

Subpart B--Mishap Investigation and Reporting


Sec. 184.11  General.

    This subpart sets forth requirements to be followed for mishaps 
involving ammunition and explosives.


Sec. 184.12  Reporting criteria.

    All mishaps involving ammunition and explosives that result in one 
or more of the following shall be investigated by the contractor and 
reported to the ACO.
    (a) One or more fatalities;
    (b) One or more lost-workday cases (Refer to the Occupational 
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Blue Book.);\2\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\Copies may be obtained from Superintendent of Documents, U.S. 
Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Ten or more nonfatal injuries without lost workdays (Refer to 
the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Blue Book.);
    (d) Damage to Government property exceeding $10,000;
    (e) Delay in delivery schedule exceeding 24 hours:
    (f) Mishaps that are reportable in accordance with specific 
contractual requirements other than paragraphs (a) through (e) of this 
section; or
    (g) Any mishap that may degrade operational or production 
capability or likely to arouse unusual media interest because of 
exceptional circumstances.


    Note: Based upon the seriousness of the mishap and the 
criticality of the munitions or explosives involved, the ACO may 
determine that an additional, more comprehensive mishap 
investigation and report is desired.


Sec. 184.13  Mishap scene.

    In the event of an ammunition or explosives mishap, the contractor 
shall implement emergency procedures, such as controlling the spread of 
fire and attending to the injured. The contractor shall also secure the 
scene of the mishap, preventing unauthorized persons from entering the 
area in order to preserve evidence for the investigation.


Sec. 184.14  Telephone report.

    The contractor shall report any mishap described in Sec. 184.12, by 
telephone to the ACO as soon as practicable, but not later than 3 hours 
after the incident. The format provided for the written report will 
serve as a guide for the telephone report.


Sec. 184.15  Written report.

    (a) The contractor shall develop and submit to the ACO a written 
mishap report by the end of the second working day after the mishap 
occurrence. At a minimum, this written report shall include the 
following:
    (1) Contractor's name and location;
    (2) Date, local time, and plant/facility location of the accident;
    (3) Category of accident (explosion, fire, and so forth);
    (4) Contract, subcontract, or purchase order;
    (5) Item nomenclature, hazard classification, lot number;
    (6) Narrative (or abstract) of events pertaining to the mishap;
    (7) Number of injuries/fatalities, degree of injuries;
    (8) Description of property damage and approximate damage cost;
    (9) Quantity of explosives involved (pounds, units, rounds, and so 
forth);
    (10) Probable cause(s);
    (11) Corrective action taken or planned;
    (12) Effect on production;
    (13) Name, title or position, and phone number of person submitting 
report; and
    (14) Remarks.
    (b) Information not furnished in the initial written report shall 
be provided to the ACO within 30 days of the mishap.


Sec. 184.16  On-site government assistance.

    To help determine the cause or causes of the mishap, DoD 
representatives may monitor the contractor's mishap investigation on-
site. Additional investigation or reporting may be required by the PCO.


Sec. 184.17  Technical mishap investigation and report.

    If determined by the PCO, a technical mishap investigation may be 
conducted by a panel chaired by DoD personnel. Otherwise, the 
contractor will conduct the investigation at the PCO's request. In 
either case, a document will be produced that provides details such as 
missile fragmentation maps, photographs, description of mishap, effects 
on adjacent operations, structural and equipment damage, Q/D drawings, 
detailed description of occurrence, findings, and conclusions. The 
technical mishap investigation report shall be forwarded to the PCO 
through the ACO within 60 days of the official establishment of the 
investigative panel or, in the case of the contractor's investigation, 
from the date of the accident. The contractor will be informed 
immediately upon determination that the Department of Defense will form 
a panel to go on-site for an accident investigation.

Subpart C--Safe Practices


Sec. 184.19  General.

    This subpart provides general safe practices for all A&E operations 
addressed in this part. When these practices exceed or differ from 
local or national codes or requirements, the more restrictive shall 
apply.


Sec. 184.20  Personnel and materials limits.

    (a) The cardinal rule to be observed in any location or operation 
involving explosives, ammunition, severe fire hazards, or toxic 
materials is to limit exposure to a minimum number of personnel, for a 
minimum amount of time, to the minimum amount of the hazardous material 
consistent with safe and efficient operations. All operations shall be 
examined to devise methods for reducing the number of people exposed, 
the time of exposure, and the quantity of material subject to a single 
incident. Determination of personnel limits requires that jobs not 
essential to a particular hazardous operation be performed elsewhere; 
that no unnecessary personnel visit the location; and that frequent, 
consecutive operations shall not be permitted in the same room or 
building without adequate dividing walls, firewalls, or operational 
shields, depending upon the nature of the hazard. Personnel limits 
should allow for necessary supervision, workers, and transient workers.
    (b) Determination of limits for hazardous materials requires a 
careful analysis of all facts including operation timing, intraplant 
transportation methods, size of the items, and the chemical and 
physical characteristics of the material. Lower limits are required for 
the more sensitive or hazardous materials. Limits should be established 
for each operation, so that each worker may be charged with the 
responsibility of not exceeding the established limit. Limits need not 
be expressed in units of weight or in the number of items as such. They 
may be given in terms of trays, boxes, racks, or other units more 
easily observed and controlled. Limits shall not be based on the 
maximum quantity of explosives allowed by the existing quantity/
distance separations when lesser quantities of explosives will suffice 
for the operations.
    (c) The maximum number of personnel and quantity of explosives 
permitted at any one time shall be prominently displayed in all 
buildings, cubicles, cells, and rooms containing A&E. These limits 
shall be kept current, and enforced by the supervisor, foreman, or 
worker in charge. The personnel and explosives limits for all 
operations shall be recorded in the applicable standing operating 
procedure (SOP). Personnel limits need not be posted in storage 
magazines, magazine areas, or transfer points. Explosives limits need 
only be posted in storage magazines for which the limit differs from 
that for other magazines in the block, or when unusual circumstances 
prevent the limit from being readily apparent.


Sec. 184.21  Standing operating procedures (SOPs).

    Prior to starting any operation involving hazardous materials, 
adequate SOPs shall be developed, reviewed, and approved by qualified 
personnel. The SOPs shall be clearly written to avoid confusion and 
ensure process control at all times.
    (a) Preparation. All aspects of a procedure shall be examined to 
determine a safe and orderly course of action for accomplishing the 
work. Controlled tests may be necessary in order to establish SOPs for 
certain operations. The SOP shall include, at a minimum, such items as 
safety requirements; specific emergency procedures; personal protective 
clothing and equipment; personnel and explosives limits for each 
operation; equipment designation; location and sequence of operations; 
and the particulars regarding how, when, where, and by whom each task 
of the operation shall be performed.
    (b) Dissemination. Supervisors shall be responsible for explaining 
duties prescribed by the SOP to all personnel involved in an A&E 
operation.
    (c) Posting. Those portions of the approved SOP, determined by the 
managing authority to be necessary to facilitate operations, shall be 
posted in a spot convenient to all stations involved in the operation. 
This need not be at the work station if the worker could be distracted, 
causing an accident. Supervisory personnel shall assume responsibility 
for enforcing provisions of the SOP; and should maintain copies of the 
entire document.
    (d) Emergency procedures. Action to be taken in the event of 
electrical storms, utility or mechanical failures and the like, 
occurring during the manufacturing, handling, or processing of A&E and 
other hazardous materials, shall be set forth in the SOP as described 
in the preceding paragraphs, or shall be set forth in separate SOPs 
prepared specifically for such purposes.
    (e) Recertification. SOPs shall be constantly reviewed by qualified 
personnel, changed and recertified by the managing authority as often 
as necessary to reflect improved methods, equipment substitutions, 
facility modification, or process revisions.
    (f) Training. Operator training shall cover approved safety 
procedures, hazardous materials information, safety and warning 
devices, personal protective clothing and equipment, and emergency 
equipment.


Sec. 184.22  Storage in operating buildings.

    (a) Only those quantities of hazardous materials (excluding 
explosives, propellant and pyrotechnic materials) essential for current 
operations shall be stored within an operating building. Explosive 
materials exceeding work requirements shall be stored in a separate 
service storage magazine area located at the appropriate intraline 
distance from the operating building or area, based on the quantity of 
explosives stored in the service magazine.
    (b) If storage is required by operational necessity, and intraline 
distance is not available for a separate storage magazine, contractors 
may designate in-process holding containers or structures within the 
operating building, provided the following apply:
    (1) Those containers or structures would preclude propagation from 
the operational location to the holding site if an explosives mishap 
should occur at the operational site.
    (2) Consideration is given to the structural containment afforded, 
venting, and the use of non-propagating packaging within the temporary 
holding site.
    (3) Quantities of A&E in these holding sites are kept as low as 
possible, not exceeding amounts required for one half of a work shift.
    (4) Procedures have been developed to minimize exposure during 
transfer operations.
    (5) Plant managers acquire and approve documented test results that 
confirm non-propagation characteristics.
    (c) If operationally required, A&E that are a part of the work in 
process within the building may be stored in operating buildings non-
operational hours, providing the following requirements are strictly 
observed:
    (1) Explosives limits are not exceeded.
    (2) Containers of bulk explosives or propellants are secured and 
covered.
    (3) Processing equipment, such as powder hoppers and pipelines, is 
empty.
    (d) Before an operation in a building shuts down for longer than a 
weekend or normal holiday period, all hazardous materials should be 
processed through the facility. If this is not possible, as much of the 
in-process material as possible should be processed and transferred to 
an approved storage area before shutdown; no new material should be 
introduced. The additional precautions listed in Sec. 184.22(c), shall 
apply, and responsible personnel shall be informed of the above storage 
conditions.


Sec. 184.23  Housekeeping in hazardous areas.

    (a) Structures containing explosives shall be kept clean and 
orderly.
    (b) Explosives and explosives dusts shall not accumulate on 
structural members, radiators, heating coils, steam, gas, air, water 
supply pipes, or electrical fixtures.
    (c) Spillage of explosives and other hazardous materials shall be 
prevented by proper design of equipment, training of employees, 
provision for catch pans, and so forth. For example, hoppers should be 
large enough to comfortably accommodate the size of charges used. A 
painted stripe on the inside of the hopper shall serve as a reminder of 
the proper filling height. Catch pans or splash pans should be provided 
beneath drawoff pipes and TNT flakers, around transfer piping, beneath 
powder bags on small arms ammunition charging machines, and so forth. 
Spillage shall be promptly removed.
    (d) A regular program of cleaning shall be conducted to maintain 
safe conditions. General cleaning shall not be conducted while 
hazardous operations are being performed.
    (e) Hot water or steam should be used for cleaning floors in 
buildings containing explosives. When neither is practical, sweeping 
compounds that are nonabrasive and compatible with the explosives 
involved may be used. Such compounds may be combustible, but not 
volatile (closed cup flash point shall not be less than 230  deg.F). 
Sweeping compounds containing wax shall not be used on conductive 
flooring. Because nitrated organic explosives can form sensitive 
explosive compounds with caustic alkalies, cleaning agents containing 
such alkalies shall not be used around them.
    (f) Nonferrous wire brushes may be used in cleaning explosives-
processing equipment only when other methods of cleaning are 
ineffective; a thorough inspection should follow such cleaning to 
ensure that no wire bristles remain in the equipment. This applies also 
to cleaning magnesium ingot molds and molds for any other metal used in 
an explosive. Substituting fiber brushes for hair brushes is 
recommended to reduce generation of static.
    (g) All loose explosives swept up from floors of operating 
buildings shall be destroyed. Explosives recovered from sources other 
than ammunition breakdown operations and equipment shall be thoroughly 
inspected to determine disposition. It may be reused, screened, 
reprocessed, or destroyed, as the situation warrants.


Sec. 184.24  Explosives waste in operating areas.

    (a) At this writing, the Environmental Protection Agency is 
developing rules which shall apply to each contractor beyond the scope 
of this part. Explosive safety should not be compromised while meeting 
environmental considerations.
    (b) Each waste material generated in an explosives area shall 
require analysis to determine appropriate methods for safe handling and 
disposition. All explosives waste and contaminated materials shall be 
kept in covered containers marked to indicate their contents, 
preferably located in isolated bays or outside the buildings.
    (c) Containers for scrap black powder and smokeless powders shall 
contain water. Certain pyrotechnic, tracer, flare and similar 
compositions shall be totally immersed in mineral oil or fuel oil in 
the waste containers. Waste initiating explosives shall be kept to a 
minimum, usually under water or other selected media, and shall be 
handled with great care. Explosives waste materials should not be left 
in operating buildings overnight during normal periods of shutdown or 
over weekends and holidays.
    (d) Workers shall be trained to transport explosives wastes in 
designated vehicles (see Sec. 184.38) to storage locations specifically 
assigned for that purpose. Explosives waste shall not be stored with 
serviceable explosives. A minimum of magazine distance shall be 
maintained between locations where explosives wastes are stored, and 
those used for serviceable ammunition and explosives.


Sec. 184.25  Procedure before electrical storms.

    (a) When an electrical storm approaches, all personnel shall 
evacuate locations where lightning could initiate explosions. Such 
locations include:
    (1) Operating buildings or facilities containing explosives or 
explosives-loaded ammunition, not equipped with lightning protection 
systems, and locations within unbarricaded intraline distance of such 
facilities;
    (2) Buildings containing explosives dust or vapors, whether or not 
equipped with lightning protection systems, and locations within 
unbarricaded intraline distance of such buildings;
    (3) Magazines, open storage sites, or loading docks, not equipped 
with lightning protection systems; and
    (4) Locations, with or without lightning protection, where 
operations involving unprotected electro-explosive devices or circuitry 
are being performed.
    (b) A qualified person in authority should make the final decision 
about evacuation. When special warning is required for shutdown, 
volunteer observers or a detector (lightning detection system) may be 
used.
    (c) All personnel shall evacuate to locations identified in the 
SOP. These locations shall be at unbarricaded intraline distance or 
greater, or in a shelter providing equivalent protection.


Sec. 184.26  Explosives in process during shutdown.

    When electrical storms cause evacuation of explosives buildings, 
operations requiring constant attention shall be manned by the minimum 
number of personnel consistent with safety requirements. Once the 
process has reached a condition in which it is considered safe to 
leave, the building shall be completely evacuated. Explosives processes 
requiring constant attention should not be started when an electrical 
storm threatens.


Sec. 184.27  Maintenance and repairs to equipment and buildings.

    (a) All new or newly repaired explosives processing equipment shall 
be examined and tested to ensure that it is in safe working condition 
before being placed in service.
    (b) Before repairs can proceed on equipment exposed to explosives, 
a decontamination tag, signed by supervisory personnel, shall be placed 
on the equipment. The tag shall certify all explosives have been 
removed from the equipment or identify parts that could not be cleaned, 
and shall provide maintenance personnel with instructions on safe 
handling.
    (c) Major repairs or changes shall not be undertaken in a building 
during regular operations until the hazardous material has been removed 
and the employee in charge of the building informed.
    (d) Repairs cannot start in an explosives location until all 
explosives have been removed from equipment, crevices, areas beneath 
floors, within walls and pipes, and under fittings where explosives 
could be ignited. The entire area should be wetted or washed down 
thoroughly. An inspection of the immediate vicinity shall assure no 
explosives remain.
    (e) After repairing, maintaining or adjusting machines and 
equipment, an inspection shall be made to assure all tools used for the 
work are removed. Before work resumes, operators should check their own 
equipment to ensure its safe operating condition.
    (f) Electricians shall not wear conductive shoes while working on 
electrical equipment. Exposed explosives and other static-sensitive 
hazardous material shall be removed before work begins.
    (g) Safe practices specified elsewhere in this part shall also 
apply to maintenance employees.
    (h) Maintenance and tool rooms in an operating line should be 
separated from explosives by intraline distance. Protection equivalent 
to that afforded by a suitable barrier shall be provided when this 
proves impractical.


Sec. 184.28  Safety hand-tools.

    (a) Hand tools constructed of wood or materials such as bronze, 
lead, and ``K'' Monel metal shall be used for work in locations that 
contain exposed explosives or hazardous concentrations of flammable 
dusts, gases, or vapors. While safer, the nonferrous metals used in so-
called non-sparking tools may produce sparks.
    (b) If their strength makes the use of ferrous metal hand tools 
necessary, exposed explosives and other highly combustible materials 
shall be removed from the area as required in Sec. 184.27 (b) through 
(d).


Sec. 184.29  Operational shields.

    (a) The purpose of operational shields is to prevent propagation of 
explosions from one explosives operation or location to another, to 
protect facilities and equipment and to provide personnel protection. 
Therefore, all A&E operations and processes shall be assessed prior to 
work performance to determine the type of hazard involved, the level of 
risk associated with the A&E material or item, and the corresponding 
level of protection normally provided.
    (b) The primary hazards that accompany explosions and deflagrations 
are potential blast overpressure, fragmentation (primary and 
secondary), and thermal effects. These hazards and the following 
factors shall be considered, as a minimum, during the above assessment:
    (1) Initiation sensitivity,
    (2) Potential ignition sources,
    (3) Quantity of A&E,
    (4) Rate of burning,
    (5) A&E and personnel resource exposures, and
    (6) Protection capabilities of shields.
    (c) When analysis of these factors indicates an unacceptable 
probability of explosion or deflagration, resources shall be dedicated 
to additional protection for personnel and equipment. If operational 
shields are selected for this purpose, they shall be tested prior to 
installation to assure compliance with the following criteria:
    (1) Prevent propagation due to blast overpressure.
    (2) Contain all fragmentation or direct fragments (primary and 
secondary) away from areas requiring protection.
    (3) Contain thermal effects to prevent propagation.
    (d) Operational shields shall be tested under conditions that 
simulate the operational environment. A&E materials or items used in 
the test shall correspond to those that may be involved in a maximum 
credible incident, plus a 25 percent overcharge. Test methods, 
recording instrumentation and written documentation shall clearly 
demonstrate that the above protection criteria are met before the 
operational shield is used. Shields meeting the requirements of MIL-
STD-398,\3\ Shields, Operational for Ammunition Operations, Criteria 
for Design of and Tests for Acceptance, are acceptable. Analysis rather 
than testing of shields may be acceptable on a case-by-case basis. When 
the doors of explosives processing equipment function as operational 
shields, interlocking devices shall be installed to prevent the 
operator from opening the door while the equipment is in operation.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \3\Copies may be obtained from Naval Publications and Forms 
Center, 5801 Tabor Avenue, Philadelphia, PA 19120.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------


Sec. 184.30  Special clothing.

    (a) A changing area shall be established for employees who must 
remove their street clothes to wear special clothing (explosives plant 
clothing, anticontamination clothing, impervious clothing, and so 
forth). To avoid exposing people not involved in A&E operations to 
unnecessary risks, special clothing worn during A&E operations shall 
not be worn or taken away from the premises. Special clothing should 
not be altered. Cotton undergarments, including socks, shall be worn 
whenever static electricity is a hazard.
    (b) Explosives plant clothing, generally referred to as powder 
uniforms, shall be fastened with nonmetallic fasteners and easily 
removable. Pockets should be of the lattice type. Pants and sleeves 
should be tapered and without cuffs, and pants should extend over the 
tops of footwear. These garments should be flame resistant or made of 
flame retardant material. Each plant should have laundering facilities 
available for removing contaminants from explosives plant clothing. 
Hazardous waste procedures should be established for the laundry. 
Regular testing shall verify the effectiveness of the laundering 
operations.
    (c) When explosives contaminated clothing is sent to an off-plant 
laundry facility, the contractor is responsible for informing the 
laundry of the hazards associated with the contamination and any 
special laundering or disposal requirements.


Sec. 184.31  Conductive footwear.

    (a) When conductive mats, floors, and runners are required, 
operators shall wear conductive shoes. Personnel visiting any such area 
shall wear conductive shoes, ankle straps, or similar devices, one on 
each leg.
    (b) Tests of conductive shoes or equivalent, shall be made 
initially and daily thereafter to ensure that the resistance from the 
person through the conductive shoes is less than or equal to one 
million ohms. Documentation of this testing, to include calibration of 
test equipment, shall be kept by supervisory personnel. The test 
voltage shall not exceed 500 volts. The short circuit current across 
the electrodes (plates) shall not exceed 2.0 milliamperes (0.5 
milliamperes is preferred). The instruments shall have built-in 
safeguards preventing the test subject from experiencing electric 
shock. Tests shall not be performed in rooms with exposed explosives. 
Shoes should be tested first without cleaning the soles and heels; if 
the resistance does not exceed allowed levels, the shoes may be worn. 
If resistance exceeds 450,000 ohms per shoe, the pair shall be cleaned 
and retested. Sandpaper, solvents, or other agents affecting the 
structure or conductivity of the sole materials should not be used. 
Separating or removing the conductive sock liner from the conductive 
plug or depressing the conductive plugs below the surface of the insole 
of the shoe can cause high resistance. Nonconductive stockings such as 
silk, wool, and synthetics; and foot powders, which have a drying 
action, shall be avoided. Conductive shoes should be clearly labeled as 
such.


Sec. 184.32  Materials handling equipment.

    (a) Gasoline-, diesel-, and LP-powered equipment shall not be 
refueled inside warehouses or similar buildings containing ammunition 
and explosives. If the fuel supply is exhausted while the equipment is 
inside a building, the equipment shall be towed outside to a safe 
location for refueling: at least 20 feet from inert buildings, and 
inert loading docks; and 90 feet from explosives locations or 
buildings. Doors and windows through which vapors may enter the 
building shall be closed during refueling. Refueling trucks shall not 
be located close to explosives buildings during refueling operations, 
but shall be parked as far as practicable from these buildings, in 
accordance with the above requirements.
    (b) Gasoline-, diesel-, and LP-powered equipment shall not be 
stored in buildings containing explosives or ammunition or on 
explosives loading docks or piers when A&E is present. A central 
storage location for gasoline-, diesel-, and LP-powered equipment is 
preferred. Such a building should be located at least 50 feet from 
other buildings to avoid a fire hazard.
    (c) Gasoline-, diesel-, and LP-powered equipment shall receive 
periodic inspections of exhaust and electrical systems with the results 
documented. Spark arresters shall be required on exhaust systems.


Sec. 184.33  Parking of privately owned vehicles.

    Controlled parking of privately owned vehicles within an 
establishment minimizes fire and explosion hazards and prevents 
congestion in an emergency. Vehicles should be parked in designated 
areas only, at intraline distance and outside of restricted areas. 
Vehicles shall not be parked so close to an explosives building or 
structure that fire could spread from them to the building, or that 
they could impede firefighters.


Sec. 184.34  Prohibited articles in hazardous areas.

    Except as authorized, personnel shall not carry matches, cigarette 
lighters, or other flame-producing devices into explosives areas. 
Personal articles that increase existing hazards are also prohibited.


Sec. 184.35  Photographic materials in hazardous areas.

    Photoflash bulbs or electronic flash attachments shall not be used 
around exposed explosives, explosive dusts, flammable gases, or vapors. 
Only lighting equipment approved by a nationally recognized testing 
laboratory shall be used.


Sec. 184.36  Operational explosives containers.

    (a) Containers used for intraplant transportation or temporary 
storage of process explosives and energetic materials shall be designed 
to prevent leakage. These containers should be equipped with covers 
(lids) and constructed of materials in the following order of 
precedence:
    (1) Conductive rubber or conductive plastic,
    (2) Nonferrous metal-lined boxes without seams or rivet heads under 
which explosive dusts could accumulate,
    (3) Paper-lined wooden boxes, or
    (4) Fiber drums.
    (b) These containers should be marked with the type of explosive or 
hazard involved.
    (c) Because of their fragility and fragment potential, glass 
containers shall not be used.


Sec. 184.37  Intraplant rail transportation.

    This section addresses intraplant transportation of explosives and 
may exceed national requirements because of material characteristics 
and operational hazards. When construction or major modification of 
transportation, packaging, or loading facilities is planned or 
anticipated, the contractor is responsible for ensuring that applicable 
Federal, state, and local requirements and those contained within this 
manual are met. The applicable requirements promulgated by Department 
of Transportation (DOT) and other Federal or local regulatory agencies 
concerning preparation, marking, and shipment of ammunition and 
explosives should appear in the contract.
    (a) Operating rules. Local procedures to ensure safe and efficient 
rail movement of A&E shall be developed, and shall include the 
following minimum requirements:
    (1) Movements in the classification yards are considered switch 
movements. All others are considered transfer movements. Before cars 
containing A&E move, air hoses shall be coupled, air brakes cut-in and 
in proper working order, and the car doors closed. Cars should remain 
coupled while in motion. Safety precautions shall be observed when 
breaking air hose connections.
    (2) When single explosives-loaded cars are spotted, the hand brakes 
shall be set and the wheels properly chocked. When more than one car is 
spotted and its engine detached, the hand brakes shall be set on enough 
cars to ensure sufficient braking. Hand brakes shall be set on the 
downgrade end of the cut of rail cars. Reliance should not be placed on 
the automatic air brakes to hold spotted cars.
    (3) A person should be stationed at the hand brake of a car mover 
when in use.
    (4) During transfer movements within establishments, full or 
partial loads in rail cars shall be blocked and braced so they cannot 
shift position.
    (5) Empty rail cars shall remain in warehouses, magazines, 
buildings, or loading docks until all warning placards have been 
removed or reversed, as appropriate.
    (6) Special care shall be taken to avoid rough handling of cars 
containing A&E. These cars shall not be ``sent off'' while in motion 
and shall be carefully coupled to avoid unnecessary shocks. Other cars 
shall not be ``cut off'' and allowed to strike a car containing 
explosives.
    (7) A buffer car should separate rail cars containing explosives 
and the switching engine when in motion.
    (8) Flags or signals at both ends of a rail car or cut of cars 
shall protect personnel working in, on, or under the cars. During these 
periods, cars shall not be coupled or moved.
    (9) Portable transmitters and railroad locomotives equipped with 
two-way radios shall not transmit when passing explosives operating 
buildings where electro-explosive devices are in use. The contractor 
shall determine minimum safe distances based on radio frequency (RF), 
frequency modulation (FM), and amplitude modulation (AM) of the 
transmitter.
    (b) Rail car inspections. (1) Qualified personnel shall inspect 
empty rail cars intended to transport A&E upon arrival, verifying that 
the carrier has complied with DOT requirements.
    (2) Before loading, the brakes shall be set on cars spotted for 
loading, and bridge plates equipped with side boards and stops shall be 
provided.
    (c) Loaded incoming rail car inspections. (1) Railroad cars with 
A&E should, upon arrival, be inspected at remote sites. If no problems 
are found, rail cars may be opened for interior inspection or moved to 
the designated unloading point.
    (2) A&E-loaded cars on which foreign and suspicious articles have 
been attached outside or underneath the car, or that have a defect 
which could affect the safety of the establishment or the contents of 
the car, shall be moved to the suspect car site for disposition.
    (3) Cars should be inspected after unloading A&E to ensure that 
they are clean and free from loose explosives and flammable materials, 
and that placards and car certificates have been removed. Explosives 
swept from the floors shall be disposed of properly.


Sec. 184.38  Intraplant motor vehicle transportation.

    (a) Operating rules. Procedures for safe transportation of A&E in 
motor vehicles shall be developed locally, and should include the 
following:
    (1) Brakes shall be set and the wheels chocked while loading and 
un-loading on a grade.
    (2) A&E shall not be loaded or unloaded when a motor vehicle's 
engine is running, unless the engine is providing power to accessories 
used in the loading and unloading, such as mechanical handling 
equipment.
    (3) Vehicles, including flat-bed, partly or completely loaded, 
shall have the load blocked and braced to prevent shifting during 
transit.
    (b) Vehicle inspections. All motor vehicles used to transport A&E 
shall be inspected before loading to ensure the following:
    (1) Batteries and wiring shall not come into contact with 
containers of A&E.
    (2) Exposed ferrous metal in the interior of the vehicle body shall 
be covered with nonsparking material when scrap and bulk explosives are 
being transported in containers that could be damaged, or when 
explosives could otherwise become exposed.
    (3) A portable fire extinguisher of the appropriate class shall be 
carried on motor vehicles used for transporting A&E.
    (4) Motor vehicles transporting A&E within the establishment but 
outside the explosives area, shall bear at least two appropriate 
placards. These placards should be removed or covered whenever the 
vehicle is not loaded. Reflectorized placards are preferred.
    (5) Motor vehicles or equipment with internal combustion engines, 
used near explosives scrap, waste, or items contaminated with 
explosives, shall have exhaust system spark arresters and carburetor 
flame arresters (authorized air cleaners). They should be inspected and 
cleaned to prevent accumulation of carbon.
    (c) Loaded incoming vehicle inspections. (1) Vehicles with A&E 
should, upon arrival, be inspected at remote sites. If no problems are 
found, vehicles may be opened for interior inspection or moved to the 
designated unloading point.
    (2) A&E-loaded vehicles on which foreign and suspicious articles 
have been attached outside or underneath the car, or that have a defect 
which could affect the safety of the establishment or the contents of 
the vehicle, shall be moved to the suspect car site for disposition.
    (3) Vehicles should be inspected after unloading A&E to ensure that 
they are clean and free from loose explosives and flammable materials, 
and that placards and vehicle certificates have been removed. 
Explosives swept from the floors shall be disposed of properly.


Sec. 184.39  Inspection of pyrotechnic, propellant and explosive 
mixers.

    Mixers used for manufacturing pyrotechnics, propellants and 
explosives shall have an initial inspection prior to use and shall be 
on a periodic inspection schedule during operating life.
    (a) The initial inspection shall, as a minimum, require 
radiographic and dye penetrant inspection of the blades and blade to 
shaft areas, blade to bowl clearances, allowable tolerances, testing 
for proper function of operating systems such as bowl positioning 
mechanisms, safety interlocks, fire detection and prevention and test 
of computer controller software selfcheck.
    (b) Periodic inspection shall be provided during the operating life 
of the mixer. The inspection program shall be based on manufacturer's 
recommendations, operating history of like mixers, and any items 
identified in hazards analysis of the particular mixer and its 
operation. The inspection program shall include:
    (1) Tests and visual inspection criteria to be performed prior to 
each use to include associated equipment which might come loose and 
fall into the mixer.
    (2) Periodic inspections of clearances between blades and bowl at 
sufficient points to detect any distortion of the bowl or kettle.
    (3) Inspection and test for drive system wear, bearings condition 
and gear alignment with loading to establish operation within 
tolerances when applicable.
    (4) Inspection and test of proper function of operating subsystems 
such as bowl handling, safety and fire and control, including computer 
software selfcheck.
    (c) It is recommended that large (over 80 gallon) vertical blade 
mixers in high torque applications have a dye penetrant check of the 
blades annually or after every 300 hours of operation. Melt-cast 
kettles are not considered high torque mixers. Also, it is recommended 
that an inspection of clearances and operating systems be performed 
after any maintenance, unusual even such as severe weather exposure 
mishandling of bowl or mixer or long idle period.
    (d) A log of the maintenance and inspection shall be maintained. 
Trend analysis of clearances should be used to detect wear which might 
become hazardous.

Subpart D--Principles and Application of Quantity/Distance (Q/D), 
Standard Explosives Facilities, and Siting Requirements


Sec. 184.40  General.

    Explosives classes and divisions identified in this subpart are 
defined in TB 700-2,\1\ Explosives Hazard Classification Procedures, 
and more fully explained in subpart F of this part. This subpart D sets 
forth the following:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\Copies may be obtained from Superintendent of Documents, U.S. 
Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (a) Rules for establishing quantities of explosives;
    (b) Computations and determinations of quantity distance;
    (c) Assessment of the explosion effects, such as facility damage 
and personnel injury expected at specific scaled distances for Hazard 
Division 1.1, explosives;
    (d) Recommended methods for controlling the effects of Hazard 
Division 1.1, explosions;
    (e) Acceptable exposures at specific scaled distances;
    (f) Types and general specifications of various ammunition and 
explosives facilities; and
    (g) Siting requirements for specific facilities.


Sec. 184.41  Quantity/distance (Q/D).

    (a) Quantity distances are determined by establishing a net 
explosive weight (NEW) at a point and measuring from that point to an 
exposure. The source of a Q/D measurement is called a potential 
explosion site, or PES. For Q/D purposes, one considers the total net 
explosives weight that will be involved in an accidental explosion at 
the PES. A PES may be a round of ammunition, a vehicle, an operating 
building, or simply a location where explosives are stacked.
    (b) Any building, vehicle, location, or ammunition that shall be 
protected from an accidental explosion at another source, is called the 
exposed site, or ES. An ES may contain explosives requiring protection 
from a secondary explosive source located a distance away. An ES may 
also be a home, stadium, high-rise apartment, a public highway or any 
other facility or location requiring protection from an accidental 
explosion.
    (c) Separation distances for Q/D purposes are measured in straight 
lines from the nearest part of the room, bay or structure containing 
explosives (PES) to the nearest point of the exposed structure.


Sec. 184.42  Establishment of quantity of explosives and distances.

    (a) Quantity of explosives. The Quantity/Distance tables are used 
to provide appropriate distances from potential explosion sites (PES). 
The hazard classification of the A&E and the weight of explosives 
involved are primary characteristics governing the use of Q/D tables. 
The definitions and methods for determining hazard classifications are 
in subpart F of this part. Methods for determining the net explosives 
weight (NEW) is explained in the following:
    (1) Mass-detonating explosives (Hazard Division 1.1). The total 
weight of explosives (NEW).
    (2) Nonmass-detonating explosives--(i) Propellants (Hazard Division 
1.3). The total weight of the propellants alone is the net propellant 
weight.
    (ii) Pyrotechnic items (Hazard Division 1.1 and Hazard Division 
1.3). The sum of the net weights of the pyrotechnic composition and the 
explosives involved.
    (iii) Bulk metal powder and pyrotechnic compositions. The sum of 
the net weights of metal powders and pyrotechnic compositions in the 
containers.
    (iv) Other ammunition. The net weight of high explosives (Hazard 
Division 1.1), plus any blast contribution determined by test, if any, 
from propellant, pyrotechnic components, or expelling charges (percent 
of Hazard Division 1.3).
    (3) Combinations of mass-detonating and nonmass-detonating A&E 
(excluding Hazard Division 1.4). The total net weight of the mass-
detonating and the nonmass-detonating A&E. If the nonmass-detonating 
items, alone, require a greater distance than the total explosives so 
computed, then this greater distance is mandatory.
    (4) Combinations of nonmass-detonating ammunition and explosives of 
different class 1 divisions shall be treated as follows:
    (1) Determine the required separation of each division.
    (ii) Use the greatest separation of those determined.
    (b) Q/D computations and determinations. (1) Throughout these 
requirements, NEW is used to calculate distance by means of formula 
D=KW\1/3\, where D is the distance in feet, K is the 
appropriate risk factor and W is the NEW in pounds. Distance 
requirements are sometimes expressed by the value of K, such as K9, 
K11, and K18 to signify K=9, K=11, K=18, respectively.
    (2) The quantity of explosives in a magazine, operating building, 
or other explosives site shall be the new weight of all the explosives 
contained therein. Q/D shall be based on the H/D requiring the greatest 
separation, unless the NEW is divided by walls or shields for that 
purpose.
    (i) When dividing a quantity of mass-detonating explosives into 
smaller stacks, a suitable barrier or adequate separation distance 
shall prevent propagation from one stack to another. Barriers designed 
and constructed in accordance with TM 5-1300/AFM 88-22/NAVFAC P-397,\5\ 
Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions, satisfy this 
requirement. In such cases, the explosives content of the stack 
requiring the greatest distance shall govern. Otherwise Q/D 
computations shall be based on the sum of the mass-detonating 
explosives in all of the stacks.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \5\Tri-service document. Copies may be obtained from 
Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, 
Washington, DC 20402.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) Blast waves shall coalesce when two or more stacks of mass-
detonating explosives detonate within short time intervals (that is, 
when the time in milliseconds is less than 4 times the cube root of the 
explosive weight in pounds for lateral target positions and less than 
5.6 times the cube root of the explosive weight in pounds for axial 
target positions). The resultant shock wave shall be that of a single 
detonation of a charge equal to the sum of the several stacks. The 
actual separation time between successive detonations is influenced by 
the spatial separation, geometry, and distribution of explosives; the 
character of the dividing wall or other barrier; and the sensitivity of 
the explosives.
    (3) The quantity of explosives permitted in each of two or more 
locations shall be determined by considering each location as a 
potential explosion site (PES). The quantity of explosives permitted in 
each of these locations shall be the amount permitted by the distance 
specified in the appropriate Q/D tables considering each as a potential 
target site in turn, except for service magazines (see 
Sec. 184.43(a)(7) and Sec. 184.43(b)(6)).
    (4) Quantity/distance tables are in Subpart F of this part. The 
formulae specified in Appendices A through D to Subpart F of this part 
may be used to interpolate exact distances for Hazard Division 1.1 
explosives. The notes to Appendix L to Subpart F of this part provide 
distance formulae for Hazard Division 1.3 distances.
    (5) It is impractical to specify Q/D separations large enough to 
allow for the designed flight range of propulsive units (rockets, 
missile motors, and catapults) that properly belong in Hazard Divisions 
1.1, 1.2 or 1.3. Therefore, maximum flight ranges for self-propelling 
munitions shall be disregarded. The distance required to afford 
protection from fragments in credible accident situations, however, 
shall be established in accordance with the principles in 
Sec. 184.52(f).
    (6) Separation distances for Q/D purposes shall be measured from 
the nearest part of an exposed structure or site, to the nearest wall 
of the controlling subdivision or structure containing explosives, as 
appropriate. Separation distances are measured along straight lines.
    (7) Where railroad cars or motor vehicles containing ammunition and 
explosives are not separated from operating buildings, magazines, or 
open A&E storage sites in a manner precluding their mass detonation, 
the separation distance shall be based on the total quantity of 
explosives (see Sec. 184.41(a)) and measured form the outside wall of 
the building, railcar, vehicle, or edge of open stack closest to the 
target. If the explosives are separated into smaller units so that mass 
detonation of the explosives in the railcars and motor vehicles and 
inside unit or units shall not occur, the separation distance shall be 
measured from the controlling explosives unit, railcar or vehicle 
closest to a target.
    (c) Hazard Division 1.1, explosion effects, exposure controls, and 
degrees of safety afforded. Facility damage and personnel injury from 
Hazard Division 1.1, A&E, principally depend on blast overpressure and 
impulse, although for limited quantities fragment hazards may control 
Q/D. For general purposes, peak incident overpressure is the blast 
parameter defining maximum permissible levels of exposure. However, in 
specific instances the physical characteristics of exposed structures 
(such as mass, stiffness, ductility, and so forth) can make blast 
impulse the principal damage-causing factor.
    (1) Separation distances for earth covered magazines (see 
Appendices D and E to Subpart F of this part) provide virtually 
complete protection against propagation of explosions among earth-
covered magazines by blast, fragments, or fire. Some cracking of 
concrete barrels and rear walls, spalling and severe cracking of front 
walls, and damage to doors and ventilators may, however, occur.
    (2) Aboveground magazine distances (see columns 10 and 12, Appendix 
D to Subpart F of this part) provide considerable protection against 
propagation of explosions among above-ground magazines by blast. 
Depending on ammunition type, however, there is a risk of delayed 
propagation by fragments or of fire spreading from one magazine to 
another. Properly designed and placed barricades reduce the risk of 
communicating explosion through high-velocity, low-angle fragments. 
Without barricades, this risk is high.
    (i) The above ground magazine separation distance of 6W1/3 
feet corresponds to a peak overpressure level of 27 psi (1.8 bars) (1 
bar=14.5 psi) when the explosion source is in the open. Neither the 
overpressure nor any other pertinent blast parameter, such as impulse, 
shall be significantly reduced by an ordinary storage building of 
conventional unstrengthened industrial construction at the explosion 
site, or by the barricade required between aboveground magazines at 
this distance. A conventional unstrengthened building exposed at this 
distance shall be destroyed, vehicles overturned and crushed, and all 
occupants killed.
    (ii) The unbarricaded aboveground magazine separation distance of 
11W1/3 feet corresponds to a peak overpressure level of 8 psi (0.5 
bars) from an explosion source in the open. Blast observed at this 
distance shall be suppressed only slightly by a storage building of 
conventional construction at the explosion site. A conventional 
unstrengthened building exposed at this distance shall be destroyed. 
Blast will seriously injure eardrums and lungs of any survivor, as will 
being blown down or stuck by fragments or building debris. Vehicles 
will be severely damaged by blast and may be inoperable.
    (3) At blast overpressure of 12 psi (0.7 bars) occurring at scaled 
distance of 9W1/3 feet (see Appendices B and C to Subpart F of 
this part):
    (i) Unstrengthened buildings will suffer severe structural damage 
approaching total destruction.
    (ii) People at the exposed site will be killed or severely injured 
by being thrown about by blast or by building collapse.
    (iii) Aircraft will be damaged beyond repair. If the aircraft are 
loaded with explosives, delayed explosions are likely to result from 
subsequent fires.
    (iv) Transport vehicles will be heavily damaged, probably to the 
extent of total loss.
    (v) Direct propagation of explosion between two explosives 
locations is unlikely when barricades between them intercept high-
velocity, low-angle fragments (see Sec. 184.43(a)).
    (vi) Improperly designed barricades or structures increase the 
hazard from flying debris; further, their probable collapse threatens 
personnel and equipment.
    (vii) Exposed structures housing personnel or containing equipment 
that is monetarily valuable or critically important to the mission, may 
require hardening.
    (4) At blast overpressure of 3.5 psi (0.24 bars) occurring at 
scaled distance of 18W1/3 (see Appendix B to Subpart F of this 
part):
    (i) Direct propagation of explosion is not expected.
    (ii) Delayed communication of explosion from fires, or equipment 
failure at the exposed site (ES), is possible.
    (iii) Unstrengthened buildings will sustain serious damage, 
approximating 50 percent of the total replacement cost.
    (iv) Personnel will be critically injured or killed by fragments, 
debris, firebrands, and so forth.
    (v) There is a 1 percent chance of eardrum damage to personnel.
    (vi) Aircraft will be severely damaged from blast, fragments, and 
debris.
    (vii) Transport vehicles' body panels will be dished and shatter-
resistant window glass will crack. Though extensive, this damage will 
not prevent the vehicles from operating.
    (viii) Overpressure control by suppressive construction at the PES, 
or by protective construction at the ES, is recommended if it is more 
economical than distance alone, or if distance cannot suffice.
    (5) At blast overpressure of 2.3 psi (0.16 bars) occurring at 
scaled distance of 24W1/3 (for quantities up to 100,000 pounds, 
see column 8, Appendix A to Subpart F of this part).
    (i) Unstrengthened buildings will sustain damage approximating 20 
percent of their replacement cost.
    (ii) Occupants of exposed structures may suffer temporary hearing 
loss or be injured by such blast effects as building debris and being 
bodily thrown about.
    (iii) Personnel in the open should not be seriously injured by the 
blast itself. Fragments and debris could, however, cause injuries, 
depending on the PES structure and the fragmentation characteristics 
and amount of ammunition within.
    (iv) Vehicles on the road should not be damaged unless hit by 
fragments or the operator loses control during the blast wave.
    (v) Aircraft appendages and sheet metal skin could be damaged by 
blast and possibly fragment penetrations, but should be operational 
after minor repairs.
    (vi) Barricading at the PES reduces injury and damage from 
fragments from limited quantities of explosives. Suppressive 
construction at the PES or protective construction at the ES are 
practical ways of controlling blast over-pressure.
    (6) At blast overpressure of between 2.3 psi (0.16 bars) and 1.7 
psi (0.1 bars) effects and controls are intermediate between those 
described in paragraphs (c)(5) and (c)(7) of this section (for 
quantities between 100,000 and 250,000 pounds, see column 8, Appendix A 
to Subpart F of this part).
    (7) At blast overpressure of 1.7 psi (0.1 bars) occurring at scaled 
distance of 30W1/3 (for quantities over 250,000 pounds, see column 
8, Appendix A to Subpart F of this part):
    (i) Unstrengthened buildings will sustain damage approximating 10 
percent of their replacement cost.
    (ii) Occupants of exposed unstrengthened structures may suffer 
injury from secondary effects, such as building debris.
    (iii) Aircraft landing and taking off could lose control and crash.
    (iv) Parked military and commercial aircraft, with minor damage due 
to blast, should remain airworthy.
    (v) Personnel in the open should not be seriously injured by the 
blast itself. Depending largely upon the PES structure and the 
fragmentation characteristics and amount of ammunition within, however, 
fragments and debris could cause injuries.
    (vi) Barricading at the PES or application of minimum fragment 
distance requirements may reduce injury or damage due to fragments from 
limited quantities of explosives.
    (8) At blast overpressure of 1.2-0.90 psi (0.08-0.06 bars) 
occurring at scaled distance of 40W1/3-50W1/3 (see column 5, 
Appendix A to Subpart F of this part):
    (i) Unstrengthened buildings will sustain damage approximating 5 
percent of their replacement cost.
    (ii) Personnel injuries are principally caused by glass breakage 
and building debris.
    (iii) Personnel in the open should not be seriously injured by the 
blast itself. Depending largely upon the PES structure and the 
fragmentation characteristics and amount of ammunition within, however, 
fragments and debris could cause injuries.
    (iv) Both orientation and limiting the surface area of exposed 
glass panels can reduce breakage and structural damage.


Sec. 184.43  Permissible exposures to blast overpressure.

    (a) At sites exposed to potential blast overpressure of 12 psi (0.7 
bars) occurring at 9W1/3 (see column 3, Appendix B to Subpart F 
and Appendix C to Subpart F of this part), barricade required unless 
otherwise indicated (see Sec. 184.42(c)(3)(vii)), the following 
facilities or operations are permitted:
    (1) Buildings housing successive steps of a single production, 
renovation, or maintenance operation.
    (2) Breakrooms and change houses, if part of an operating line and 
used exclusively by personnel employed in operations of the line.
    (3) Temporary holding areas for trucks or railcars containing 
explosives to service production or maintenance facilities.
    (4) Field operations in magazine areas, when performing minor 
maintenance, preservation, packaging, or surveillance inspection.
    (5) Unmanned auxiliary power facilities, transformer stations, 
water treatment and pollution abatement facilities, and other utility 
installations that serve the PES but are not integral, the loss of 
which would not create an immediate secondary hazard. These do not need 
barricades. However, unmanned auxiliary power generating or converting 
facilities supplying power exclusively to the explosives storage area 
and security fence lighting may be located as close as fire distance 
from explosives facilities (50 feet for fire resistant structures and 
100 feet for non-fire resistant structures).
    (6) Dunnage preparation and similar support structures housing non-
explosives operations, if used only by PES employees.
    (7) Service magazines that are a part of operating lines. Distances 
are based on the quantity/type of ammunition or explosives in the 
service magazine(s), not in the operating building.
    (8) Exposures as indicated in paragraph (b) of this section, if 
blast suppression, structure hardening, and so forth, provides 
comparable protection for the personnel and equipment involved.
    (b) At sites exposed to potential blast overpressure of 3.5 psi 
(0.24 bars) occurring at 18W1/3 (see column 4, Appendix B to 
Subpart F and Appendix C to Subpart F of this part), the following 
facilities or operations are permitted:
    (1) Construction workers in the vicinity of ammunition production 
areas, waterfront areas where ammunition is being handled, or areas for 
loading explosives onto aircraft.
    (2) Surveillance, maintenance, and inspection buildings; and labor-
intensive operations closely related to PES.
    (3) Comfort, safety, and convenience buildings exclusively 
supporting PES, including lunchrooms, motor pools, area offices, 
auxiliary fire stations, transportation dispatch points, and shipping 
and receiving buildings (not magazine area loading docks).
    (4) Operations and training functions manned or attended only by 
personnel operating the PES.
    (5) Parking lots for privately owned vehicles belonging to 
personnel at the PES. See Sec. 184.33.
    (6) Service magazines that are part of operating lines. Distances 
are based on quantity/type of ammunition or explosives in the service 
magazine(s), not in the operating building.
    (7) Container stuffing and unstuffing operations that are routine 
support of PES. This applies to main support functions set aside for 
support of manufacturing operations. Container stuffing and unstuffing 
in magazine areas are permitted at intermagazine distances.
    (c) At sites exposed to potential blast overpressure of 2.3 psi 
(0.16 bars) occurring at 24W1/3 (see column 8, Appendix A to 
Subpart F of this part), the following facilities or operations are 
permitted:
    (1) Public traffic routes for NEW under 100,000 pounds.
    (2) Personnel exposed to remotely controlled operations. NOTE: 
Personnel at control stations less than 24W1/3 from the PES, 
though provided with blast-attenuating and fragment-defeating shields, 
shall not be exposed to overpressure greater than 2.3 psi (0.16 bars).
    (3) Open-air recreation facilities exposed to PES containing NEW of 
up to 100,000 pounds, such as baseball diamonds, volleyball courts, and 
so forth, used by personnel assigned to the facility, where structures 
are not involved.
    (d) At sites exposed to potential blast overpressure of 1.7 psi 
(0.1 bars) occurring at 30W1/3, the following facilities or 
operations are permitted:
    (1) Public traffic routes.
    (2) Private vehicle parking in administrative areas. Minimum 
fragment distance should be applied.
    (e) At sites exposed to potential blast overpressure of 1.2-0.90 
psi (0.08-0.06 bars) occurring at 40W1/3 to 50W1/3 (see 
column 5, Appendix A, to Subpart F of this part), the following 
facilities or operations are permitted:
    (1) Inhabited buildings; administration and housing areas.
    (2) Plant boundaries and magazines servicing the establishment in 
general (see Sec. 184.45(j)).
    (3) Athletic fields and other recreation areas when structures are 
present.
    (4) Flight line passenger service facilities.
    (5) Utilities providing power to most of an establishment.
    (6) Storehouses and shops having strategically or intrinsically 
valuable contents which shall not be jeopardized.
    (7) Functions which, if momentarily out of action, would cause an 
immediate secondary hazard.


Sec. 184.44  Ammunition and explosives facilities.

    This section identifies the types, general specifications, and 
siting requirements of various magazines for ammunition, explosives, 
and other dangerous materials.
    (a) Barricades and earth cover for magazines--(1) General. Both 
constructed barricades and undisturbed earth can protect ammunition and 
explosives, structures, and operations against high-velocity, low-angle 
fragments, although the barricades may be destroyed in the process. 
Further, barricades provide limited protection against blast in their 
immediate vicinity, provide no protection against high-angle fragments, 
and are ineffective in reducing the blast pressure in the far field 
(inhabited building or public traffic route distance).
    (2) Barricade requirements. Protection is considered effective when 
barricades meet the following minimum requirements:
    (i) The slope of a barricade will not be steeper than 2/3 (rise/
run). To reduce erosion and facilitate maintenance operations, future 
constructions should have a slope of 1/2.
    (ii) The earth barricade shall consist of material described in 
paragraph (a)(4) of this section.
    (iii) Barricade height and length shall be determined as follows:
    (A) Heights. Establish a reference point at the top of the far edge 
of one of the two stacks that the barricade is to separate. If the tops 
of the stacks are at different elevations, this reference point shall 
be on the lower stack. Draw a line from the reference point to the top 
of he other stack. Draw a second line from the reference point to form 
a 2 degree angle above the first line. To limit barricade height, each 
should be as close as possible to the stack that served as the 
reference point. See Appendices A and B of this subpart.
    (B) Lengths. The length of the barricade shall be determined as 
shown in Appendix C of this subpart.
    (iv) Earth barricades meeting the previously identified 
requirements may be modified by substituting a retaining wall, 
preferably of concrete, for the slope on one side. The other side shall 
have slope and thickness sufficient to ensure that the width of earth 
required for the top is held firmly in place.
    (v) Other barriers, such as earth-filled steel bin barricades for 
explosives-loaded aircraft, may also be used.
    (3) Location of barricades. The distance between the foot of the 
barricade and the stack of ammunition or explosives or the buildings 
containing explosives represents a compromise. The shorter the 
distance, the shorter the height and length required for the barricade. 
However, it may be necessary to extend the distance to provide access 
for maintenance and vehicles. If it is impracticable to locate the 
barricades near the stack of ammunition or explosives or building 
containing explosives, barricades may be located adjacent to the 
facility to be protected.
    (4) Earth cover for magazines and barricades. (i) Earth cover 
material for magazines and barricades shall be relatively cohesive 
(solid or wet clay and similar types of soil are too cohesive and 
should not be used), free from unsanitary organic matter, trash, 
debris, and stones heavier than 10 pounds or larger than 6 inches in 
diameter. The larger stones should be limited to the lower center of 
fill and never used for earth cover over magazines. Compaction and 
surface preparation shall be provided, as necessary, to maintain 
structural integrity and avoid erosion. Where cohesive material cannot 
be used, as in sandy soil, the barricade or the earth cover over 
magazines should be finished with a suitable material to ensure 
structural integrity.
    (ii) The earth fill or earth cover between earth-covered magazines 
may be either solid or sloped, in accordance with the requirements of 
other construction features, but a minimum of 2 feet of earth cover 
shall be maintained over the top of each magazine and a minimum slope 
of 2/3 (rise/run) starting directly above the spring line of each arch 
shall be maintained. To reduce erosion and facilitate maintenance 
operations, future constructions should have a slope of 2 horizontal to 
1 vertical.
    (b) Application of Q/D to earth-covered magazines. (1) For 
application of quantity/distances, magazines shall not have been 
structurally weakened to the extent that they could not be expected to 
prevent propagation of explosives. The specified thickness and slope of 
the earth cover shall be maintained.
    (2) Normally, earth-covered magazines shall not be constructed to 
face door-to-door. They should face in the same direction with the long 
axes parallel to each other. In special cases where topographic or 
other important considerations would result in different orientations, 
they shall be sited in accordance with Sec. 184.54.
    (c) Policy on protective construction. The present ``state of the 
art'' in protective construction is such as to permit any calculated 
level of protection from explosion communication between adjacent bays 
or buildings, personnel protection against death or serious injury from 
incidents in adjacent bays or buildings, and protection of vital and 
expensive equipment installations. Therefore, the major obstacles in 
facility planning should be:
    (1) Protection against explosion communication between adjacent 
bays or buildings and protection of personnel against death or serious 
injury from incidents in adjacent bays or buildings. In situations 
where the protection of personnel and facilities would be greatly 
enhanced or costs significantly reduced by having separate buildings to 
limit explosion propagation rather than using protective construction 
and separation of explosive units within one building, planning should 
reflect this fact.
    (2) Provision of protection for vital and expensive equipment, if 
the additional cost is warranted.
    (3) When an appropriate degree of protection can be provided either 
by hardening a target building or constructing a source building to 
suppress/explosion effects, these factors may be taken into account and 
the distances/required by the standard Q/D tables reduced. The 
rationale or test results justifying the reduction shall accompany A&E 
site and general construction plans proposing reduced distances based 
on protective construction, when submitted through the ACO for PCO 
approval.


Sec. 184.45  Specific siting requirements.

    (a) Rail and truck holding yards. (1) Generally, rail holding yards 
should be laid out on a unit car/group basis with each unit car/group 
separated by the applicable aboveground magazine distance.
    (2) If the rail holding yard is formed by two parallel ladder 
tracks connected by diagonal spurs, the parallel tracks and the 
diagonal spurs shall be separated by applicable aboveground magazine 
distances for the unit/group/quantities of high explosives.
    (3) If the rail holding yard is a ``Christmas tree'' arrangement, 
consisting of a ladder track with diagonal dead-end spurs projecting 
from each side at alternate intervals, the spurs should be separated by 
the applicable aboveground magazine distance for the net quantity of 
high explosives in the cars on the spurs.
    (4) Generally, truck holding yards should be laid out on a unit 
truck/group basis with each group separated by the applicable 
aboveground magazine distances.
    (5) Both rail and truck holding yards shall be separated from other 
facilities by the applicable Q/D criteria.
    (6) In addition to the temporary parking of railcars, trucks or 
trailers containing ammunition and explosives, holding yards also may 
be used to interchange truck trailers or railcars between commercial 
carrier and the contractor and to conduct visual inspections.
    (b) Classification yards. (1) To protect the classification yard 
from external explosions, separation distances shall, at least, be the 
applicable magazine distance.
    (2) Specific quantity/distance separation is not required from the 
classification yard to targets other than explosive locations when the 
classification yard is used exclusively for the following:
    (i) Receiving, dispatching, classifying, and switching of cars.
    (ii) Interchanging of trucks, trailers, railcars, or MILVANS 
between the common carrier and the establishment.
    (iii) Conducting external inspection of motor vehicles and 
railcars, or opening of free-rolling doors of railcars for the purpose 
of removing documents and making a visual inspection of the cargo.
    (3) If the yard is used at any time for any purpose other than 
listed in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, such as placing or removal 
of dunnage or explosive items into or from cars, Q/D tables apply. See 
Sec. 184.42(b)(1) through (b)(7).
    (c) Railcar and motor vehicle inspection stations. (1) Specific 
quantity/distance separations are not required for inspection stations; 
however, they should be as remote as practicable from hazardous or 
populated areas. The following activities may be performed at the 
inspection station after railcars or motor vehicles containing 
ammunition and explosives are received from the delivering carrier, 
before further routing within the installation:
    (i) Visual inspection of railcar and motor vehicle exteriors.
    (ii) Visual inspection of the cargo in vehicles (trucks, trailers, 
railcars, MILVANS, and so forth) that have passed the external 
inspection previously indicated.
    (iii) Interchange of truck, trailers, railcars, or MILVANS between 
the common carrier and the establishment.
    (2) If any activities, other than those previously listed, are 
conducted at the inspection station, Q/D tables apply.
    (3) Any cars or trucks suspected of being hazardous shall be 
isolated consistent with applicable Q/D separation for the hazard class 
and explosives quantity involved. This shall be accomplished before any 
subsequent action.
    (d) Administration, industrial, and convenience areas. (1) 
Administration and industrial areas shall be separated from PES's by 
inhabited building distances.
    (2) Auxiliary facilities such as heating plants, line offices, 
break areas, briefing rooms for daily work schedules or site safety 
matters, joiner shops, security posts, and similar functions that are 
required to be at explosives operations and servicing only one building 
or operation shall be so located and constructed as to provide prudent 
fire protection.
    (e) Underground tanks or pipelines. These should be separated from 
buildings or stacks containing A&E of Hazard Divisions 1.2 through 1.4 
by a minimum distance of 80 feet. The separation for Hazard Division 
1.1, should correspond to the formula D = 3W1/3 with a minimum 
distance of 80 feet, unless the donor building is designed to contain 
the effects of an explosion.
    (f) Storage tanks built on or above the surface of the ground. If 
protection of above-ground storage tanks is required, the distances in 
column 5, Appendix A to Subpart F of this part shall apply.
    (g) Recreational, training, and other such areas. Open areas 
between explosives storage and handling sites and between these sites 
and non-explosives buildings and structures, should be carefully 
controlled, when used as employee recreation or training facilities. 
The severe fragment hazard will usually extend from the explosion site 
to approximately the public traffic route distances. Accordingly, 
exposed recreation and training facilities where employees are in the 
open shall be sited at not less than public traffic route distances and 
as close to inhabited building distances as practicable. When 
structures, including bleachers, are included as part of these 
facilities, they shall be sited at not less than inhabited building 
distances.
    (h) Demolition or burning areas. Sites for demolition and burning 
of explosives shall be separated from other facilities based on the 
hazards associated with the quantity and type of material to be 
destroyed.
    (i) Adjacent operating lines. These shall be separated from one 
another by no less than unbarricaded intraline distance (18W1/3) 
for the hazard class and explosive quantities involved, whether or not 
barricaded, and provided that ammunition and explosives involved in 
each operating line present similar hazards. The criticality of 
survivability of one or more of the operating lines may require that 
each line be given an inhabited building distance level of protection.
    (j) A&E storage magazines. A&E storage locations that service the 
establishment in general shall be separated by appropriate inhabited 
building distance (blast overpressure or fragmentation, whichever 
applies) from A&E operating lines/locations, inert areas (warehouses, 
shops, administrative facilities, and so forth) and property 
boundaries.
    (k) Spacing for movement of ammunition and explosives within 
operating lines. Items or groups of items of ammunition and explosives 
that are transported from one operating building to another, or from 
bay to bay within an operating building, shall be separated to preclude 
the establishment of a path for the propagation of an explosion or fire 
between the buildings or bays. For this purpose, the minimum spacing 
between items, or groups of items, in transport shall be intraline 
distance unless reduced distances have been approved by the PCO.

BILLING CODE 5000-04-M

TP16DE94.000


TP16DE94.001


TP16DE94.002

BILLING CODE 5000-04-C

Subpart E--Storage Compatibility System


Sec. 184.47  General.

    (a) Storage of A&E is based on the capability requirements of this 
subpart and the hazard classification requirements of Subpart F to this 
part.
    (b) Storage compatibility groups (SCG) and hazard classification 
for DoD A&E items and materials are listed in the Joint Hazard 
Classification System (JHCS) (see TB 700-2, Explosive Hazard 
Classification Procedures). Additional information may be available 
from the procuring activity in the form of Hazardous Component Safety 
Data Statements (HCSDS) for intermediate materials and items. When the 
solicitation or contract lacks such information, it may be requested 
through contract channels.
    (c) Compatibility and hazard classification information relating to 
other hazardous materials, including A&E, not contained within the 
JHCS, can be derived from references such as those cited below.
    (1) Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Transportation, Parts 
100-199.
    (2) National Fire Protection Association, Manual 491M.\6\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \6\Copies may be obtained from the National Fire Protection 
Association, Batterymarch Park, Attn: National Fire Codes 
Subscription--Service Department, Quincy, MA 02269.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) Data sheets developed by the National Safety Council.
    (4) Data sheets developed by the Manufacturing Chemists 
Association.
    (5) Manuals and books providing information on the properties of 
hazardous materials. There are a number of competent guides to the 
safety precautions required when handling potentially hazardous 
materials. These guides typically provide basic precautions, specific 
hazardous reactions, and industrial hygiene information. Additional 
guidance for industrial hygiene and industrial medicine is available 
from the American Council of Governmental and Industrial Hygienists and 
OSHA/NIOSH.
    (d) The previous guidance is applicable for storage and 
transportation only and is not intended for in-process applications. 
For in-process application, refer to Subpart F of this part.


Sec. 184.48  Storage compatibility grouping.

    (a) All A&E are assigned one of thirteen compatibility groups 
(SCG).
    (b) Storage principles. (1) The highest degree of safety in A&E 
storage could be assured if each item or division were stored 
separately. However, such ideal storage is not generally feasible. A 
proper balance of safety and other factors frequently requires mixing 
of several types of ammunition and explosives in storage.
    (2) A&E shall not be stored with dissimilar materials or items that 
present hazards to the munitions. Examples are mixed storage of A&E 
with flammable or combustible materials, acids, or corrosives.
    (3) Different types of A&E may be mixed in storage, by item and 
division, provided they are compatible. A&E are assigned to a SCG when 
they can be stored together without significantly increasing either the 
probability of an accident or, for a given quantity, the magnitude of 
the effects of such an accident.
    (4) A&E should be mixed in storage only when such mixing will 
facilitate safe operations and promote overall storage efficiency.
    (5) As used in these requirements, the term ``with its own means of 
initiation'' indicates that the ammunition has its normal initiating 
device assembled to it and this device is considered to present a 
significant risk during storage. However, the term does not apply when 
the initiating device is packaged in a manner that eliminates the risk 
of detonating the ammunition if the initiating device should 
accidentally function, or when fuzed end items are configured and 
packaged to prevent their inadvertent arming. The initiating device may 
even be assembled to the ammunition, provided its safety features 
preclude initiation or detonation of the explosives filler of the end 
item if the initiating device should accidentally function.
    (c) Compatible ammunition and explosives. (1) Different kinds of 
A&E within one compatibility group are compatible and may be stored 
together, except for some items in SCG K and L (see Appendix A to this 
subpart).
    (2) Ammunition and explosives in substandard or damaged packaging, 
in a suspect condition, or with characteristics that increase the risk 
in storage are not compatible with other A&E and shall be stored 
separately.
    (d) Storage compatibility group. A&E are assigned to one of 
thirteen storage compatibility groups (A through H, J, K, L, N, and S):
    (1) Group A--initiating explosives. Bulk initiating explosives that 
have the sensitivity to heat, friction, or percussion necessary for use 
as initiating elements in an explosive train. Examples are wet lead 
azide, wet lead styphnate, wet mercury fulminate, wet tetracene, and 
dry PETN.
    (2) Group B. Detonators and similar initiating devices not 
containing two or more independent safety features. Items containing 
initiating explosives that are designed to initiate or continue the 
functioning of an explosive train. Examples are detonators, blasting 
caps, small arms primers, and fuzes.
    (3) Group C. Bulk propellants, propelling charges, and devices 
containing propellant with or without their own means of ignition. 
Items that upon initiation will deflagrate, explode, or detonate. 
Examples are single-, double-, triple-base, and composite propellants; 
rocket motors (solid propellant); and ammunition with inert 
projectiles. Liquid propellants are not included.
    (4) Group D. Black powder, high explosives (HE), and ammunition 
containing HE without its own means of initiation and without 
propelling charge and fuzes with two or more safety features. A&E that 
can be expected to explode or detonate when any given item/component 
thereof is initiated (except for fuzes with two or more safety 
features). Examples are bulk TNT, composition B, wet RDX or PETN, 
bombs, and CBU's.
    (5) Group E. A&E containing HE without its own means of initiation 
and with propelling charge. See paragraph (b)(5) of this section. 
Examples are artillery ammunition, rockets, and guided missiles.
    (6) Group F. Ammunition containing HE with its own means of 
initiation, not meeting requirements of paragraph (b)(5) of this 
section, and with or without propelling charge. HE ammunition or 
devices (fuzed), with or without propelling charges. Examples are 
grenades, sounding devices, and similar items having an in-line 
explosive train in the initiator.
    (7) Group G. Fireworks; illuminating, incendiary, smoke (including 
HC), or tear-producing munitions other than those munitions that are 
water-activated or contain white phosphorus or flammable liquid or gel.
    (8) Group H. Ammunition containing both explosives and white 
phosphorus or other pyrophoric material. Ammunition in this group 
contains fillers which are spontaneously flammable when exposed to the 
atmosphere.
    (9) Group J. Ammunition containing explosives and flammable liquids 
or gels, with or without explosives. Ammunition in this group contains 
flammable liquids or gels other than those that are spontaneously 
flammable when exposed to water or the atmosphere. Examples are liquid- 
or gel-filled incendiary ammunition; FAE devices; flammable, liquid-
fueled missiles; and torpedoes.
    (10) Group K. Ammunition containing both explosives and toxic 
chemical agents. Ammunition in this group contains chemicals 
specifically designed for incapacitating effects more severe than 
lachrymation. Examples are artillery or mortar ammunition, fuzed or 
unfuzed, grenades, and rockets or bombs filled with a lethal or 
incapacitating chemical agent (see note 8, Appendix A to this subpart).
    (11) Group L. Ammunition not included in other compatibility 
groups, having characteristics that do not permit storage with other 
types of ammunition or kinds of explosives. Examples are water-
activated devices; prepackaged, hypergolic liquid-fueled rocket 
engines; TPA (thickened TEA); and damaged or suspect ammunition of any 
group. Types presenting similar hazards (that is, oxidizers with 
oxidizers, fuels with fuels, etc.) may be stored together but not mixed 
with other groups.
    (12) Group N. Ammunition containing only extremely insensitive 
detonating substance (EIDS); examples are bombs and warheads.
    (13) Group S. Ammunition presenting no significant hazard. All 
hazardous explosive effects are confined and self-contained within the 
item or package. An incident may destroy all items in a single pack but 
must not communicate to other packs. Examples are thermal batteries, 
explosive switches or valves, and other ammunition items packaged to 
meet this criterion.
    (e) Mixed storage.
    (1) Mixing of SCG's is permitted as indicated in Appendix A of this 
subpart. For purposes of mixing, all items shall be packaged in 
approved storage containers.
    (2) Items from SCG's C, D, E, F, G, J, and S may be combined in 
storage, provided the net quantity of explosives in the items or in 
bulk does not exceed 1000 pounds per storage site.
    (3) In addition to paragraph (e)(2) of this section, items assigned 
to Hazard Division 1.4, SCG C, G, or S, may be combined in storage 
without regard to explosives quantity limitations.


Sec. 184.49  Explosives hazard classification procedures.

    TB 700-2/NAVSEAINST 8020.8/TO IIA-1-47/DLAR 8220, DoD Explosives 
Hazard Classification Procedures, shall be used as a basis for 
assignment of hazard class/division to all ammunition and explosives.

                                         Appendix A to Subpart E of Part 184--Storage Compatibility Mixing Chart                                        
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     Groups           A          B          C          D          E          F          G         H         J         K         L         N         S   
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A...............  X          Z                                                                                                                          
B...............  Z          X          Z          Z          Z          Z          Z                                                 X         X       
C...............             Z          X          X          X          Z          Z                                                 X         X       
D...............             Z          X          X          X          Z          Z                                                 X         X       
E...............             Z          X          X          X          Z          Z                                                 X         X       
F...............             Z          Z          Z          Z          X          Z                                                 X         X       
G...............             Z          Z          Z          Z          Z          X                                                 X         X       
H...............                                                                              X                                                 X       
J...............                                                                                        X                                       X       
K...............                                                                                                  Z                                     
L...............                                                                                                                                        
N...............             X          X          X          X          X          X                                                 X         X       
S...............             X          X          X          X          X          X         X         X                             X         X       
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:                                                                                                                                                  
1. An ``X'' indicates that the intersecting groups may be combined in storage. Otherwise, mixing is either prohibited or restricted per note 2.         
2. A ``Z'' indicates that, when warranted by operational considerations or magazine nonavailability, and when safety is not sacrificed, the intersecting
  groups may be combined in storage. Operational considerations include conditions that waste resources such as money, manpower, and energy, or         
  compromise security, readiness, or the ability to accomplish the installation mission. Storage personnel, after consultation with safety personnel,   
  should determine when operational considerations exist that warrant ``Z'' storage compatibility mixing. Examples of acceptable combinations of class 1
  follow:                                                                                                                                               
a. Division 1, group C, bulk propellants with division 1, group G, fireworks.                                                                           
b. Division 1, group C, rocket motors with division 1, group F, ammunition with its own means of initiation.                                            
c. Group C rocket motors with group B detonators and similar initiating items.                                                                          
3. Equal numbers of separately packaged components of complete rounds of any single type of ammunition may be stored together. When so stored,          
  compatibility is that of the assembled round; that is, WP filler in group H, HE filler in group D, E, or F, as appropriate.                           
4. See Sec. 184.48(e) for permissible mixed storage of quantities of 1000 pounds or less.                                                               
5. Ammunition designated ``practice'' or ``target practice'' by national stock number and nomenclature may be stored with the fully loaded ammunition it
  simulated (for example, 2.75 inch TP rockets with WP rockets).                                                                                        
6. Ammunition items without explosives containing substances more suited to another hazard division may be assigned to the same compatibility group as  
  items containing explosives and the same substances, and be stored with them.                                                                         
7. Articles of Compatibility Group B and F shall each be segregated in storage from articles of other compatibility groups by means which are effective 
  in the prevention of propagation to those articles.                                                                                                   
8. Group K requires not only separate storage from other groups, but also may require separation storage for different items within the group. Before   
  storage of mixed items in Group K, PCO approval shall be obtained.                                                                                    
9. If dissimilar Hazard Division 1.6, Group N munitions, such as Mk 82 and Mk 84 Bombs, are mixed together and have not been tested to assure non-      
  propagation; the mixed munitions are considered to be Hazard Division 1.2, Storage and Compatibility Group D for purposes of transportation and       
  storage.                                                                                                                                              

Subpart F--Hazard Classification and Q/D Criteria


Sec. 184.51   General.

    (a) This subpart outlines Q/D requirements applicable to storage, 
processing, and handling of A&E. The maximum amount of explosives 
permitted at any location is determined by the distance from that 
location to other exposed sites and the hazard classification assigned 
to the A&E involved. The applicable Q/D table in this subpart shall be 
used to determine this distance. Greater distances than those shown in 
the tables should be used when practicable.
    (b) Distances required in the standard Q/D tables may be reduced if 
structural data or engineering demonstrate that explosion effects will 
be reduced or eliminated through containment, direction or suppression 
shields or building volume. The rationale or test results justifying 
the proposed distance reduction shall accompany A&E site and general 
construction plans when submitted through the ACO for the PCO's 
approval. See Sec. 184.7.


Sec. 184.52   Hazard classes and class divisions.

    (a) The United Nations Organization (UNO) classification system 
consists of nine hazard classes, with ammunition and explosives 
included in Class 1; however, some items containing explosives 
components may be included in other classes based upon the 
``predominant hazard'' of that item (flammable liquids or compressed 
gas). Thirteen compatibility groups are included for segregating 
ammunition and explosives on the basis of similar characteristics, 
properties, and potential accident effects.
    (b) The A&E hazard classes are further subdivided into 
``divisions'' according to the associate hazards, including the 
potential for causing personnel casualties or property damage as shown:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Hazard class and division                                           
            designator                            Hazards               
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1..............................  Mass detonating.                     
1.2..............................  Nonmass-detonating fragment          
                                    producing.                          
1.3..............................  Mass fire.                           
1.4..............................  Moderate fire, no blast.             
1.5..............................  Extremely insensitive detonating     
                                    substances (EIDS).                  
1.6..............................  EIDS loaded items.                   
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) DoD Explosives Hazard Classification Procedures (TB 700-2, 
NAVSEAINST 8020.8, TO IIA-I-47 and DLAR 8220.1) shall be used as a 
basis for assignment of hazard classes/divisions to all DoD ammunition 
and explosives. As stated in Sec. 184.47(d), these classifications 
pertain to A&E packaged for transportation or storage. Such hazard 
classification information may not be valid when applied to the hazards 
associated with manufacturing or loading processes. For such processes, 
the materials and processes shall be analyzed on a case-by-case basis. 
Sources of information to support this process of analysis are 
available from service research and development organizations through 
contract channels, and other sources. The methodologies described in 
Sec. 184.199 for propellant is an example of an acceptable approach. 
Sections 184.73 through 184.81 provide examples of processes requiring 
analysis to determine the hazards.
    (d) The separation of the A&E hazard classes into the several 
divisions does not necessarily mean that the different items in a 
division may be stored together. Also, some items may appear in more 
than one division, depending upon factors such as the degree of 
confinement or separation, type of packaging, storage configuration, or 
state of assembly.
    (e) The maximum amount of explosives permitted in any location is 
limited by the Q/D criteria. Explosives limits shall be established in 
amounts no greater than those consistent with safe and efficient 
operations.
    (f) A numerical figure (in parentheses) is used to indicate the 
minimum separation distance (in hundreds of feet) for protection from 
debris, fragments, and firebrands when distance alone is relied on for 
such protection. This number shall be placed to the left of the 
division designators 1.1 through 1.3, such as (18)1.1, (08)1.2, and 
(06)1.3. The following apply to minimum fragment distances:
    (1) A hazardous fragment is one having an impact energy of at least 
58 ft-lb and a hazardous fragment density is constituted by at least 
one hazardous fragment impacting in an area of 600 square feet or less. 
Fragment distances do not indicate the maximum range to which fragments 
may be projected.
    (2) For divisions 1.1 and 1.3, a minimum distance number shall be 
used where the ranges of hazardous fragments and firebrands EXCEED the 
distances specified for inhabited buildings in the applicable Q/D 
table.
    (3) Minimum fragment distance protects personnel in the open; 
minimum firebrand distance primarily protects facilities.
    (4) Examples where minimum fragment and firebrand distances for 
division 1.1 and 1.3 need not be applied follow:
    (i) Recreation or training facilities, if these facilities are for 
the exclusive use of personnel assigned to the PES.
    (ii) Between PES and relatively static inert storage areas.
    (iii) Between facilities in an operating line, between facilities 
and holding sites in an operating line, between operating lines, and 
between operating lines and storage locations normally separated by 
inhabited building distances to protect workers and ensure against 
interruption of production.
    (5) The minimum distance for protection from hazardous fragments 
shall be based on the debris producing characteristics of the PES and 
the population density of the ES. For populous locations, the minimum 
distance shall be that distance at which fragments, including debris 
from structural elements of the facility or process equipment, shall 
not exceed a hazardous fragment density of one hazardous fragment per 
600 square feet (56 m\2\). If this distance is not known, the following 
shall apply:
    (i) For all Hazard Division 1.1 A&E, the minimum distance to 
exposures shall be 670 feet for 100 pounds NEW or less. In quantities 
of 101 to 30,000 pounds NEW, the minimum distance shall be 1,250 feet. 
These distances may be reduced when it can be shown by test data that 
reductions are warranted or when other alternatives, as described in 
Sec. 184.52 (f)(6) through (f)(9) are used. For items that have been 
evaluated adequately, different minimum distances may be used. 
(Facilities sited at 1,235 or 1,245 feet in accordance with past 
requirements shall be considered to be in compliance with the 1,250 
foot minimum requirement.)
    (ii) For public traffic routes that are not probable sites for 
future construction, and for other exposures permitted at public 
traffic route distances from PES, fragment and firebrand minimum 
distances for Hazard Divisions 1.1 and 1.3 may be reduced to 60 percent 
of these requisite distances.
    (6) For sparsely populated locations on or off the establishment, 
the minimum fragment distance can be reduced to 900 ft. if certain 
specific conditions exist as follows:
    (i) No more than 25 persons are located in any sector bounded by 
the sides of a 45 degree angle, with the vertex at the PES, and the 900 
ft. and 1,250 ft. arcs from the PES, and
    (ii) The NEW of the PES does not exceed 11,400 pounds.
    (7) Minimum fragment distances may extend onto uninhabited areas 
such as wildlife preserve, desert, prairie, swamp, forest or 
agricultural land, adjacent to contractor facilities but not within 
control of the contractor. However, without a restrictive easement in 
effect, construction of inhabited buildings or other exposures in these 
areas, would reimpose minimum fragment distance.
    (8) In lieu of the minimum fragment distances prescribed, other 
alternatives, which reduce or eliminate the fragment hazard, may be 
used for requirements compliance, per Sec. 184.51(b). Examples include:
    (i) Use distance demonstrated by testing, accident experience or 
engineering studies.
    (ii) Use protective structures.
    (iii) Use containment facilities or suppressive shields or other 
fragment control devices.
    (iv) Design/locate equipment to reduce fragment generation or to 
control the direction of fragmentation.
    (v) Use barricades or terrain where possible to stop low angle, 
high velocity fragments.
    (9) Fragment distance need not be applied when it is demonstrated 
by structural analysis, shielding test or other documentation that 
building construction and volume shall confine fragments and debris 
resulting from an explosives accident.
    (g) In the application of inhabited building and public traffic 
route distances, the property boundary shall be treated as the 
governing target. In interpreting application to navigable waterways as 
public traffic routes, occasional small fishing and pleasure boats may 
be ignored.


Sec. 184.53  Hazard Division 1.1--mass detonating.

    (a) Entire quantities of items in this division can detonate almost 
instantaneously. Some examples: bulk explosives, some propellants, 
mines, bombs, demolition charges, torpedo and missile warheads, 
rockets, palletized projectiles loaded with TNT or Composition B, 8-
inch and larger high-capacity projectiles loaded with Explosive D, 
mass-detonating CBU's, and mass-detonating ammunition components.
    (b) Use Appendix A to this subpart to determine inhabited building 
and public traffic route distances, Appendices B and C to this subpart 
for intraline distance, Appendix D to this subpart for intermagazine 
distance and Appendices E and F to this subpart for fragment distances.


Sec. 184.54  Application of intermagazine distances for Hazard Division 
1.1 only.

    (a) In applying the intermagazine distances given in Appendix D to 
this subpart, consideration shall be given to magazine construction and 
orientation. For earth-covered magazine separation distances, the 
following conditions apply:
    (1) When standard earth-covered magazines containing Hazard 
Division 1.1 ammunition are sited so that any one is in the forward 
section, 60 degrees either side of the centerline of another, the two 
shall be separated by distances greater than the minimum permitted for 
side-to-side orientations. The greater distances primarily protect door 
and headwall structures against blast from a potential explosion site 
forward of the exposed magazine. When a blast wave is reflect from a 
surface at other than grazing incidence (side-on orientation), the 
overpressure may be increased substantially over the free-field value. 
High reflected pressure impulse can damage doors and headwalls and 
propel the debris into the earth-covered magazine, communicating the 
explosion to the contents on impact. Some examples of the application 
of these rules follow:
    (i) If headwalls of both A and B are outside the 120-degree sector 
(60 degrees either side of the centerline), they may be separated by 
the column 4 distances based on the largest quantity of Hazard Division 
1.1 stored in either. This is considered the equivalent of standard 
side-to-side separation with the optimum orientation--all earth-covered 
magazines facing the same direction and axes parallel. See paragraphs 
(a) and (b), Appendix G to this subpart.
    (ii) If headwall of A is outside the 120-degree sector of B, but 
headwall of B is inside the 120-degree sector of A, separation distance 
between these two earth-covered magazines is determined by column 6, 
based on the largest quantity of Hazard Division 1.1 in either earth-
covered magazine. However, if the quantity in B were reduced to less 
than \1/10\ of that in A, or if the storage in B is not class 1, 
division 1, earth-covered magazine A would control as a potential 
explosion site. Then, in accordance with Sec. 184.42, the distance 
shall be taken from column 4, based on the quantity in A; that is, the 
quantity in A would not need to be reduced. See paragraph c, Appendix G 
to this subpart.
    (iii) If headwalls of A and B are within the 120-degree sector of 
each other and are not provided with a separate door barricade, 
Appendix D to this subpart, column 12 distances shall be used to 
separate them. If a door barricade is present (meeting requirements of 
Sec. 184.44(a)) such as A to C, then column 10 distances may be used to 
determine separation distances. See paragraph (a), Appendix G to this 
subpart.
    (iv) Although no separate barricade is shown between A and B, more 
detailed analysis of a specific storage condition of this type might 
show that the distribution of explosives within A and B is such that 
the earth fill of one or the other or both meets the specifications of 
an effective barricade according to Sec. 184.44(a). In such a case, 
column 10 distances would apply between A and B. See paragraph (d), 
Appendix G to this subpart.
    (v) Two additional standard earth-covered magazine orientations 
warrant analysis:
    (A) Earth-covered magazines A and B significantly differ in length 
(paragraph (f), Appendix G to this subpart) or are ``canted'' in such a 
manner that one of them is within the 120-degree sector off the 
headwall of the other, even though a straight line between headwall A 
and earth-covered magazine B does pass through the earth cover of B. 
See Appendix G to this subpart.
    (B) If B is the potential explosion site and A is the exposed site, 
the limit for B would be determined by column 7. With A as the 
potential explosion site, however, the limit for A would be based upon 
column 4.
    (vi) For future construction when standard earth-covered magazines 
containing Hazard Division 1.1 ammunition are sited so that any one is 
in the forward sector of another, the two shall be separated by 
distances greater than the minimum permitted for side-to-side 
orientations. The forward sector, or ``front'', for earth-covered 
magazines is the area 60 degrees either side of the magazine centerline 
with the vertex of the angle placed so that the sides of the angle pass 
through the intersection of the headwall and side walls. The greater 
distances are required primarily for the protection of door and 
headwall structures against blast from a PES forward of the exposed 
magazine, and to a lesser extent due to the directionality of effects 
from the source. When a blast wave is reflected from a surface at other 
than grazing incidence (side-on orientation), the overpressure may be 
increased substantially over the free-field value. High reflected 
pressure and impulse can damage doors and headwalls and propel the 
debris into the earth-covered magazine so that explosion is 
communicated by impact of such debris upon the contents.
    (2) When considering relationships between standard earth-covered 
magazines and aboveground magazines or facilities requiring intraline 
distances, each containing class 1, division 1, ammunition or 
explosives, the question regarding the use of barricaded or 
unbarricaded distances arises. The following criteria shall apply:
    (i) Aboveground magazines or facilities requiring intraline 
distances within the 120-degree sector in front of a standard earth-
covered magazine shall be provided unbarricaded distances, unless a 
separate effective intervening barricade meeting requirements of 
Sec. 184.44(a)(2) is present, in which case barricaded distances may be 
applied. See paragraph (g), Appendix G to this subpart.
    (ii) Aboveground magazines or facilities requiring intraline 
distances outside of the 120-degree sector in front of a standard 
earth-covered magazine shall be provided with barricaded distances 
whether or not a separate intervening barricade is present. See 
paragraph (g), Appendix G to this subpart.
    (b) Distances in column 4 apply to nonstandard, earth-covered 
magazines oriented so that all straight lines between the side and rear 
walls of two magazines pass through an earth-covered surface of each; 
similarly, column 10 distances apply to all orientations in which every 
straight line between two magazine passes through the earth cover of 
one and only one of them. If the above conditions cannot be met, column 
12 distances apply. The earth cover of nonstandard magazines shall be 
equal to or greater than that required for standard earth-covered, 
arch-type magazines.
    (c) Other factors limiting earth-covered magazine storage are as 
follows:
    (1) Earth-covered magazines that are equivalent in strength to 
those specified under the definition of ``standard magazine'' in 
Subpart S of this part are limited to 500,000 pounds NEW. Earth-covered 
magazines, not equivalent in strength to those, are limited to 250,000 
pounds NEW.
    (2) Quantities above 500,000 pounds NEW in one storage location are 
not authorized except for liquid propellants.
    (3) The distance given for 0 to 100 pounds NEW constitutes the 
minimum magazine spacing permitted.
    (d) Examples given in Secs. 184.54 (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(v), 
apply only to the storage of Hazard Division 1.1, ammunition and 
explosives. Existing earth-covered magazines, regardless of 
orientation, meeting the construction and barricading requirements of 
Subpart D of this part and consistent with the definition of 
``magazine'' in Subpart S of this part (and sited for any quantity of 
class 1, division 1), may be used to their physical capacity for the 
storage of Hazard Division 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4, A&E.


Sec. 184.55  Hazard Division 1.2--nonmass detonating, fragment 
producing.

    (a) Items in this division are those for which the principal 
hazards are fragment and blast, either individually or in combination, 
depending on such factors as storage configuration, type of packing, 
and quantity. The designated minimum distances that are specified are 
based on the limiting range of fragments for which protection by 
distance is to be provided and shall be used for inhabited building and 
public traffic route distances.
    (b) The fragment hazard from items within a specified minimum 
distance category varies with existing conditions, but is essentially 
the same for one as for many items or components. For these items, the 
required separation distances are influenced heavily by packing, state 
of assembly, charge/weight ratio, and caliber. Items in this division 
usually explode progressively when involved in a fire or otherwise 
initiated. Therefore, the distances prescribed shall not be lessened if 
the quantity to be stored is less than the maximum quantity specified 
by the appropriate table. Use Appendices H through K to this subpart 
for determining quantity/distance for Hazard Division 1.2.


Sec. 184.56  Hazard Division 1.3--mass fire.

    Items in this division burn vigorously with little chance of being 
extinguished in storage. Explosions shall normally be confined to 
pressure ruptures of containers and shall not produce propagating shock 
waves or damaging blast overpressure beyond the magazine distance 
specified in Appendix L to this subpart. A severe hazard of the spread 
of fire may result from burning container materials, propellant, or 
other flaming debris being tossed about by the force of pressure 
ruptures.


Sec. 184.57  Hazard Division 1.4--moderate fire, no blast.

    Items in this division present a fire hazard with no blast hazard 
and virtually no fragmentation hazard beyond the fire hazard clearance 
ordinarily specified for high risk materials. Separate facilities for 
storage and handling of this division should not be less than 100 feet 
from other facilities, except those of fire-resistive construction, 
which may be 50 feet from each other. The Q/D's for Hazard Division 
1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.5 or 1.6 individually or in combination are not 
affected by the presence of Hazard Division 1.4. Use Appendix M to this 
subpart for determining quantity/distance of Hazard Division 1.4 
material.


Sec. 184.58  Hazard Divisons 1.5 and 1.6.

    (a) This section describes Q/D standards for EIDS (substances) 
which are hazard classified 1.5, as well as ammunition items loaded 
with EIDS which are hazard classified 1.6. Refer to Appendix N to this 
subpart.
    (b) Substances (1.5) and items (1.6) in these divisions are 
designed to have a very low probability of detonating under normal 
storage and handling conditions. In order to be so classified, these 
A&E shall meet stringent tests prescribed in TB 700-2.
    (c) Quantity/distance separations for Hazard Division 1.6 
ammunition shall be based on the storage location and configuration. 
This information is detailed in Appendix O to this subpart and 
footnotes thereto. A maximum of 500,000 NEW shall be permitted at any 
one location. Any special storage configuration and siting approved for 
Hazard Division 1.1 ammunition or explosives may be used for storage of 
like explosive weights of Hazard Division 1.6 ammunition.
    (d) Blasting agents designated as Hazard Division 1.5 for 
transportation are considered to be Hazard Division 1.1 for Q/D 
purposes (storage).
    (e) When Hazard Division 1.6 is located with Hazard Division 1.1 or 
1.5, Hazard Division 1.6 is considered Hazard Division 1.1 for Q/D 
purposes. When Hazard Division 1.6 is located with Hazard Division 1.2, 
Hazard Division 1.6 is considered Hazard Division 1.2 for Q/D purposes.
    (f) When Hazard Division 1.6 is located with Hazard Division 1.3, 
add the explosives weight of the Hazard Division 1.6 to the weight of 
Hazard Division 1.3 and consider as Hazard Division 1.3 for Q/D 
purposes.


Sec. 184.59  Airfields.

    (a) These provisions do not apply to explosives items installed on 
aircraft or contained in survival and rescue kits such as signals, 
flares, egress systems components, squibs and detonators for 
jettisoning external stores, engine starter cartridges, fire 
extinguisher cartridges, destructors in electronic equipment, 
explosives components of emergency kits and equipment, and other such 
items or materials necessary for safe flight operations.
    (b) These Q/D requirements shall be applied:
    (1) To any airfield at which A&E are handled or stored.
    (2) In conjunction with airfield clearance criteria as prescribed 
by DoD Components and 14 CFR part 77. Airfields, heliports, and 
seadromes not used exclusively by DoD Components, combat aircraft 
parking areas, ammunition and explosives cargo areas, alert hangars, 
and shelters shall be located as prescribed in Appendix P to this 
subpart.
    (3) In separating ammunition and explosives facilities from 
inhabited buildings, public traffic routes, and other ammunition and 
explosives facilities, in accordance with Subparts D and F of this 
part.
    (c) In applying the requirements prescribed in Appendix P to this 
subpart, distances shall be measured as follows:
    (1) Loaded aircraft to loaded aircraft. Measure the distance from 
explosives on one aircraft to explosives on adjacent aircraft.
    (2) Ammunition and explosives location to taxiways and runways. 
Measure from the nearest point of the A&E location to the nearest point 
of the taxiway and to the centerline of the runway.
    (d) Separation distances between the following areas and from these 
areas to other targets shall be determined by applying Appendix Q to 
this subpart:
    (1) A&E cargo areas.
    (2) A&E storage facilities.
    (3) A&E operating facilities.
    (e) A&E shall be prohibited under approach/departure zones of fixed 
and rotary wing aircraft landing facilities. The approach/departure 
zones for aircraft (surfaces or areas) are described in detail in 
airfield and airspace criteria directives of the DoD Components. In 
general, approach/departure zones begin near the end of a runway or 
landing area and extend outward to a given distance along, and 
symmetrically on each side of, the extended runway centerline or the 
aircraft approach axis of a heliport. Such zones flare uniformly from 
the landing area outward to a prescribed limit.


Sec. 184.60  Pier and wharf facilities.

    (a) Applicability and scope. This section applies to piers and 
wharfs and associated facilities at which ammunition and explosives may 
be handled, or be present in ships' holds or service conveyances. Its 
provisions do not apply to ammunition or explosives stored in ships' 
magazines and intended for the service of shipboard armament or 
aircraft. However, they do apply to loading, off-loading, stowing, and 
shifting of such ammunition and explosives. Q/D's herein are for Hazard 
Division 1.1. Effects of an explosion to be expected when these Q/D's 
are applied are described in Subpart D of this part. If only ammunition 
and explosives of other class/division are involved the Q/D's for such 
hazards shall be applied as appropriate.
    (b) Determination of quantity of explosives in a ship. (1) On board 
ship, the various types of ammunition and explosives are stored 
relatively close to each other, and a detonation in the HE part of the 
cargo may receive considerable support from items that are considered 
normally to be only fragment or fire hazards; therefore, the total 
quantity of explosives on board a ship shall be determined in 
accordance with Subpart D of this part.
    (2) When ship units are separated by 11W1/3 distances or 
greater, Q/D shall be based individually on the quantity of each ship 
unit. Lesser separation distances require that the explosives in both 
ship units be totalled for Q/D purposes.
    (c) Measurement of separation distance--(1) Ships at a pier. 
Measurement of separation distances between ships shall be from the 
nearest point of one unit to the nearest point of the other. Movement 
of cars passing through the clear space is considered as an operations 
risk. It will generally be impracticable to separate berths at a single 
pier by enough distance to prevent mass detonation of ships containing 
complete cargoes of Hazard Division 1.1 ammunition. To the extent 
operationally feasible, therefore, scheduling shall be such as to 
reduce the number of such exposures and total time that they are 
required.
    (2) Piers. The separation distances between piers shall be measured 
from the nearest point of the ship unit at one pier to the nearest 
point of the ship unit under consideration at the other pier.
    (3) Anchorages. Measurements from anchorages generally shall be 
from the boundary of the area designated for the scuttling site or the 
explosives anchorage. In the case of the explosives anchorage, the 
separation distance to outside targets shall depend upon whether:
    (i) The ship units that are loading or unloading within the 
explosives anchorage are separated properly, taking into consideration 
location and the amount of explosives in each ship unit. The ship unit 
equivalent for an explosives anchorage is a circle, the radius of which 
is the distance from the mooring buoy or the ship's anchor to the stern 
of the ship or of the ammunition lighters alongside when riding to the 
full scope of the chain. To maintain proper separation distance between 
loading or unloading ship units in the explosives anchorage, the ships 
shall moor or anchor so that at no time will they have a separation 
distance less than 11W1/3 if quanities are not to be totalled.
    (ii) The ships being loaded or unloaded at one area are separated 
properly from the loaded ships in another area and whether the loaded 
ships within the loaded ship area are separated properly from each 
other. If the latter conditions do not apply, the quantity for entering 
the table shall be the total quantity rather than the unit quantity.
    (4) Dolphins or interrupted quays. Measurement of separation 
distance between ships moored to dolphins or interrupted quays shall be 
from the nearest point of one unit to the nearest point of the other.
    (5) Fixed targets. The measurement of separation distance from 
moored ships to fixed targets on land shall be from the nearest 
boundary of the ship or barge unit to the nearest fixed target.
    (d) Siting criteria and application of Q/D separation 
requirements--(1) Scuttling site. (i) A properly located scuttling site 
shall be provided, if practicable, for positioning a ship for its 
flooding or sinking in the event a vessel catches fire and shall be 
moved to avert damage to other ships or piers. It shall have sufficient 
sea room and depth of water to permit the sinking of the largest vessel 
that may be handled at the installation so that the holds will be 
flooded completely at low water.
    (ii) Since an explosion may occur while the vessel is being moved, 
the location of the scuttling site shall provide the best available 
protection to other ships, piers, and shore installations.
    (iii) The location of the scuttling site will depend on the 
greatest net quantity of mass-detonating explosives that may be in a 
single ship at any one time. The Q/D tables to be used will depend on 
the particular types of targets.
    (2) Explosives anchorage. The location of an explosives anchorage 
shall be separated not only from the main ship channel or from normally 
traversed routes of ships entering or leaving the harbor by column 8, 
Appendix A to this subpart distances but also by turning circles and 
stopping distances of the ships. Assuming that the diameter of the 
turning circle of a ship is 1,000 yards, an explosives anchorage shall 
be located so that a ship in the channel with a jammed rudder will 
clear an anchored explosives-laden ship. From the turning circle 
standpoint, the separation distances shall be not less than 3,000 feet.
    (i) Separation of ships at explosives anchorages. (A) When 
explosives anchorages are used for loading and unloading ships, as well 
as for fully loaded vessels anchored at their berths, ships that are 
being loaded or unloaded shall be separated from fully loaded ships.
    (B) When the explosives anchorage is used only for loading and 
unloading ships, to prevent mass detonation, ships in the explosives 
anchorage shall be separated by at least 11W1/3 distances. 
Whenever posssible, these distances shall be increased to 18W1/3 
to reduce the loss potential of any incident.
    (C) Loaded ships shall be separated one from another by at least 
18W1/3 distances.
    (ii) Separation of explosives anchorages from other targets. 
Explosives shall be from anchorages separated explosives piers by 40 
W1/3 distances except when the anchorage is used only for the 
loading or unloading of vessels. In such cases, 18W1/3 may be 
used.
    (3) Separation distances of ship units in tandem at the sam pier. 
(i) Since the second ship would be in an area of heavy fragment density 
from the exploding ship, it could be set afire and later caused to 
mass-detonate. A direct hit by a steel fragment on ammunition alongside 
the ship or in an open hold could also cause a mass detonation. The 
separation distances based on blast damage alone accordingly are not 
enough to take care of such fragment hazards. Berthing of the two ships 
in tandem will help to decrease the fragment hazard to the explosives 
cargo of the second ship because of the additional protection afforded 
by the bow or stern.
    (ii) When two ships cannot be separated by 11W1/3 distances 
and are being loaded through all hatches, the spotting of cars and the 
loading of hatches in both ships should be planned so as to put the 
greatest possible distance between open hatches of both ships, and 
between the trucks and freight cars serving the two ships. When 
possible, the loading of the ships should be staggered.
    (4) Separation of explosives ships from other ships. Explosives 
ships being loaded or unloaded shall be separated from nonexplosives-
carrying ships and from loaded explosives ships that are not underway 
by 40W1/3 distances. Column 8, Appendix A to this subpart 
distances shall be used for protection of ships that are underway.
    (5) Occasional watercraft passing through Q/D arcs are not subject 
to Q/D requirements.
    (e) Quantity/distance tables. Appendix R to this subpart shall be 
used in applying Appendix S to this subpart, Q/D. Appendix A to this 
subpart, Q/D shall be maintained between explosives pier and wharf 
facilities and such ES's as administration and industrial areas, 
terminal boundary, main ship channel, and public traffic routes. As ES, 
ship or barge units shall be separated from explosives operating and 
storage facilities (including holding yards) by Column 5, Appendix A to 
this subpart, distances. As PES, ship or barge units shall be separated 
from explosives operating facilities by Column 5, Appendix A to this 
subpart, distances, and from explosives storage facilities by Column 2, 
Appendix S to this subpart (barricaded) and Column 3 (unbarricaded), 
distances, as appropriate.

 Appendix A to Subpart F of Part 184.--Hazard Division 1.1--Inhabited Building Distance and Public Traffic Route
                                                    Distances                                                   
                                                                                                                
       Net explosive weight             Distance in feet to inhabited        Distance in feet to public traffic 
-----------------------------------             building from                            route from             
                                   -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                     Standard earth-covered                 Standard earth-covered              
                                            magazine                               magazine                     
         Over            Not over  --------------------------  Other PES  --------------------------  Other PES 
                                      Front or                               Front or                           
                                        side         Rear                      side         Rear                
Col 1                        Col 2        Col 3        Col 4        Col 5        Col 6        Col 7        Col 8
                                                                                                                
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0....................            1           35           25           40           21           15           24
1....................            2           44           32           50           26           19           30
2....................            5           60           43           69           36           26           40
5....................           10           75           54           87           45           32           52
10...................           20           95           68          110           57           41           65
20...................           30          110           78          125           65           47           75
30...................           40          120           86          140           72           51           83
40...................           50          130           92          150           77           55           89
50...................          100          160          115          190           97           70          115
100..................          200          205          145          235          125           88          140
200..................          300          235          165          270          140          100          160
300..................          400          260          185          295          155          110          175
400..................          500          280          200          320          165          120          190
500..................          600          295          210          340          175          125          205
600..................          700          310          220          355          185          135          215
700..................          800          325          230          375          195          140          225
800..................          900          340          240          390          205          145          235
900..................        1,000          350          250          400          210          150          240
1,000................        1,500          400          285          460          240          170          275
1,500................        2,000          440          315          505          265          190          305
2,000................        3,000          505          360          580          305          215          350
3,000................        4,000          555          395          635          335          240          380
4,000................        5,000          600          430          685          360          255          410
5,000................        6,000          635          455          730          380          275          440
6,000................        7,000          670          480          770          400          285          460
7,000................        8,000          700          500          800          420          300          480
8,000................        9,000          730          520          835          435          310          500
9,000................       10,000          755          540          865          450          325          520
10,000...............       15,000          865          615          990          520          370          595
15,000...............       20,000          950          680        1,090          570          405          655
20,000...............       25,000        1,025          730        1,170          615          440          700
25,000...............       30,000        1,085          775        1,250          650          465          745
30,000...............       35,000        1,145          820        1,310          685          490          785
35,000...............       40,000        1,195          855        1,370          720          515          820
40,000...............       45,000        1,245          890        1,425          745          535          855
45,000...............       50,000        1,290          920        1,475          775          555          885
50,000...............       55,000        1,330          950        1,520          800          570          910
55,000...............       60,000        1,370          980        1,565          820          585          940
60,000...............       65,000        1,405        1,005        1,610          845          605          965
65,000...............       70,000        1,440        1,030        1,650          865          620          990
70,000...............       75,000        1,475        1,055        1,685          885          635        1,010
75,000...............       80,000        1,510        1,075        1,725          905          645        1,035
80,000...............       85,000        1,540        1,100        1,760          925          660        1,055
85,000...............       90,000        1,570        1,120        1,795          940          670        1,075
90,000...............       95,000        1,595        1,140        1,825          960          685        1,095
95,000...............      100,000        1,625        1,160        1,855          975          695        1,115
100,000..............      110,000        1,740        1,290        1,960        1,045          770        1,175
110,000..............      120,000        1,855        1,415        2,065        1,110          850        1,240
120,000..............      125,000        1,910        1,480        2,115        1,145          890        1,270
125,000..............      130,000        1,965        1,545        2,165        1,180          925        1,300
130,000..............      140,000        2,070        1,675        2,255        1,245        1,005        1,355
140,000..............      150,000        2,175        1,805        2,350        1,305        1,085        1,410
150,000..............      160,000        2,280        1,935        2,435        1,370        1,160        1,460
160,000..............      170,000        2,385        2,070        2,520        1,430        1,280        1,540
170,000..............      175,000        2,435        2,135        2,565        1,460        1,280        1,540
175,000..............      180,000        2,485        2,200        2,605        1,490        1,320        1,565
180,000..............      190,000        2,585        2,335        2,690        1,550        1,400        1,615
190,000..............      200,000        2,680        2,470        2,770        1,610        1,480        1,660
200,000..............      225,000        2,920        2,810        2,965        1,750        1,685        1,780
225,000..............      250,000        3,150        3,150        3,150        1,890        1,890        1,890
250,000..............      275,000        3,250        3,250        3,250        1,950        1,950        1,950
275,000..............      300,000        3,345        3,345        3,345        2,005        2,005        2,005
300,000..............      325,000        3,440        3,440        3,440        2,065        2,065        2,065
325,000..............      350,000        3,525        3,525        3,525        2,115        2,115        2,115
350,000..............      375,000        3,605        3,605        3,605        2,165        2,165        2,165
375,000..............      400,000        3,685        3,685        3,685        2,210        2,210        2,210
400,000..............      425,000        3,760        3,760        3,760        2,250        2,250        2,250
425,000..............      450,000        3,830        3,830        3,830        2,300        2,300        2,300
450,000..............      475,000        3,900        3,900        3,900        2,340        2,340        2,340
475,000..............      500,000        3,970        3,970        3,970        2,380        2,380        2,380
Notes:                                                                                                          
1.Distances are computed using the following factors:                                                           


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                     NEW                            Col 3             Col 4             Col 5             Col 6             Col 7             Col 8     
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 to 100,000................................  351/3             25W1/3            40W1/3            21W1/3            15W1/3            24W1/3          
100,000 to 250,000..........................  .3955W 7227       .004125W 1.0898   2.42W 577         .2375W 7227       .002475W 1.0898   1.452W .577     
250,000 to 15,000,000.......................  50W1/3            50W1/3            50W1/3            30W1/3            30W1/3            30W1/3          
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.The policy contained in Sec. 184.52(g), shall be employed for mass-detonating, fragment-producing items.                                              
3.The distance for 0 to 50 points maybe used only when structures, blast mats, and so forth can completely confine fragments and debris. Lesser         
  distances may be used only if blast, fragments, and debris can be confined completely, as by certain test firing barricades.                          
4.Applies only to earth-covered magazines with dimensions of 26 feet wide and 60 feet long, or larger.                                                  


   Appendix B to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.1--Intraline  
                                Distances                               
------------------------------------------------------------------------
              Net expl. wt. (lb)                Distance in feet (Hazard
-----------------------------------------------          factor)        
                                               -------------------------
                                                                  No    
               Over                  Not over    Barricade    barricade 
                                                   (k=9)        (k=18)  
Col 1                                    Col 2        Col 3        Col 4
                                                                        
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0................................           50           30           60
50...............................          100           40           80
100..............................          200           50          100
200..............................          300           60          120
300..............................          400           65          130
400..............................          500           70          140
500..............................          600           75          150
600..............................          700           80          160
700..............................          800           85          170
800..............................          900           85          175
900..............................        1,000           90          180
1,000............................        1,500          105          210
1,500............................        2,000          115          230
2,000............................        3,000          130          260
3,000............................        4,000          145          290
4,000............................        5,000          155          310
5,000............................        6,000          165          330
6,000............................        7,000          170          340
7,000............................        8,000          180          360
8,000............................        9,000          185          370
9,000............................       10,000          195          390
10,000...........................       15,000          225          450
15,000...........................       20,000          245          490
20,000...........................       25,000          265          530
25,000...........................       30,000          280          560
30,000...........................       35,000          295          590
35,000...........................       40,000          310          620
40,000...........................       45,000          320          640
45,000...........................       50,000          330          660
50,000...........................       55,000          340          680
55,000...........................       60,000          350          700
60,000...........................       65,000          360          720
65,000...........................       70,000          370          740
70,000...........................       75,000          380          760
75,000...........................       80,000          390          780
80,000...........................       85,000          395          790
85,000...........................       90,000          405          810
90,000...........................       95,000          410          820
95,000...........................      100,000          420          840
100,000..........................      125,000          450          900
125,000..........................      150,000          480          960
150,000..........................      175,000          505        1,010
175,000..........................      200,000          525        1,055
200,000..........................      225,000          545        1,090
225,000..........................      250,000          565        1,135
250,000..........................      275,000          585        1,170
275,000..........................      300,000          600        1,200
300,000..........................      325,000          620        1,240
325,000..........................      350,000          635        1,270
350,000..........................      375,000          650        1,300
375,000..........................      400,000          665        1,330
400,000..........................      500,000          715        1,430
500,000..........................      600,000          760        1,520
600,000..........................      700,000          800        1,600
700,000..........................      800,000          835        1,670
800,000..........................      900,000          870        1,740
900,000..........................    1,000,000          900        1,800
1,000,000........................    1,500,000        1,030        2,060
1,500,000........................    2,000,000        1,135        2,270
2,000,000........................    2,500,000        1,220        2,440
2,500,000........................    3,000,000        1,300        2,600
3,000,000........................    3,500,000        1,365        2,730
3,500,000........................    4,000,000        1,430        2,860
4,000,000........................    5,000,000        1,540        3,080
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: For less than 50 pounds, shorter distances may be used when       
  structures, blast mats, and so forth can completely contain fragments 
  and debris. This distance must be, determined by formula D=kW1/3,     
  where k=9 for barricaded explosives and k=18 for unbarricaded         
  explosives. When blast, fragments, and debris are confined completely,
  as by certain test firing barricades, this table is not applicable.   


   Appendix C to Subpart F of Part 184.--Hazard Division 1.1--Intraline Distances From Earth-Covered Magazines  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                  Barricaded                            Unbarricaded            
             NEW (lbs)             -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Front         Side         Rear        Front         Side         Rear   
Col. 1                                   Col. 2       Col. 3       Col. 4       Col. 5       Col. 6       Col. 7
                                                                                                                
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50................................           35           25           20           60           60            4
100...............................           45           30           30           80           75            5
200...............................           60           40           35          100           95            7
300...............................           65           45           40          120          105            8
400...............................           75           50           45          130          120            9
500...............................           80           55           50          140          125            9
600...............................           85           60           50          150          135           10
700...............................           90           60           55          160          140           10
800...............................           90           65           55          170          150           11
900...............................           95           70           60          175          155           11
1,000.............................          100           70           60          180          160           12
1,500.............................          115           80           70          210          185           13
2,000.............................          125           90           75          230          200           15
3,000.............................          145          100           85          260          230           17
4,000.............................          160          110           95          290          255           19
5,000.............................          170          120          100          310          275           20
6,000.............................          180          125          110          330          290           22
7,000.............................          190          135          115          340          305           23
8,000.............................          200          140          120          260          320           24
9,000.............................          210          145          125          370          330           25
10,000............................          215          150          130          390          345           26
15,000............................          245          175          150          450          395           29
20,000............................          270          190          165          490          435           32
25,000............................          290          205          175          530          470           35
30,000............................          310          220          185          560          500           37
35,000............................          325          230          195          590          525           39
40,000............................          340          240          205          620          545          410
45,000............................          355          250          215          640          570          425
50,000............................          370          260          220          660          590          440
55,000............................          380          265          230          680          610          455
60,000............................          390          275          235          700          625          470
65,000............................          400          280          240          720          645          480
70,000............................          410          290          245          740          660          495
75,000............................          420          295          255          760          675          505
80,000............................          430          300          260          780          690          520
85,000............................          440          310          265          790          705          530
90,000............................          450          315          270          810          715          540
95,000............................          455          320          275          820          730          545
100,000...........................          465          325          280          840          745          555
125,000...........................          500          350          300          900          800          605
150,000...........................          530          370          320          960          850          650
175,000...........................          560          390          335        1,010          895          700
200,000...........................          585          410          350        1,055          935          745
225,000...........................          610          425          365        1,090          975          795
250,000...........................          630          440          380        1,135        1,005          840
275,000...........................          650          455          390        1,170        1,040          890
300,000...........................          670          470          400        1,200        1,070          935
325,000...........................          675          520          465        1,240        1,135        1,035
350,000...........................          680          570          530        1,270        1,200        1,130
375,000...........................          685          615          600        1,300        1,265        1,230
400,000...........................          690          665          665        1,330        1,330        1,330
500,000...........................          715          715          715        1,430        1,430        1,430
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: Testing has shown some attenuation of the airblast overpressure occurs at the sides and rear of earth-    
  covered magazines relative to the unconfined surface burst configuration. Some slight overpressure increase   
  occurs at the front. To account for this attenuation, the 12 psi (Barricaded) and 3.5 psi (Unbarricaded)      
  Intraline Distances from earth-covered magazines are given according to the factors presented below.          


------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                  NEW Range (1                          
            Exposure                  lbs)        Vice K9      Vice K18 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Front..........................  1-300K\1\               10           18
                                 300-500K              10-9           18
Side...........................  1-300K                   7           16
                                 300-400K               7-9        16-18
                                 over 400K                9           18
Rear...........................  1-100K                   6           12
                                 100K-300K                6        12-14
                                 300K-400K              6-9        14-18
                                 over 400K                9           18
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\300K=300,000.                                                        


                          Appendix D to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.1--Intermagazine Hazard Factors and Distances                          
                                                              [Part A--Hazard Factors (K)]                                                              
                                                                                                                                                        
                                         Standard earth-covered magazine\1\          Nonstandard earth-covered magazine\2\     Above-ground             
                                 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------    magazine (not     Modules
                                                                                                                             earth covered)\3\   and/or 
                                                                                                                           --------------------   cells 
                                                                                                                                                        
From (PES)......................  To (ES)       S         R        FU        FB         S         R        FU        FB         U         B         B   
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Standard earth-covered            S             1.25      1.25      2.75      2.75      1.25      1.25      6         6         6         4.5       1.25
 magazine\1\.                                                                                                                                           
                                  R             1.25      1.25      2         2         1.25      1.25      6         6         6         4.5       1.25
                                  FU            2.75      2        11         6         2.75      2        11         6        11         6         6   
                                  FB            2.75      2         6         6         2.75      2         6         6         6         6         6   
Nonstandard earth-covered         S             1.25      1.25      2.75      2.75      1.25      1.25      6         6         6         6         1.25
 magazine\2\.                                                                                                                                           
                                  R             1.25      1.25      2         2         1.25      1.25      6         6         6         6         1.25
                                  FU            6         6        11         6         6         6        11         6        11         6         6   
                                  FB            6         6         6         6         6         6         6         6         6         6         6   
Above-ground magazine (not earth  U             4.0       4.0      11         6         4.0       4.0      11         6        11         6         6   
 covered)\3\.                                                                                                                                           
                                  B             4.0       4.0       6         6         4.0       4.0       6         6         6         6         6   
Modules and/or Cells............  B             1.25      1.25      6         6         1.25      1.25      6         6         6         6         1.1 
Legend: S--side; R--rear; F--front; B--barricaded; U--unbarricaded.                                                                                     
\1\Standard earth-covered, arch type magazines comprise all magazines equal to or stronger than Army igloo magazines; navy arch-type magazines; and     
  earth-covered, corrugated steel, arth-type magazines. See definition of magazine.                                                                     
\2\Nonstandard earth-covered magazines with earth cover equal to or greater than that required by standard, earth-covered, arch-type magazines.         
\3\Aboveground magazines are all type above grade (not earth-covered) magazines or storage pads.                                                        
                                                                                                                                                        
Note: Use Part A of this table to find the hazard factor, K, corresponding to the types and aspects of the two magazines. Use the column for this hazard
  factor in Part B to determine the appropriate distance for the net explosive weight involved. Sec. 184.54(a)(1) describes Q-D for various magazine    
  orientations.                                                                                                                                         


                          Appendix D to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.1--Intermagazine Hazard Factors and Distances                          
                                                                        [Part B]                                                                        
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                      Net expl. wt. (lb)                                                      Hazard factor (k) from part A                             
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                     Over                          Not over       1.1      1.25      2       2.75      4       4.5       5        6        8        11  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.............................................             100        7        7        9       13       18       21       24       28       36       51
100...........................................             200        7        7       12       16       24       26       30       35       48       64
200...........................................             300        7        8       13       18       26       30       32       40       52       74
300...........................................             400        8        9       15       20       30       33       36       44       60       81
400...........................................             500        9       10       16       22       32       36       40       48       64       87
500...........................................             600        9       11       17       23       34       38       44       51       68       93
600...........................................             700       10       11       18       24       36       40       44       53       72       98
700...........................................             800       10       12       19       26       38       42       48       56       76      102
800...........................................             900       11       12       19       27       38       43       48       58       76      106
900...........................................           1,000       11       13       20       28       40       45       50       60       80      110
1,000.........................................           1,500       13       14       23       31       46       52       56       69       92      126
1,500.........................................           2,000       14       16       25       34       50       57       64       76      100      139
2,000.........................................           3,000       16       18       29       40       58       65       72       86      116      158
3,000.........................................           4,000       17       20       32       44       64       72       80       95      128      175
4,000.........................................           5,000       19       21       34       47       68       77       84      103      136      188
5,000.........................................           6,000       20       23       36       50       72       82       92      109      144      200
6,000.........................................           7,000       21       24       38       53       76       86       96      115      152      210
7,000.........................................           8,000       22       25       40       55       80       90      100      120      160      220
8,000.........................................           9,000       23       26       42       57       84       94      104      125      168      230
9,000.........................................          10,000       24       27       43       59       86       97      108      130      172      235
10,000........................................          20,000       30       35       55       75      110      120      140      165      220      300
20,000........................................          30,000       35       40       60       85      120      140      160      185      240      340
30,000........................................          40,000       40       45       70       95      140      150      170      205      280      375
40,000........................................          50,000       40       45       75      100      150      170      180      220      300      405
50,000........................................          60,000       45       50       80      110      160      180      200      235      320      430
60,000........................................          70,000       45       50       80      115      165      185      210      245      320      455
70,000........................................          80,000       45       55       85      120      170      195      220      260      340      475
80,000........................................          90,000       50       55       90      125      180      200      220      270      360      495
90,000........................................         100,000       50       60       95      135      190      210      230      280      380      510
100,000.......................................         125,000       55       65      100      140      200      225      250      300      400      550
125,000.......................................         150,000       60       65      105      145      210      240      260      320      420      585
150,000.......................................         175,000       60       70      110      155      220      250      280      335      440      615
175,000.......................................         200,000       65       75      115      160      230      260      290      350      460      645
200,000.......................................         225,000       65       75      120      165      240      270      300      365      480      670
225,000.......................................         250,000       70       80      125      175      250      285      320      380      500      695
250,000.......................................         300,000       75       85      135      185      270      300      340      400      540      735
300,000.......................................         350,000       80       90      140      195      280      320      350      425      560      775
350,000.......................................         400,000       80       90      145      205      290      330      370      440      580      810
400,000.......................................         450,000       85       95      155      210      310      345      380      460      620      845
450,000.......................................         500,000       85      100      160      220      320      360      400      475      640      875
500,000.......................................         600,000       95      105      170      230      340      380      420      505      680      930
600,000.......................................         700,000      100      110      180      245      360      400      440      535      720      975
700,000.......................................         800,000      100      115      185      255      370      420      460      555      740    1,020
800,000.......................................         900,000      105      120      195      265      390      435      480      580      780    1,060
900,000.......................................       1,000,000      110      125      200      275      400      450      500      600      800    1,100
1,000,000.....................................       1,250,000      120      135      215      295      430      485      540      645      860    1,185
1,250,000.....................................       1,500,000      125      145      230      315      460      515      570      685      920    1,260
1,500,000.....................................       1,750,000      135      150      240      330      480      540      600      725      960    1,325
1,750,000.....................................       2,000,000      140      160      250      345      500      570      630      755    1,000    1,385
2,000,000.....................................       2,250,000      145      165      260      360      520      590      660      785    1,040    1,440
2,250,000.....................................       2,500,000      150      170      270      375      540      610      680      815    1,080    1,495
2,500,000.....................................       2,750,000      155      175      280      385      560      630      700      840    1,120    1,540
2,750,000.....................................       3,000,000      160      180      290      395      580      650      720      865    1,160    1,585
3,000,000.....................................       3,250,000      165      185      295      405      590      670      740      890    1,180    1,630
3,250,000.....................................       3,500,000      165      190      305      415      610      680      760      910    1,220    1,670
3,500,000.....................................       3,750,000      170      195      310      430      620      700      780      930    1,240    1,710
3,750,000.....................................       4,000,000      175      200      315      435      630      715      790      950    1,260    1,745
4,000,000.....................................       4,250,000      180      200      325      445      650      730      810      970    1,300    1,780
4,250,000.....................................       4,500,000      180      205      330      455      660      740      830      990    1,320    1,815
4,500,000.....................................       4,750,000      185      210      335      460      670      760      840    1,010    1,340    1,850
4,750,000.....................................       5,000,000      190      215      340      470      680      770      860    1,025    1,360    1,880
5,000,000.....................................       5,500,000      195      220      355      485      710      795      880    1,060    1,420    1,940
5,500,000.....................................       6,000,000      200      225      365      500      730      820      890    1,090    1,460    2,000
6,000,000.....................................       6,500,000      205      235      375      515      750      840      930    1,120    1,500    2,055
6,500,000.....................................       7,000,000      210      240      385      525      770      860      960    1,150    1,540    2,105
7,000,000.....................................       7,500,000      215      245      390      540      780      880      980    1,175    1,560    2,155
7,500,000.....................................       8,000,000      220      250      400      550      800      900    1,000    1,200    1,600    2,200
8,000,000.....................................       8,500,000      225      255      410      560      820      920    1,020    1,225    1,640    2,245
8,500,000.....................................       9,000,000      230      260      415      570      830      935    1,040    1,250    1,660    2,290
9,000,000.....................................       9,500,000      235      265      425      580      850      950    1,060    1,270    1,700    2,330
9,500,000.....................................      10,000,000      235      270      430      595      860      970    1,080    1,295    1,720    2,370
10,000,000....................................      11,000,000      245      280      445      610      890    1,000    1,110    1,335    1,780    2,415
11,000,000....................................      12,000,000      250      285      460      630      920    1,030    1,140    1,375    1,840    2,520
12,000,000....................................      13,000,000      260      295      470      645      940    1,060    1,160    1,410    1,880    2,585
13,000,000....................................      14,000,000      265      300      480      665      960    1,085    1,210    1,445    1,920    2,640
14,000,000....................................      15,000,000      270      310      495      680      990    1,110    1,230    1,480    1,980    2,715
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                       Appendix E to Subpart F of Part 184.--Hazard Division 1.1--Fragment Hazard                                       
                                                                 [Primary/Secondary]\1\                                                                 
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
              New explosive weight                  Distance in feet to fragment/debris target from      Distance in feet to public traffic route from  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                   Standard/non-standard earth-covered                 Standard/non-standard earth-covered              
                                                                 magazine                                            magazine                           
                Over                   Not over  ---------------------------------------  Other PES  ---------------------------------------  Other PES 
                                                     Front         Side         Rear                     Front         Side         Rear                
Col 1                                      Col 2        Col 3        Col 4        Col 5     Col 6\4\        Col 7        Col 8        Col 9       Col 10
                                                                                                                                                        
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0..................................          100          500          250          250          670          300          150          150       670\2\
100................................          200          500          250          250     1,250\3\          300          150          150     1,250\2\
200................................          500          700          250          250        1,250          420          150          150        1,250
500................................       30,000        1,250        1,250        1,250        1,250          750          750          750        1,250
30,000.............................       35,000        1,250        1,250        1,250        (\6\)          750          750          750        (\6\)
35,000.............................       40,000        1,250        1,250        1,250                       750          750          750  ...........
40,000.............................       45,000        1,250        1,250        1,250                       750          750          750  ...........
45,000.............................       50,000        1,250        1,250        1,250                       750          750          750  ...........
50,000.............................       55,000        (\6\)        (\6\)        1,250                     (\6\)        (\6\)          750  ...........
55,000.............................       60,000                                  1,250                                                 750  ...........
60,000.............................       65,000                                  1,250                                                 750  ...........
65,000.............................       70,000                                  1,250                                                 750  ...........
70,000.............................       75,000                                  1,250                                                 750  ...........
75,000.............................       80,000                                  1,250                                                 750  ...........
80,000.............................       85,000                                  1,250                                                 750  ...........
85,000.............................       90,000                                  1,250                                                 750  ...........
90,000.............................      100,000                                  1,250                                                 750  ...........
95,000.............................      100,000                                  1,250                                                 750  ...........
                                         100,000                                  (\6\)                                               (\6\)             
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\Distances in Appendix A to Subpart F of this part are authorized for use, if documentation assures that hazardous fragment density is controlled as  
  prescribed in Sec. 184.52(f)(5) or under the conditions of Sec. 184.52(f)(6) through Sec. 184.52(f)(9).                                               
\2\A minimum distance equal to 60 percent of this distance may be used when the conditions of $184.52(f)(5)(ii) are met.                                
\3\For NEW not exceeding 11,400 lbs, distances may be reduced to 900 feet, if conditions of $184.52(f)(6) are met.                                      
\4\For items that have been adequately evaluated, distances such as those shown in Appendix F to Subpart F of this part must be used.                   
\5\Distances for NEW between 30,000 and 250,000 lbs apply only for earth-covered magazines that are at least 26 feet wide and 60 feet long. For smaller 
  earth-covered magazines, containing between 30,000 and 250,000 lbs of NEW, use other PES distances of columns 6 and 10.                               
\6\Blast (overpressure) hazard distances contained in Appendix A to Subpart F of this part exceed fragmentation distances at this point and must be     
  used.                                                                                                                                                 


  Appendix F to Subpart F of Part 184.--Hazardous Division 1.1--Minimum 
             Fragment Protection Distance for Selected Items            
------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Nomenclature                   Distance required in feet            
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         Col 2        Col 3        Col 4        Col 5   
        Col 1        ---------------------------------------------------
                         1 Unit      2 Units      5 Units    10 Units\1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
AGM 65/A............          400          500          500          500
AIM 7, Mk 38 Warhead          700          700          700          700
AIM 9...............          400          400          400          400
ASROC...............          500       \2\500                          
Bomb, 750 lb, M117A2          690          820         1020         1470
Bomb, 500 lb, Mk 82.          670          860         1080         1240
Chaparral...........          400          400          400          400
Harpoon.............          500                                       
Improved Hawk.......          900          900          900          900
Nike Hercules.......          900         1150         1150         1150
Penguin.............          500       \2\500                          
Projectile, 175mm,                                                      
 M437A2.............          450          580          830         2070
Projectile, 155mm,                                                      
 M107...............          400          510          720         1490
Projectile, 105mm,                                                      
 MI\3\..............          270          350          500         1000
Projectile, 8 in, Mk                                                    
 25.................          520          750          960         1240
Projectile, 5 in, Mk                                                    
 49.................          280          430          660         1000
Tomahawk............          500       \4\600         1250         1250
Torpedoes (Navy) not                                                    
 over 1,500 lbs NEW.       \5\500       \5\500       \5\500       \5\500
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\Ten units or more until the point is reached at which this distance  
  is exceeded by the distance requirements of Appendix A to Subpart F of
  this part.                                                            
\2\This distance applies for a maximum of 3 units.                      
\3\105mm projectiles and 105mm complete rounds not in standard storage  
  and shipping containers are Hazard Division 1.1.                      
\4\This distance applies for a maximum of 4 units. Missiles must be     
  transported and/or handled only two at a time in a nose-to-tail       
  configuration and in their launch capsule and/or shipping container as
  well as aligned and/or handled so that each group of two missiles is  
  located outside of the warhead fragment beam spray region of the other
  two missiles.                                                         
\5\This distance applies to any torpedoes that are analogous in terms of
  explosive hazard to those tested; that is, MK 16 war shot.            


BILLING CODE 5000-04-M

TP16DE94.003


BILLING CODE 5000-04-C

     Appendix H to Subpart F of Part 184.--Category (04), Hazard Division 1.2--Nonmass Detonating, Fragment     
                                                  Producing\1\                                                  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Public                  Magazine distance (ft) 
                                                  Inhabited     traffic     Intraline  -------------------------
             Net explosives weight                 building      route       distance                           
                                                   distance     distance       (ft)        Above-       Earth-  
                                                     (ft)         (ft)                     ground      covered  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No limit specifically required for safety                                                                       
 reasons.......................................          400          240          200          200        (\2\)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\Limited quantities of items in this class, for reasons of operational necessity, may be stored in facilities 
  such as hangars, troop buildings, and manufacturing or operating buildings without regard to Q/D. Examples:   
  small destructors, fuzes and firing devices.                                                                  
\2\Earth-covered standard or nonstandard magazines may be used without limit for this category. However, the    
  construction, siting, and orientation requirements of subparts D and F of this part for Hazard Division 1.1   
  must be met.                                                                                                  
                                                                                                                
Note: List of items (examples only): Small arms ammunition with explosive projectiles; 20mm ammunition with     
  explosive projectiles; fuzed ammunition with non-explosive projectiles when caliber and packing limit the     
  hazard in accordance with this class; WP smoke hand grenades; and nonmass detonating CBUs.                    


Appendix I to Subpart F of Part 184.--Category (08), Hazard Division 1.2--Nonmass Detonating, Fragment Producing
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Public                  Magazine distance (ft) 
                                                  Inhabited     traffic     Intraline  -------------------------
             Net explosives weight                 building      route       distance                           
                                                   distance     distance       (ft)        Above-       Earth-  
                                                     (ft)         (ft)                     ground      covered  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No limit specifically required for safety                                                                       
 reasons.......................................          800          480      400 \1\          300        (\2\)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\If the HE in (08) 1.2 items at an operating line PES is limited to 5000 lbs, intraline distance may be       
  reduced to 200 ft.                                                                                            
\2\Earth-covered standard and nonstandard magazines may be used without limit for this category. However, the   
  construction, siting, and orientation requirements of subparts D and F of this part for Hazard Division 1.1   
  must be met.                                                                                                  
                                                                                                                
Note: List of items (examples only): Fixed and semifixed ammunition, rockets and rocket components, chemical    
  ammunition containing explosive elements, and nonmass-detonating CBUs.                                        


Appendix J to Subpart F of Part 184.--Category (12), Hazard Division 1.2--Nonmass Detonating, Fragment Producing
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Public                  Magazine distance (ft) 
                                                  Inhabited     traffic     Intraline  -------------------------
              Net explosive weight                 building      route       distance                           
                                                   distance     distance       (ft)        Above-       Earth-  
                                                     (ft)         (ft)                     ground      covered  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
500,000........................................        1,200          720       600\2\          300        (\3\)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\Items of this category present a risk of propagation to adjacent aboveground magazines, particularly when    
  packed in combustible containers. Storage in earth-covered magazines is therefore preferred.                  
\2\If the HE in (12) 1.2 items at an operating line PES is limited to 5000 lbs, intraline distance may be       
  reduced to 200 ft.                                                                                            
\3\Earth-covered standard and nonstandard magazines may be used without limit for this category. However, the   
  construction, siting, and orientation requirements of subparts D and F of this part for Hazard Division 1.1   
  must be met.                                                                                                  
                                                                                                                
Note: List of items (examples only): Separate projectiles with explosive ``D'' filler, except high capacity     
  types, caliber 8-inch or larger; fixed and semifixed ammunition; nonmass-detonating CBUs; rockets, rocket     
  motors and nonmass-detonating rocket heads.                                                                   


     Appendix K to Subpart F of Part 184.--Category (18), Hazard Division 1.2--Nonmass Detonating, Fragment     
                                                  Producing1,2                                                  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Public                  Magazine distance (ft) 
                                                  Inhabited     traffic     Intraline  -------------------------
             Net explosives weight                 building      route       distance                           
                                                   distance     distance       (ft)        Above-       Earth-  
                                                     (ft)         (ft)                     ground      covered  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
500,000........................................        1,800        1,080          900          300        (\2\)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\Items of this category present a risk of propagation to adjacent aboveground magazines, particularly when    
  packed in combustible containers. Storage in earth-covered magazines is therefore preferred.                  
\2\Earth-covered standard and nonstandard magazines may be used without limit for this category. However, the   
  construction, siting, and orientation requirements of subparts D and F of this part for Hazard Division 1.1   
  must be met.                                                                                                  
                                                                                                                
Note: List of items (examples only): Nonmass-detonating HE-loaded projectiles, fixed and semifixed ammunition,  
  and rockets and rocket heads.                                                                                 


   Appendix L to Subpart F of Part 184--Hazard Division 1.3--Mass Fire  
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                  Above-
                                                         IBD or   ground
              Net explosives weight (lbs)                 PTR     IMD OR
                                                          (ft)     ILD  
                                                                   (ft) 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1,000.................................................       75       50
2,000.................................................       86       57
3,000.................................................       96       63
4,000.................................................      106       69
5,000.................................................      115       75
6,000.................................................      123       81
7,000.................................................      130       86
8,000.................................................      137       91
9,000.................................................      144       96
10,000................................................      150      100
12,000................................................      159      105
14,000................................................      168      111
16,000................................................      176      116
18,000................................................      183      120
20,000................................................      190      125
22,000................................................      195      130
24,000................................................      201      134
26,000................................................      206      138
28,000................................................      210      142
30,000................................................      215      145
32,000................................................      219      147
34,000................................................      224      149
36,000................................................      228      151
38,000................................................      231      153
40,000................................................      235      155
42,000................................................      238      157
44,000................................................      242      159
46,000................................................      245      161
48,000................................................      247      163
50,000................................................      250      165
52,000................................................      252      167
54,000................................................      254      169
56,000................................................      256      171
58,000................................................      258      173
60,000................................................      260      175
62,000................................................      262      177
64,000................................................      264      180
66,000................................................      266      182
68,000................................................      268      183
70,000................................................      270      185
72,000................................................      272      186
74,000................................................      274      187
76,000................................................      276      188
78,000................................................      278      189
80,000................................................      280      190
82,000................................................      284      191
84,000................................................      287      192
86,000................................................      290      193
88,000................................................      293      194
90,000................................................      295      195
92,000................................................      296      196
94,000................................................      297      197
96,000................................................      298      198
98,000................................................      299      199
100,000...............................................      300      200
110,000...............................................      307      205
120,000...............................................      315      210
130,000...............................................      322      215
140,000...............................................      330      220
150,000...............................................      337      225
160,000...............................................      345      230
170,000...............................................      352      235
180,000...............................................      360      240
190,000...............................................      367      245
200,000...............................................      375      250
210,000...............................................      383      255
220,000...............................................      390      260
230,000...............................................      398      265
240,000...............................................      405      270
250,000...............................................      413      275
260,000...............................................      420      280
270,000...............................................      428      285
280,000...............................................      435      290
290,000...............................................      443      295
300,000...............................................      450      300
310,000...............................................      458      305
320,000...............................................      465      310
330,000...............................................      473      315
340,000...............................................      480      320
350,000...............................................      488      325
360,000...............................................      495      330
370,000...............................................      503      335
380,000...............................................      510      340
390,000...............................................      518      345
400,000...............................................      525      350
410,000...............................................      533      355
420,000...............................................      541      361
430,000...............................................      549      366
440,000...............................................      556      371
450,000...............................................      564      376
460,000...............................................      571      381
470,000...............................................      579      386
480,000...............................................      586      391
490,000...............................................      593      395
500,000...............................................      600      400
510,000...............................................      605      402
520,000...............................................      609      404
530,000...............................................      614      407
540,000...............................................      618      409
550,000...............................................      623      411
560,000...............................................      627      413
570,000...............................................      632      415
580,000...............................................      636      418
590,000...............................................      641      420
600,000...............................................      645      422
610,000...............................................      649      424
620,000...............................................      654      426
630,000...............................................      658      428
640,000...............................................      662      430
650,000...............................................      667      432
660,000...............................................      671      435
670,000...............................................      675      437
680,000...............................................      679      439
690,000...............................................      684      441
700,000...............................................      688      443
710,000...............................................      692      445
720,000...............................................      696      447
730,000...............................................      700      449
740,000...............................................      704      451
750,000...............................................      708      453
760,000...............................................      712      455
770,000...............................................      716      457
780,000...............................................      720      459
790,000...............................................      724      461
800,000...............................................      728      463
810,000...............................................      732      465
820,000...............................................      735      467
830,000...............................................      739      469
840,000...............................................      743      471
850,000...............................................      747      472
860,000...............................................      750      474
870,000...............................................      754      476
880,000...............................................      758      478
890,000...............................................      761      480
900,000...............................................      765      482
910,000...............................................      769      484
920,000...............................................      772      486
930,000...............................................      776      487
940,000...............................................      779      489
950,000...............................................      783      491
960,000...............................................      786      493
970,000...............................................      790      495
980,000...............................................      793      496
990,000...............................................      797      498
1,000,000.............................................      800      500
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:                                                                  
1. For quantities less than 1,000 lbs, the required distances are those 
  specified for 1,000 lbs. The use of lesser distances may be approved  
  when supported by test data and/or analysis.                          
2. Linear interpolation of NEW quantities between table entries is      
  permitted.                                                            
3. For quantities above 1,000,000 lbs, the values given above will be   
  extrapolated by means of cube-root scaling as follows:                
4. For inhabited building distance (IBD) and public traffic route (PTR) 
  distance, use D=8W1/3.                                                
5. For aboveground intermagazine distance (IMD) and intraline distance  
  (ILD), use D=5W1/3.                                                   
6. List of items (examples only): Military pyrotechnics; solid          
  propellants in bulk, in containers, or in ammunition items; and       
  nontoxic chemical ammunition.                                         
7. Earth-covered buildings may be used to their physical capacity for   
  this division provided they comply with the construction and siting   
  requirements of Subparts D and F, respectively, for Hazard Division   
  1.1.                                                                  
8. For reasons of operational necessity, limited quantities of items in 
  this class, such as document destroyers, signaling devices, riot      
  control munitions and the like, may be stored without regard to       
  quantity-distance in accordance with fire protection regulations in   
  facilities such as hangars, arms rooms, and manufacturing or operating
  buildings.                                                            


            Appendix M to Subpart F of Part 184.--Hazard Division 1.4--Moderate Fire, No Blast\1\,\2\           
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                 Public                                        Magazine distance (ft)           
                    Inhabited    traffic                          ----------------------------------------------
  Net explosives    building      route      Intraline distance                                                 
      weight        distance    distance            (ft)                 Aboveground           Earth-covered    
                      (ft)        (ft)                                                                          
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Larger quantities         100         100  50 (100 if combustible  50 (100 if combustible  No specified         
 no limit                                   construction).          construction).          separation          
 specifically                                                                               requirement.        
 required for                                                                                                   
 safety reasons.                                                                                                
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\With reasonable care in storage, Hazard Division 1.4 items may be stored in any weatherproof warehouse in a  
  warehouse area for general supplies provided such warehouse is separated from all other warehouses by at least
  the aboveground magazine separation distance specified.                                                       
\2\Limited quantities of Hazard Division 1.4 items may be stored in facilities such as hangars and manufacturing
  or operating buildings without regard to Q/D. Examples: small arms ammunition, riot control munitions, and    
  pyrotechnics. Also, small magazines used for similar purposes may be separated by applicable fire protection  
  distances.                                                                                                    

    Note: List of items (examples only): Small arms ammunition 
without explosive projectiles, fuse lighters and squibs, distress 
signals, 20mm ammunition without explosive projectiles, colored 
smoke grenades, and explosive valves or switches (see 
Sec. 184.22(b)).

   Appendix N to Subpart F of Part 184.--Hazard Division 1.6N and EIDS  
                               Components                               
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Hazard    
                EIDS and EIDS ammunition                  classification
------------------------------------------------------------------------
EIDS bulk...............................................  1.5D          
EIDS loaded projectiles and/or warheads w/o fuzes or      1.6N          
 with EIDS fuzes\1\,\2\.                                                
EIDS fuzes\1\...........................................  1.4D, 1.4S,   
                                                           1.6N         
EIDS loaded projectiles and/or warheads w/1.3 propelling  1.2C, 1.3C,   
 charges and without fuzes or with EIDS fuzes\1\,\2\.      1.4C         
EIDS loaded projectiles and/or warheads with non-EIDS     1.2D\3\,\4\   
 fuzes and without 1.3 propelling charges.                 1.4D\4\      
EIDS loaded projectiles and/or warheads with non-         1.2E\3\,\4\   
 EIDS\2\,\4\ fuzes and with 1.3 propelling charges.        1.4E\4\      
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\``EIDS Fuzed'' means that the fuze has an EIDS booster with an out-of-
  line EIDS explosive and two or more independent safety features. The  
  fuze must be certified as invulnerable to accidental detonation of the
  warhead.                                                              
\2\Fuzed configuration must be tested for propagation. Fuzed Hazard     
  Division 1.6 ammunition must contain either an EIDS fuze or a non-    
  explosive fuze (fuze contains no explosive); otherwise the ammunition 
  is classified as unit risk Hazard Division 1.2. Minimum fragment      
  distance is based on hazardous fragment areal density requirements, as
  determined for Hazard Division 1.1 ammunition, applies for unit risk  
  Hazard Division 1.2.                                                  
\3\Unit risk Hazard Division 1.2 may be justified on a case-by-case     
  basis.                                                                
\4\Fuze must have two or more independent safety features and           
  independently classified Group D.                                     


  Appendix O to Subpart F of Part 184.--Quantity/Distance Criteria for  
                     Hazard Division 1.6 Ammunition                     
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                (Above- 
                                                      IBD or     ground 
                     New (lbs)                       PTR (ft)    IMD or 
                                                                ILD (ft)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
100...............................................         37         23
200...............................................         47         29
300...............................................         54         33
400...............................................         59         37
500...............................................         64         40
600...............................................         67         42
700...............................................         71         44
800...............................................         74         46
900...............................................         77         48
1,000.............................................         80         50
2,000.............................................        101         63
3,000.............................................        115         72
4,000.............................................        127         79
5,000.............................................        137         86
6,000.............................................        145         91
7,000.............................................        153         96
8,000.............................................        160        100
9,000.............................................        166        104
10,000............................................        172        108
15,000............................................        197        123
20,000............................................        217        136
25,000............................................        234        146
30,000............................................        249        155
35,000............................................        262        164
40,000............................................        274        171
45,000............................................        285        178
50,000............................................        295        184
55,000............................................        304        190
60,000............................................        313        196
65,000............................................        322        201
70,000............................................        330        206
75,000............................................        337        211
80,000............................................        345        215
85,000............................................        352        220
90,000............................................        359        224
95,000............................................        365        228
100,000...........................................        371        232
110,000...........................................        383        240
120,000...........................................        395        247
125,000...........................................        400        250
130,000...........................................        405        253
140,000...........................................        415        260
150,000...........................................        425        266
160,000...........................................        434        271
170,000...........................................        443        277
175,000...........................................        447        280
180,000...........................................        452        282
190,000...........................................        460        287
200,000...........................................        468        292
225,000...........................................        487        304
250,000...........................................        504        315
275,000...........................................        520        325
300,000...........................................        536        334
325,000...........................................        550        344
350,000...........................................        564        352
375,000...........................................        577        361
400,000...........................................        589        368
425,000...........................................        601        376
450,000...........................................        613        383
475,000...........................................        624        390
500,000...........................................        635        397
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Notes:
    1. The same distances are used for aboveground intermagazine 
distances (IMD) and intraline distances (ILD). Earth-covered 
magazines, both standard and non-standard, may be used to their 
physical capacity for this hazard division, provided they comply 
with the construction and siting requirements of subparts D and F of 
this part for Hazard Division 1.1.
    2. For quantities less than 100 lbs, the required distances are 
those specified for 100 lbs. The use of lesser distances may be 
approved when supported by test data and/or analysis.
    3. Interpolation is permitted. For inhabited building distance 
(IBD) and public traffic route (PTR) use D=8W1/3. For 
aboveground IMD and intraline distance (ILD) use 5W1/3.
    4. Unit risk distance applies as a minimum; that is, for IBD or 
PTR, D=40W1/3 or minimum fragment distance, whichever is 
greater; and for aboveground IMD or ILD, D=18W1/3, based on a 
single round of ammunition. Minimum fragment distance is based on 
hazardous fragment areal density requirements as determined for 
Hazard Division 1.1 munitions.
    5. For Hazard Division 1.6 items packed in non-flammable pallets 
or packing, stored in earth-covered steel or concrete arch magazines 
when acceptable to the cognizant safety office of the PCO on a site-
specific basic, the following quantity-distance criteria apply, 
unless Appendix O to supart F of this part permits a lesser distance 
requirement; IBD and PTR--100 ft; aboveground IMD and ILD--50 ft; 
earth-covered IMD--No specified requirement.

     Appendix P to Subpart F of Part 184.--Hazard Division 1.1--Q/D     
                      Requirements for Airfields\1\                     
                                                                        
                  Net explosives weight (lb)                            
--------------------------------------------------------------- Distance
                        Over                          Not over    (ft)  
Col 1                                                    Col 2     Col 3
                                                                        
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0...................................................     \2\50    \3\110
50..................................................       100       140
100.................................................       200       175
200.................................................       300       200
300.................................................       400       220
400.................................................       500       240
500.................................................       600       255
600.................................................       700       265
700.................................................       800       280
800.................................................       900       290
900.................................................     1,000       300
1,000...............................................     1,500       345
1,500...............................................     2,000       380
2,000...............................................     3,000       435
3,000...............................................     4,000       480
4,000...............................................     5,000       515
5,000...............................................     6,000       545
6,000...............................................     7,000       575
7,000...............................................     8,000       600
8,000...............................................     9,000       625
9,000...............................................    10,000       645
10,000..............................................    15,000       740
15,000..............................................    20,000       815
20,000..............................................    25,000       875
25,000..............................................    30,000       935
30,000..............................................    35,000       980
35,000..............................................    40,000     1,025
40,000..............................................    45,000     1,070
45,000..............................................    50,000     1,105
50,000..............................................    55,000     1,140
55,000..............................................    60,000     1,175
60,000..............................................    65,000     1,205
65,000..............................................    70,000  \3\1,235
70,000..............................................    75,000     1,265
75,000..............................................    80,000     1,295
80,000..............................................    85,000     1,320
85,000..............................................    90,000     1,345
90,000..............................................    95,000     1,370
95,000..............................................   100,000     1,390
100,000.............................................   125,000     1,500
125,000.............................................   150,000     1,595
150,000.............................................   175,000     1,675
175,000.............................................   200,000     1,755
200,000.............................................   225,000     1,825
225,000.............................................   250,000     1,890
250,000.............................................   275,000     1,950
275,000.............................................   300,000     2,005
300,000.............................................   325,000     2,065
325,000.............................................   350,000     2,115
350,000.............................................   375,000     2,165
375,000.............................................   400,000     2,210
400,000.............................................   425,000     2,250
425,000.............................................   450,000     2,300
450,000.............................................   475,000     2,340
475,000.............................................   500,000     2,380
\1\To protect against low-angle, high-speed fragments, barricades should
  be provided; however, these distances will not be reduced.            
\2\The distance given for 0 to 50 pounds net explosives weight          
  constitutes the minimum spacing permitted.                            
\3\The minimum distance for Hazard Division 1.1 of 1,250 feet (see Sec. 
  184.52(f)) does not apply to targets covered by this table.           


   Appendix Q to Subpart F of Part 184.--Application of Ammunition and Explosives Safety Distances (Airfields,  
                                            Heliports, and Seadromes)                                           
                            [Table entries refer to the key at the end of the table]                            
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                     From                                       
                            ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Ammunition/      Ammunition/         Ready     
             To              Combat aircraft    Ammunition/       explosives       explosives       ammunition  
                               parking area      explosives        storage         operating         storage    
                                                 cargo area        facility         facility         facility   
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Combat Aircraft Parking      3a.............  3a.............  5..............  5..............  3a             
 Area.                                                                                                          
Ammunition/Explosives Cargo  3a.............  3a.............  3..............  3..............  3a             
 Area.                                                                                                          
Ammunition/Explosives        3..............  3..............  3..............  3..............  3              
 Storage Facility.                                                                                              
Ammunition/Explosives        4..............  4..............  4..............  4..............  4              
 Operating Facility.                                                                                            
Ready Ammunition Storage     3..............  3..............  3..............  3..............  3              
 Facility.                                                                                                      
Inhabited Building.........  1..............  1..............  1..............  1..............  1              
Public Traffic Route &       2..............  2..............  2..............  2..............  2              
 Taxiway (joint DoD-Non-DoD                                                                                     
 use).                                                                                                          
Runway (joint DoD-Non-DoD    1..............  1..............  1..............  1..............  1              
 use).                                                                                                          
Runway/Taxiway (DoD          None...........  None...........  11.............  2..............  None           
 Component use only).                                                                                           
Aircraft Parking Area......  10.............  10.............  6..............  6..............  10             
Aircraft Passenger Loading/  7..............  7..............  7..............  7..............  7              
 Unloading Area.                                                                                                
Recreation Area............  8..............  9..............  9..............  9..............  8              
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
KEY:                                                                                                            
1--Use appropriate inhabited building distance.                                                                 
2--Use appropriate public traffic route distance.                                                               
3--Use appropriate intermagazine distance.                                                                      
3a--Use appropriate intermagazine distance. Protects against simultaneous detonation of ammunition on adjacent  
  aircraft, but does not prevent serious damage to aircraft and possible propagation of detonation due to       
  fragments, debris, or fire.                                                                                   
4--Use appropriate intraline distance.                                                                          
5--Use Appendix P to Subpart F of this part distances for mass-detonating items and appropriate public traffic  
  route distances for nonmass-detonating items.                                                                 
6--Use Appendix P to Subpart F of this part distances for DoD Component aircraft parking areas, and appropriate 
  inhabited building distance for non-DoD Component aircraft parking areas.                                     
7--Use appropriate public traffic route distances for locations in the open where passengers enplane and        
  deplane; use appropriate inhabited building distance if a structure is included where passengers assemble,    
  such as a passenger terminal building.                                                                        
8--No distance required to recreational areas that are used exclusively for alert personnel manning the combat- 
  loaded aircraft. Other recreational areas where people are in the open shall be at appropriate public traffic 
  route distance. When structures, including bleacher stands, are a part of such area, appropriate inhabited    
  building distance shall be used.                                                                              
9--Recreational areas, where people are in the open, shall be at appropriate public traffic route distance. When
  structures, including bleacher stands are part of such area, appropriate inhabited building distance shall be 
  used.                                                                                                         
10--Within these areas of airfields, heliports, and seadromes exclusively used by DoD Components, the separation
  of aircraft parking areas from combat aircraft parking areas and their ready ammunition storage facilities and
  ammunition and explosives cargo areas are considered to be a command function. At joint DoD/non-DoD use       
  airfields, heliports, and seadromes, the combat aircraft parking areas and its ready ammunition storage       
  facilities and ammunition and explosives cargo area shall be separated from non-DoD aircraft as specified in  
  item 6., above.                                                                                               
11--Use 18W1/3 distances from side or rear of standard earth-cover magazine containing mass-detonating items to 
  taxiway; use appropriate public traffic route distance from side or rear of standard earth-covered magazine   
  containing nonmass-detonating items to taxiway; use appropriate public traffic route distance from front of   
  standard earth-covered magazines, and from any other storage location containing mass-detonating or nonmass-  
  detonating items to runway.                                                                                   


BILLING CODE 5000-04-M

TP16DE94.004

      

BILLING CODE 5000-04-C

Appendix S to Subpart F of Part 184.--Q/D Separations for Pier and Wharf
                               Facilities                               
                [See Appendix R to Subpart F of Part 184]               
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                             Distance in feet           
                                 ---------------------------------------
   Net explosives weight (lb)                Hazard Factor (k)          
                                 ---------------------------------------
                                      6        11        18        40   
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1,000...........................        60       110       180       400
10,000..........................       130       235       390       860
100,000.........................       280       510       835     1,855
250,000.........................       380       690     1,135     2,520
500,000.........................       475       875     1,430     3,175
600,000.........................       505       930     1,520     3,375
700,000.........................       535       975     1,600     3,550
800,000.........................       555     1,020     1,670     3,715
900,000.........................       580     1,065     1,740     3,860
1,000,000.......................       600     1,100     1,800     4,000
1,250,000.......................       645     1,185     1,940     4,310
1,500,000.......................       690     1,265     2,060     4,580
1,750,000.......................       725     1,325     2,170     4,820
2,000,000.......................       755     1,385     2,270     5,040
2,250,000.......................       785     1,440     2,360     5,240
2,500,000.......................       815     1,495     2,445     5,430
2,750,000.......................       840     1,540     2,520     5,605
3,000,000.......................       865     1,585     2,595     5,770
3,250,000.......................       890     1,630     2,665     5,925
3,500,000.......................       910     1,670     2,735     6,075
3,750,000.......................       930     1,705     2,795     6,215
4,000,000.......................       955     1,750     2,855     6,350
4,250,000.......................       970     1,780     2,915     6,480
4,500,000.......................       990     1,815     2,970     6,605
4,750,000.......................     1,010     1,850     3,025     6,725
5,000,000.......................     1,025     1,880     3,080     6,840
5,500,000.......................     1,060     1,950     3,175     7,060
6,000,000.......................     1,090     2,000     3,270     7,270
6,500,000.......................     1,120     2,055     3,360     7,465
7,000,000.......................     1,145     2,100     3,445     7,650
7,500,000.......................     1,175     2,155     3,525     7,830
8,000,000.......................     1,200     2,200     3,600     8,000
8,500,000.......................     1,225     2,245     3,675     8,165
9,000,000.......................     1,250     2,290     3,745     8,320
9,500,000.......................     1,270     2,330     3,815     8,470
10,000,000......................     1,290     2,365     3,880     8,620
11,000,000......................     1,330     2,440     4,005     8,895
12,000,000......................     1,375     2,520     4,120     9,160
13,000,000......................     1,410     2,585     4,230     9,405
14,000,000......................     1,445     2,655     4,340     9,640
15,000,000......................     1,480     2,715     4,440     9,865
------------------------------------------------------------------------

Subpart G--Liquid Propellant Requirements


Sec. 184.62  Application.

    (a) These criteria establish Q/D, storage compatibility groupings, 
and high explosives equivalencies for liquid propellants. They apply to 
liquid propellant storage facilities (including missiles, rockets, and 
multi-compartment tanks in which both liquid fuels and liquid oxidizers 
are stored).
    (b) If hazard classifications and storage compatibility groups for 
liquid propellants are not listed in Appendix A to Subpart G of this 
part, they may be obtained from the PCO.


Sec. 184.63  Determination of propellant quantity.

    (a) For Q/D purposes, the net weight of propellant in a tank, drum, 
cylinder, or other container shall be used. The quantity of propellant 
in associated piping (to the point(s) providing means for interrupting 
the flow in an incident) shall be included in the net weight of 
propellant in a storage container.
    (b) When incompatible propellants are not separated by distances 
prescribed in Appendix B to Subpart G of this part or provisions for 
preventing their mixing are not available, the combined quantity of the 
two shall be used with appropriate HE equivalency (Appendix C to 
Subpart G of this part) to determine the Q/D (Appendix D to Subpart G 
of this part).
    (c) Appendix E to Subpart G of this part lists conversion factors 
(gallons to pounds) for the various liquid propellants.


Sec. 184.64  Measurement of separation distances.

    (a) Separation distances shall be measured from the nearest hazard 
source (containers, buildings, or positive cutoff point in piping, 
whichever is controlling).
    (b) If a building contains a small number of drums or cylinders, or 
if quantities of propellant in the building are subdivided effectively, 
distances may be measured from the nearest container or controlling 
subdivision.


Sec. 184.65  Q/D considerations.

    (a) Q/D criteria in this section are based on these premises: 
construction materials shall be compatible with propellants to which 
they may be exposed; design shall take into account the properties of 
the propellant; required fire protection and drainage controls shall be 
provided; and other special controls (such as nitrogen padding, tank 
cooling, etc.) shall be provided when required.
    (b) If group I, II, and III propellants are contaminated, Appendix 
B to Subpart G of this part is not applicable. In such cases, group IV 
Q/D requirements shall apply except when the PCO specifically approves 
other criteria.


Sec. 184.66  Hazard grouping.

    Liquid propellants present various types and degrees of hazards. 
The following propellant groupings are based on these hazards.
    (a) Group I. Considered the least hazardous, these materials have a 
fire hazard potential and require separation distance as specified in 
Appendix B to Subpart G of this part. When group I materials are stored 
with more hazardous materials under conditions described in 
Sec. 184.67, Appendices C and D to Subpart G of this part, shall 
determine Q/D requirements.
    (b) Group II. Strong oxidizers, these materials may cause serious 
fires when they come into contact with material such as organic matter. 
Appendix B to Subpart G of this part specifies quantity limitations and 
minimum distance requirements. When group II materials are stored with 
more hazardous materials under conditions described in Sec. 184.67, 
Appendices C and D to Subpart G of this part shall determine Q/D 
requirements.
    (c) Group III. Hazardous fragmentation of the container, its 
protective structure, or other nearby material may be produced by 
pressure rupture of the storage container or a vapor-phase explosion. 
Appendix B to Subpart G of this part specifies quantity limitations and 
minimum distance requirements for this group. When group III materials 
are stored with more hazardous materials, under conditions described in 
Sec. 184.67, Appendices C and D to Subpart G of this part shall 
determine Q/D requirements.
    (d) Group IV. These hazards are the same as for mass-detonating 
explosives (such as air blast overpressure and fragments from the 
containers and surrounding equipment and material). Appendix D to 
Subpart G of this part shall determine Q/D requirements.


Sec. 184.67  Hazards.

    Aside from the fact that the propellants differ from each other, as 
explained for the above groups, the predominant hazard of the 
individual propellant varies according to the location of the 
propellant storage and the operation(s) involved. These conditions 
follow, in order of decreasing hazard:
    (a) Range launch pads. Activities at range launch pads include 
research, development, and testing. The proximity of fuel to oxidizer, 
the frequency of launchings and the possibility of fall-back (with 
resultant dynamic mixing on impact) make operations at these facilities 
very hazardous. Explosives equivalents (Appendix C to Subpart G of this 
part) shall be used to determine Q/D (Appendix D to Subpart G of this 
part).
    (b) Static test stands. Although these can involve experimental 
operations, the units remain static and are subject to better control 
than dynamic ones. Except when run tankages for fuel and oxidizer are 
mounted one above the other, it is possible to separate the tankages to 
reduce the hazard. Except as provided in Sec. 184.68, explosives 
equivalents (Appendix C to Subpart G of this part) shall be used to 
determine Q/D (Appendix D to Subpart G of this part).
    (c) Ready storage. Ready storage may be located at a minimum of 
intraline distance from launch and static test stands, based on the 
propellant requiring the greater distance. Normally, propellant from 
ready storage is not fed directly into an engine, as is the case with 
run tankage (see Sec. 184.67 (g)). HE equivalents (Appendix C to 
Subpart G of this part) shall be used for propellants in ready storage 
if the facility design does not guarantee against fuel and oxidizer 
mixing and against propagation to, or initiation at, the ready storage 
facility when a mishap occurs at the test stand or launch pad. If 
prevention of detonation of ready storage is assured, Q/D's shall be 
based on the prevailing fire or fragment hazards (Appendix B to Subpart 
G of this part).
    (d) Cold-flow test operations. Fire and fragment hazards (Appendix 
B to Subpart G of this part) govern if the system is closed (except for 
approved venting) and completely airtight; if fuel and oxidizer are 
never employed concurrently, each has an isolated system, and fittings 
are such that intermixing is impossible; and if the propellants are of 
required purity. Otherwise, HE equivalents (Appendix C to Subpart G of 
this part) shall be used to determine Q/D's (Appendix D to Subpart G of 
this part).
    (e) Bulk storage. This is the most remote storage with respect to 
launch and test operations, never being directly connected to any of 
them. It consists of the area, tanks, and other containers therein, 
used to hold propellant for supplying ready storage and, indirectly, 
run tankage where no ready storage is available. Individual bulk 
storage facilities shall be separated from each other and from 
unrelated exposures in accordance with Appendices B and D to Subpart G 
of this part. If positive measures are not taken to prevent mixing of 
group I, II and III fuels and oxidizers, TNT equivalents (Appendix C to 
Subpart G of this part) shall be used to determine Q/D's (Appendix D to 
Subpart G of this part).
    (f) Rest storage. This temporary storage resembles bulk storage. 
Barges, trailers, tank cars, and portable hold-tanks (used for topping 
operations) may be used as rest storage facilities. Fire and fragment 
hazards (Appendix B to Subpart G of this part) govern. The transporter 
becomes a part of that storage to which it is connected during 
propellant transfer.
    (g) Run tankage (operating tankage). Run tankage (operating 
tankage) consists of the tank and/or other containers and associated 
piping used to hold the propellants for direct feeding into the engine 
or device during operations (Sec. 184.67 (c)).
    (h) Pipelines. A distance of 25 feet free of inhabited buildings 
shall be maintained on either side of the pipelines used for the 
transfer of group II and III propellants between unloading points and 
storage areas or between storage areas and points of use.


Sec. 184.68  Incompatible storage.

    Except where effectively subdivided by intervening barriers or 
other positive means for preventing mixing, separation distance between 
propellants of different compatibility groups shall be the inhabited 
building distance for the propellant quantity and group that requires 
the greater distance. Where prevention of mixing is assured, 
incompatible storage shall be separated from each other by intragroup 
distance. If different hazard groups are involved, the group requiring 
the greater distance shall be controlling.


Sec. 184.69  Compatible storage.

    Compatible storage of propellants of different hazard groups, shall 
be separated from other exposures by the greater intragroup storage 
distance (see Appendix A to Subpart G of this part).

   Appendix A to Subpart G of Part 184--Liquid Propellants Hazard and   
                         Compatibility Groupings                        
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                       Hazard    Storage
                     Propellant                       group\1\  group\2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alcohols CH3OH, C2H5OH, (CH3)2CHOH..................  I         C       
Anhydrous Ammonia NH3...............................  I         C       
Aniline C6H5NH2.....................................  I         C       
Hydrocarbon Fuels JP-4, JP-5, RP-1..................  I         C       
Monopropellant NOS-58-6.............................  I         C       
Nitrogen Tetroxide N2O4.............................  I         A       
Otto Fuel II........................................  I         G       
Red Fuming Nitric Acid HNO3.........................  I         A       
Bromine Pentafluoride BrF5..........................  II        A       
Chlorine Trifluoride CIF3...........................  II        A       
Hydrogen Peroxide Greater than 52% H2O2.............  II3       A       
Liquid Fluorine LF2.................................  II        A       
Liquid Oxygen LO2...................................  II        A       
Perchloryl Fluoride CLO3 F..........................  II        A       
Oxygen Difluoride OF2...............................  II        A       
Ozone Difluoride O3F3...............................  II        A       
Ethylene Oxide C2H4 O...............................  III       D       
Hydrazine N2H4......................................  III       C       
Hydrazine-UDMH Mixtures.............................  III       C       
Liquid Hydrogen LH2.................................  III       C       
Mixed Amine Fuels...................................  III       C       
Monomethylhydrazine CH3NHNH2........................  III       C       
Pentaborane B5H9....................................  III       D       
Triethyl Boron B (C2H5)3............................  I         D       
UDMH (CH3) NNH2.....................................  III       C       
Nitromethane CH3 NO2................................  IV5       F4      
Tetranitromethane C(NO2)4...........................  IV        F       
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\For some of the materials listed, the toxic hazard may be an         
  overriding consideration. Consult applicable regulations and, if      
  necessary, other authorities or publications for determination of     
  toxic siting criteria.                                                
\2\All propellants in a compatibility group are considered compatible.  
  Groupings are not to be confused with ammunition and explosives       
  compatibility groupings with like letters.                            
\3\Under certain conditions, this propellant can detonate. However, its 
  sensitivity to detonation is not greater than that of a standard      
  energetic double base solid propellant under the same conditions.     
\4\Nitromethane is chemically compatible with compatibility storage     
  group C liquid propellants, but due to differences in hazards should  
  be stored separately.                                                 
\5\Technical grade nitromethane in unit quantities of 55 gallons or less
  in DOT 17E or C drums may be stored as Hazard Group II provided the   
  following apply:                                                      
a. Drums are stored only one tier high.                                 
b. Drums are protected from direct rays of sun.                         
c. Maximum storage life of 2 years, unless storage life tests indicate  
  product continues to meet purchase specification. Such tests are to be
  repeated at 1 year intervals thereafter.                              


                                         Appendix B to Subpart G of Part 184.--Quantity/Distance for Propellants                                        
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                Pounds of propellant                        Hazard group I              Hazard group II                    Hazard group III             
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                                IBD, PTR, & incompatible                
                                                       IBD, PTR, &   Intra-group   IBD, PTR, &   Intra-group            group III            Intra-group
                 Over                     Not over    incompatible   (ILD)\1\ &   incompatible   (ILD)\1\ &  ------------------------------  (ILD)\1\ & 
                                                       group I\4\    group I\5\    group II\6\   group II\7\                  Protected\8\      group   
                                                                                                              Unprotected\9\      \10\         III\11\  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.....................................        \2\100            30            25            60            30            600             80            30
100...................................        \2\200            35            30            75            35            600            100            35
200...................................        \2\300            40            35            85            40            600            110            40
300...................................        \2\400            45            35            90            45            600            120            45
400...................................        \2\500            50            40           100            50            600            130            50
500...................................           600            50            40           100            50            600            135            50
600...................................           700            55            40           105            55            600            140            55
700...................................           800            55            45           110            55            600            145            55
800...................................           900            60            45           115            60            600            150            60
900...................................         1,000            60            45           120            60            600            150            60
1,000.................................         2,000            65            50           130            65            600            175            65
2,000.................................         3,000            70            55           145            70            600            190            70
3,000.................................         4,000            75            55           150            75            600            200            75
4,000.................................         5,000            80            60           160            80            600            210            80
5,000.................................         6,000            80            60           165            80            600            220            80
6,000.................................         7,000            85            65           170            85            600            225            85
7,000.................................         8,000            85            65           175            85            600            230            85
8,000.................................         9,000            90            70           175            90            600            235            90
9,000.................................        10,000            90            70           180            90            600            240            90
10,000................................        15,000            95            75           195            95          1,200            260            95
15,000................................        20,000           100            80           205           100          1,200            275           100
20,000................................        25,000           105            80           215           105          1,200            285           105
25,000................................        30,000           110            85           220           110          1,200            295           110
30,000................................        35,000           110            85           225           110          1,200            300           110
35,000................................        40,000           115            85           230           115          1,200            310           115
40,000................................        45,000           120            90           235           120          1,200            315           120
45,000................................        50,000           120            90           240           120          1,200            320           120
50,000................................        60,000           125            95           250           125          1,200            320           125
60,000................................        70,000           130            95           255           130          1,200            340           130
70,000................................        80,000           130           100           260           130          1,200            350           130
80,000................................        90,000           135           100           265           135          1,200            360           135
90,000................................       100,000           135           105           270           135          1,200            365           135
100,000...............................       125,000           140           110           285           140          1,800            380           140
125,000...............................       150,000           145           110           295           145          1,800            395           145
150,000...............................       175,000           150           115           305           150          1,800            405           150
175,000...............................       200,000           155           115           310           155          1,800            415           155
200,000...............................       250,000           160           120           320           160          1,800            425           160
250,000...............................       300,000           165           125           330           165          1,800            440           165
300,000...............................       350,000           170           130           340           170          1,800            455           170
350,000...............................       400,000           175           130           350           175          1,800            465           175
400,000...............................       450,000           180           135           355           180          1,800            475           180
450,000...............................       500,000           180           135           360           180          1,800            485           180
500,000...............................       600,000           185           140           375           185          1,800            500           185
600,000...............................       700,000           190           145           385           190          1,800            515           190
700,000...............................       800,000           195           150           395           195          1,800            530           195
800,000...............................       900,000           200           150           405           200          1,800            540           200
900,000...............................     1,000,000           205           155           410           205          1,800            550           205
1,000,000\3\..........................     2,000,000           235           175           470           235          1,800            630           235
2,000,000.............................     3,000,000           255           190           505           255          1,800            675           255
3,000,000.............................     4,000,000           265           200           535           265          1,800            710           265
4,000,000.............................     5,000,000           275           210           555           275          1,800            740           275
5,000,000.............................     6,000,000           285           215           570           285          1,800            760           285
6,000,000.............................     7,000,000           295           220           585           295          1,800            780           295
7,000,000.............................     8,000,000           300           225           600           300          1,800            800           300
8,000,000.............................     9,000,000           305           230           610           305          1,800            815           305
9,000,000.............................    10,000,000           310           235           620           310          1,800            830           310
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\See Sec. 184.68 and Sec. 184.69.                                                                                                                     
\2\A single standard minimum size shipping container such as one 55-gallon drum, one 500-pound (net weight) cylinder, and so forth, may be handled or   
  stored without regard to distances prescribed.                                                                                                        
\3\Extrapolations above 1,000,000 lbs extend well outside data included in the Bureau of Mines report from which original Q/D tables were derived;      
  however, they are supported by independent calculations and knowledge of like phenomena.                                                              
\4\Values are one-half of the Group II inhabited building distance.                                                                                     
\5\Values are three-fourths the Group II and Group III intragroup distances.                                                                            
\6\Distances were selected as three-fourths the Group III inhabited building distance and considered reasonable due to the lesser hazard.               
\7\Distances were derived from the Bureau of Mines, Department of the Interior Report No. 5707, dated 1961, modified and expanded. They average 37.5    
  percent of the inhabited building distances given in this report.                                                                                     
\8\The term ``protected'' means that protection from fragments is provided by terrain, effective barricades, nets, or other physical means.             
\9\Distances are necessary to provide reasonable protection from fragments of tanks or equipment that are expected to be thrown in event of a vapor     
  phase explosion.                                                                                                                                      
\10\Distances are the recommended inhabited building distances given in the Bureau of Mines, Department of the Interior Report No. 5707, dated 1961, and
  extrapolation thereof (2 cal/cm\2\ on 1 percent water vapor curve).                                                                                   
\11\Distances are an average of 37.5 percent of ``protected'' column.                                                                                   


    Appendix C to Subpart G of Part 184--Liquid Propellant Explosive    
                               Equivalents                              
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Propellant combinations     Static test stands         Range launch     
------------------------------------------------------------------------
LO2LH2 or B5H9+an        60%....................  60%.                  
 oxidizer.                                                              
LO2LH2+LO2/RP-1........  Sum of (60% for          Sum of (60% for       
                          LO2LH2)+(10% for         LO2LH2)+(20% for LO2/
                          LOs2sRP-1).              RP-1).               
LO2RP-1 or LO2NH3 or     10%....................  20% up to 500,000     
 B5H9+a fuel.                                      pounds plus 10% over 
                                                   500,000 pounds.      
IRFNA/Aniline (Note 1).  10%....................  10%.                  
IRFNA/UDMH (Note 1)....  10%....................  10%.                  
IRFNA/UDMH+JP-4 (Note    10%....................  10%.                  
 1).                                                                    
N2O4/UDMH+N2H4 (Note 1)  5%.....................  10%.                  
N2O4/UDMH+N2H4 (Note     5% plus the explosive    10% plus the explosive
 1)+solid propellants.    equivalent of the        equivalent of the    
                          solid propellants.       solid propellant.    
Tetranitromethane        100%...................  100%.                 
 (alone or in                                                           
 combination).                                                          
Nitromethane (alone or   100%...................  100%.                 
 in combination).                                                       
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:                                                                  
1.These are hypergolic combinations.                                    
2.The percentage factors given in the table are to be used to determine 
  equivalencies of propellant mixtures at static test stands and range  
  launch pads when such propellants are located aboveground and are     
  unconfined except for their tankage. Other configurations shall be    
  considered on an individual basis to determine equivalencies.         
3.The explosives equivalent weight calculated by the use of this table  
  shall be added to any non-nuclear explosive weight aboard before      
  distances can be determined from Appendices B and C to Subpart F of   
  this part.                                                            
4.These equivalencies apply also for the following substitutions:       
a.Alcohols or other hydrocarbons for RP-1.                              
b.BrF5, CIF3, F2, H2, H2O2, OF2, or O2F2 for LO2.                       
c.MMH for N2H4 or UDMH.                                                 
d.C2H4O for any propellant.                                             
e.NH3 for any fuel resulting in a hypergolic combination.               
5.Use LO2/RP-1 distance for pentaborane plus a fuel and LO2/LH2         
  distances for pentaborane plus an oxidizer.                           
6.For quantities of propellant up to but not over the equivalent of 100 
  pounds of explosives, the distance shall be determined on an          
  individual basis by the PCO. All personnel and facilities, whether    
  involved in the operation or not, shall be protected by operating     
  procedures, equipment design, shielding, barricading, or other        
  suitable means.                                                       
7.Distance less than intraline area not specified. Where a number of    
  prepackaged liquid propellant units are stored together, separation   
  distance to other storage facilities shall be determined on an        
  individual basis by the PCO, taking into consideration normal hazard  
  classification procedures.                                            


    Appendix D to Subpart G of Part 184.--Distances for Separation of   
   Propellant Static Testing, Launching, and Storage Sites From Other   
                               Facilities                               
                                                                        
                             Distance in feet from propellant explosive 
                                               hazard                   
     Maximum weight of     ---------------------------------------------
  explosives or group IV                  To            Intraline       
   propellant in pounds         To      public -------------------------
                            inhabited  traffic                          
                            buildings   routes  Barricaded  Unbarricaded
Col 1                          Col 2     Col 3     Col 4        Col 5   
                                                                        
------------------------------------------------------------------------
100.......................       190       115        40           80   
200.......................       235       140        50          100   
300.......................       270       160        60          120   
400.......................       295       175        65          130   
500.......................       320       190        70          140   
600.......................       340       205        75          150   
700.......................       355       215        80          160   
800.......................       375       225        85          170   
900.......................       390       235        90          180   
1,000.....................       400       240        95          190   
1,500.....................       460       275       105          210   
2,000.....................       505       305       115          230   
3,000.....................       580       350       130          260   
4,000.....................       635       380       140          280   
5,000.....................       685       410       150          300   
6,000.....................       730       440       160          320   
7,000.....................       770       460       170          340   
8,000.....................       800       480       180          360   
9,000.....................       835       500       190          380   
10,000....................       865       520       200          400   
15,000....................       990       595       225          450   
20,000....................     1,090       655       245          490   
25,000....................     1,170       700       265          530   
30,000....................     1,245       745       280          560   
35,000....................     1,310       785       295          590   
40,000....................     1,370       820       310          620   
45,000....................     1,425       855       320          640   
50,000....................     1,475       885       330          660   
55,000....................     1,520       910       340          680   
60,000....................     1,565       940       350          700   
65,000....................     1,610       965       360          720   
70,000....................     1,650       990       370          740   
75,000....................     1,685     1,010       385          770   
80,000....................     1,725     1,035       390          780   
85,000....................     1,760     1,055       395          790   
90,000....................     1,795     1,075       400          800   
95,000....................     1,825     1,095       410          820   
100,000...................     1,855     1,115       415          830   
125,000...................     2,115     1,270       450          900   
150,000...................     2,350     1,410       475          950   
175,000...................     2,565     1,540       500        1,000   
200,000...................     2,770     1,660       525        1,050   
225,000...................     2,965     1,780       550        1,100   
250,000...................     3,150     1,890       575        1,150   
275,000...................     3,250     1,950       585        1,170   
300,000...................     3,345     2,005       600        1,200   
325,000...................     3,440     2,065       620        1,240   
350,000...................     3,525     2,115       635        1,270   
375,000...................     3,605     2,165       650        1,300   
400,000...................     3,685     2,210       665        1,330   
500,000...................     3,970     2,380       715        1,430   
600,000...................     4,215     2,530       780        1,560   
700,000...................     4,440     2,665       825        1,650   
800,000...................     4,640     2,785       860        1,720   
900,000...................     4,825     2,895       895        1,790   
1,000,000.................     5,000     3,000       925        1,850   
1,500,000.................     5,725     3,435     1,060        2,120   
2,000,000.................     6,300     3,780     1,170        2,340   
2,500,000.................     6,785     4,070     1,260        2,520   
3,000,000.................     7,210     4,325     1,340        2,680   
3,500,000.................     7,590     4,555     1,405        2,810   
4,000,000.................     7,935     4,760     1,470        2,940   
5,000,000.................     8,550     5,130     1,585        3,170   


 Appendix E to Subpart G of Part 184--Factors To Be Used When Converting
                    Gallons of Propellant Into Pounds                   
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                    Pounds        At    
                       Item                           per    temperature
                                                    gallon       deg.F  
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Anhydrous ammonia................................      5.1          68  
Aniline..........................................      8.5          68  
Bromine pentafluoride............................     20.7          68  
Chlorine trifluoride.............................     15.3          68  
Ethyl alcohol....................................      6.6          68  
Ethylene oxide...................................      7.3          68  
Fluorine (liquid)................................     12.6        -306  
Furfuryl alcohol.................................      9.4          68  
Hydrocarbon fuel JP-4............................      6.35         60  
Hydrocarbon fuel JP-5............................      6.84         60  
Hydrogen peroxide (90 percent)...................     11.6          68  
Hydrazine........................................      8.4          68  
Isopropyl alcohol................................      6.6          68  
Liquid hydrogen..................................      0.59       -423  
Liquid oxygen....................................      9.5        -297  
Methyl alcohol...................................      6.6          68  
Mono methyl hydrazine............................      7.3          68  
Monopropellant NOS-58-6..........................      9.46         68  
Nitromethane.....................................      9.5          68  
Nitrogen tetroxide...............................     12.1          68  
Otto fuel........................................     10.5          77  
Oxygen difluoride................................     12.7        -229  
Ozone difluoride.................................     14.6        -297  
Pentaborane......................................      5.2          68  
Perchloryl fluoride..............................     12.0          68  
Red fuming nitric acid (IFFNA)...................     12.5          68  
RP-1.............................................      6.8          68  
Tetranitromethane................................     13.6          78  
Triethyl Boron B.................................      5.8          73  
UDMH.............................................      6.6          68  
UDMH/hydrazine...................................      7.5          68  
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: Conversion of quantities of propellant from gallons to pounds:    
  Pounds of propellant = gallons  x  density of propellant in pounds per
  gallon.                                                               

Subpart H--Manufacturing and Processing Pyrotechnics


Sec. 184.71   General.

    The safety precautions for manufacturing and processing 
pyrotechnics parallel those of many types of explosives and other 
energetic materials. Pyrotechnics, as a group, display many different 
characteristics because they are formulated for different purposes. 
Pyrotechnics can be divided into general categories, such as: 
Initiators (igniters); illuminants; smokes; gas generators; sound 
generators; heat producers; and timing compositions. Each has its own 
characteristics and attendant processing requirements. Knowledge of 
these characteristics is necessary to ensure safety in processing. The 
range of characteristics associated with pyrotechnics includes easily 
initiated compositions from those that burn in seconds at temperatures 
exceeding 2763  deg.C (5000  deg.F) through those that require 
substantial energy for initiation and have relatively low output 
temperatures. As examples, the auto-ignition temperature for smoke 
Compositions is typically about 180  deg.C while for illuminants it is 
about 500  deg.C; illuminants burn approximately 2.7 times faster than 
smokes and the heat of reaction is 1.5 times as great; infrared (IR) 
flare compositions are both hotter and faster-burning than illuminants. 
Many of the compositions in the ignitor or initiator class are as 
sensitive to static electricity, friction, or impact as are initiating 
explosives such as lead azide and lead styphnate. Initiation thresholds 
to such stimuli as impact, friction, and electrostatic discharge must 
be known for safety in specific processes. The response of the material 
in terms of energy release shall be considered in ensuring personnel 
safety. In addition to the safety precautions generally required for 
the handling of explosives and other energetic materials, the following 
paragraphs provide specific guidance pertinent to pyrotechnic 
operations.


Sec. 184.72   Machinery, equipment, and facilities.

    Except as provided for in this subpart, the design, layout, and 
operation of facilities and equipment shall follow the mandatory 
provisions for the processing of explosives and other energetic 
materials contained elsewhere in this part. Where guidance is not 
provided, operations should be governed by the results of hazard 
analyses performed and documented to address specific operations. Since 
most pyrotechnic compositions are sensitive to initiation by static 
electricity, bonding and grounding, along with other means of static 
elimination and control, have paramount importance.


Sec. 184.73   Weighing of raw materials.

    Separate weight or measurement rooms, cubicles, or areas (dependent 
upon the quantity and sensitivity of the materials handled) shall be 
provided--one for oxidizers and one for combustible materials and 
metallic powders. It is important that containers, equipment, hand 
tools, scale pans, etc., used for weighing processes are not mixed with 
those weighing or measuring oxidizers and fuels, particularly where 
distance rather than physical barriers separates these areas. Positive 
measures shall be adopted to ensure the complete separation of such 
equipment and tools. Personnel weighing or handling exposed oxidizers 
or fuels shall, at a minimum, wear flame retardant uniforms, cotton 
undergarments, cotton socks, and conductive shoes.


Sec. 184.74   Drying of materials.

    The minimum temperature necessary to meet processing requirements 
shall be used to dry components and pyrotechnic materials. Drying rooms 
or ovens shall meet the requirements of Sec. 184.169.


Sec. 184.75  Mixing and blending.

    Mixing and blending of pyrotechnic compositions commands attention 
because most injury-producing accidents have occurred during the 
mixing, blending, or subsequent cleanup operations. Because of the 
variety within and among these compositions, no single type of mixer or 
blender can be the exclusively approved equipment for pyrotechnic 
mixing and blending operations.
    (a) Each mixing device shall be considered separately with respect 
to the composition to be processed. When a history of safe operation 
has not been established, the type of mixer or blender and batch size 
should be evaluated by appropriate hazard analysis or tests. Generally, 
devices that use a tumbling action shall be preferred to those using 
rotating blades, to minimize points where frictional heat may develop 
or where accidentally introduced foreign material can create hot spots 
through friction or crushing of composition. Mixers and blenders shall 
be equipped for pressure relief, to preclude a transition from burning 
to detonation. Personnel exposures during charging and emptying of 
mixers shall be minimal. When the energetic characteristics and 
quantities of composition involved so dictate, mixers and blenders 
shall be charged, operated, and emptied remotely. When hazard analysis 
or testing has shown this to be safe, mixers or blenders may be charged 
or emptied manually. Appropriate interlocks, clutch brakes, and similar 
devices shall be used to preclude personnel exposure during mixer or 
blender operation, and to preclude the movement of mixer or blender 
parts during periods when operators are present.
    (b) Mixing and blending operations shall be conducted in buildings 
or cubicles designed for such purposes. Multiple mixing or blending 
operations may be conducted in the same building, provided that each 
blender or mixer is located in a separate room, bay, or cell, and 
separated from other operations by substantial dividing walls. Two or 
more mixers or blenders may be located in the same cubicle, provided 
that the hazards are not increased by such installation. Normally, this 
would require that the materials in process be of significantly low 
energy content or slow energy release and the mixers be charged and 
emptied simultaneously. At least one wall or equivalent panel area in 
each bay shall be frangible so as to provide pressure relief in the 
event of an incident. Cell arrangement and pressure relief areas shall 
be located so that personnel cannot pass in front of these areas while 
mixers or blenders are operating.
    (c) Exhaust ventilation equipment shall be installed on mixers or 
in bays where flammable solvents are used and interlocked with the 
mixers. The interlock shall be designed to preclude mixer operation 
without ventilation although operation of the ventilation system 
without the mixer is permitted. Vapor sensors should be used to give 
automatic warning of a build-up of flammable vapors to a level 
approaching that of the lower explosive limit. Such sensors should be 
interlocked to personnel access control devices. Ventilation system 
designs shall not permit propagation of an incident in one bay to 
others served by the same system.
    (d) The operation of mixers or blenders may be observed by remote 
means such as closed-circuit television, mirrors, or transparent shield 
providing operator protection. Direct viewing of blender or mixer 
operation without intervening barriers is prohibited.
    (e) Manual scraping during the mixing or blending process is 
prohibited. Manual mixing or blending of fuels and oxidizers is 
prohibited.
    (f) The following are the minimum criteria for rotating blade 
mixing operations:
    (1) The mix equipment shall be rigidly fixed and stable during 
mixing to preclude contact between the bowl and the mix blades.
    (2) Positive controls are provided to physically block or stop bowl 
or blender head movement in case of hydraulic malfunction to assure 
clearance at all times between mix bowl and blades.
    (3) Mix blades and shaft shall be rigid and structurally strong to 
ensure minimum flex from weight of the mix and speed of the shaft.
    (4) Any mixer electrical fixtures shall be explosion-proof rated, 
remotely located, or shrouded and pressurized with inert gas. Purged 
systems automatically cut off if pressure is lost.
    (5) Mix blade shaft should include adequate and compatible seals or 
packing glands to prevent migration of mix or solvent vapor into 
bearings. Submerged bearings and packing glands should be avoided. If 
used, they shall be periodically tested for contamination and cleaned.
    (6) A program shall be established whereby mix blade shaft and 
bearings are monitored and changed before becoming worn and allowing 
loose play in the blade shaft. Maintain a record of such checks, mixer 
blade adjustments, and any damage to the mixer blades and bowls.
    (7) Wet mixing shall not be started until adequate solvent is added 
to preclude dry mixing.
    (8) The operating procedures shall contain provisions to verify 
acceptable blade/bowl clearance, bowl and shaft rigidity, and bearing 
wear prior to introduction of materials.
    (9) Electrical service to propellant mixers shall be interlocked 
with fire protection system controls so that the mixer cannot start 
when the fire protection system is inoperative.


Sec. 184.76  Pressing, extruding, and pelleting.

    (a) Pressing operations shall be conducted with personnel protected 
by substantial dividing walls, barricades, or operational shields; or 
shall take place at intraline distance from the operator and other 
operations. When it is necessary to repair, adjust, or otherwise clear 
a jam on a press or extruder, the pyrotechnic material shall be removed 
from the hopper and the bay or press room before such repairs or 
adjustments are made. Only those adjustments of ram speed or conveyor 
speed routinely controlled by the operator may proceed with material in 
the bay. Under no circumstances shall repair or adjustment requiring 
the use of tools be permitted with pyrotechnic material in the bay.
    (b) The quantity of composition at the pressing location (behind 
the barricade) shall not exceed that required for the components 
undergoing the pressing operation. The quantity of composition in the 
remainder of the building at any one time shall not exceed the minimum 
required for a safe, efficient operation.
    (c) Each individual press, extruder, or loading device shall be 
located in a separate building, room, or cubicle, and be designed to 
limit an incident to that area and protect operators. Multiple 
installations may be permitted within a bay or cubicle, provided that 
tests or hazard analysis demonstrate that facility and personnel 
hazards are not increased. Adequate means of pressure relief shall be 
built into each bay or cubicle.


Sec. 184.77  Assembly operations.

    Individual assembly operations shall be adequately separated from 
each other, and shall be located in a separate cubicle or building from 
mixing, blending, and consolidation operations. Pyrotechnic composition 
shall be kept in closed or covered containers at all times except 
during processing. Surge, storage, and in-process transit between 
operations shall also be accomplished with closed containers whenever 
not absolutely prohibited by the operational configuration. Components 
in any assembly room, bay, or building, shall be limited to the 
smallest quantity necessary for safe and efficient operations.


Sec. 184.78  Granulation, grinding, and screening.

    (a) Material to be reduced in particle size shall be processed over 
a mechanical or magnetic separator to remove foreign materials before 
grinding. Following grinding, the material should be re-screened or 
passed over a magnetic separator.
    (b) In the operation of ball mills, hammer mills, granulators, or 
screeners, the operator shall be protected from the effects of a 
potential incident by substantial dividing walls or operational 
shields. Every effort shall be made to fill and discharge grinding, 
granulating, and screening equipment remotely. Cleaning of such devices 
shall also afford maximal operator protection.
    (c) Working surfaces, containers, and hand tools shall be 
appropriately bonded and grounded.


Sec. 184.79  Transportation.

    Pyrotechnic compositions shall be moved in closed containers only. 
Individual containers and the transport vehicle (hand cart, hand truck, 
etc.) should be fabricated of the lightest materials compatible with 
the composition and having the requisite strength. This shall minimize 
fragment generation if an incident should occur. Transport vehicles 
should be equipped with ``dead man'' brakes. On- and off-loading of 
transport vehicles should be conducted only in weather-protected areas 
designated for this purpose. Racks or other support, suited to the size 
and shape of composition containers, should be provided to prevent them 
from falling.


Sec. 184.80  Rebowling.

    Rebowling operations transfer materials, typically sensitive and in 
small quantities, from one container to another. They may be done to 
recover remains of small quantities of materials, or to subdivide large 
masses for processing. Operational shields shall be provided to protect 
operators.


Sec. 184.81  Machining of pyrotechnic material.

    (a) Machining of pyrotechnic materials shall be accomplished 
remotely.
    (b) General requirements. (1) When required, coolant shall be 
compatible with the pyrotechnic composition. Positive automatic 
interlocking devices shall ensure that the machine cannot be started 
until the coolant is flowing. These controls shall also be capable of 
stopping the machine should the flow of coolant be interrupted. When it 
is essential to cut off the coolant to adjust machine tools, it shall 
be restored, and all automatic controls operating, before machining 
resumes. If a cutting edge overheats during machining, it is most 
dangerous when continuous contact with the pyrotechnic material is 
maintained after the machine has stopped. It is, therefore, essential 
that coolant continue flowing until the cutter is removed from contact 
with the pyrotechnic material.
    (2) Sensors are recommended to detect tooling malfunctions or other 
potentially hazardous conditions. Machine tool power-consumption 
monitors, tool force gages, sound or noise detectors, temperature-
indicating devices, or IR detectors can be used in this regard.
    (3) Cutting tools shall be chemically compatible with the 
pyrotechnic material to be machined, capable of maintaining a sharp 
cutting edge throughout the machine cycle.
    (4) Control measures such as guides, bushings, and stops shall 
limit depth, diameter, and contour of the cut. The lineal and 
rotational speed of tools for the machining of pyrotechnic material 
shall be the minimum necessary for safe and efficient operation. 
Controls should be designed to prevent unintended operator adjustment.
    (5) Drilling operations shall not impede the flow of chips and 
coolant in the bore. The drilling of small holes (one-quarter inch or 
less) and any size of multiple drilling operation shall be performed by 
remote control, with operator protection, unless documented hazard 
analysis or tests prove this unnecessary.
    (6) Contoured cutting tools shall be removed from contact with the 
pyrotechnic material being machined before personnel are permitted to 
enter the machining area. Frequently cleaning machine tools during 
operating hours shall prevent residues from accumulating; a thorough 
cleaning shall conclude each work shift. Vacuum accumulator systems, 
immersion in liquid coolant streams, or similar automatic means shall 
remove the pyrotechnic waste products. Only low pressure (10 PSIG) 
compressed air may be used as a coolant and only when the scattering of 
pyrotechnic particles is contained by a vacuum collection system. The 
coolant delivery tube shall have a metallic tip or nozzle grounded to 
the machine to reduce static charges.
    (c) Specific guidance for machining. (1) Drilling and facing 
operations for colored smoke compositions containing organic dyes, 
potassium chlorates, and sugars should be conducted at not more than 
2475 lineal inches per minute, with the feed rate adjusted to enhance 
the machinability of the composition. For red phosphorous compositions, 
drilling and facing operations should be conducted at not more than 
1100 lineal inches per minute with the feed adjusted to minimize 
friction and heat buildup. For extruded candles composed of magnesium, 
tetrafluoroethylene polymers, and fluoroelastomer binders, drilling and 
machining operations shall be conducted at not more than 530 lineal 
inches per minute.
    (2) Hand trimming and cutting of pyrotechnic candles may be 
permitted when supported by results of a hazard analysis specific to 
that composition and candle configuration.
    (3) Sawing operations require particular care, to prevent work from 
plunging into the saw blade and to ensure that chips are removed from 
sawteeth before their next cutting pass. Plunging can occur when thin 
sections are force-fed into coarse-pitch saw blades. To prevent this, a 
minimum of two saw teeth shall remain in contact with the work during 
sawing, or the work feed shall be controlled. Chip accumulation in the 
saw teeth is a function of the material being sawed, rate of feed, 
blade speed, tooth design, and flushing arrangement. Additional chip 
removal equipment such as blade-wiping brushes may be required.


Sec. 184.82  Spill control.

    Spills of pyrotechnic composition and energetic ingredients pose 
potential hazards. In case of accident, the responsible supervisor 
should be notified before any action to clean or contain the spill. 
Standard operating procedures (SOPs) for pyrotechnic operations shall 
cover spill cleanup, either as part of the various operations detailed 
or as a separate procedure. The procedures shall specify which actions 
are to be taken by whom and in what order. The recovery of the spilled 
material and decontamination of the area shall also be addressed.


Sec. 184.83  Collection of pyrotechnic wastes.

    (a) Waste material and scraps shall be removed at regular intervals 
from all operating areas. All waste material shall be segregated by 
type and compatibility, and kept separate from common wastes. 
Containers for these materials shall be distinguished by color and 
labeled. Filled containers shall be placed at designated collection 
points.
    (b) Special care shall preclude the mixing of small quantities of 
water with powdered or finely granulated metals. Pyrotechnic waste may 
be maintained dry or submerged in water or oil, whichever is 
appropriate for disposal. Plastic liners for waste containers 
facilitate cleaning. Liners should be conductive when contents are 
subject to initiation by static electrical discharge.


Sec. 184.84  Cleaning of pyrotechnic processing equipment.

    (a) As pyrotechnic materials are sensitive to friction, impact, or 
static discharge, cleaning this equipment poses hazards. Because 
personnel shall be near the equipment being cleaned, risks may exceed 
those of processing. Therefore, cleaning shall receive the same 
planning and SOP coverage as production.
    (b) Solvent solution flushing and cleaning by remote control is 
required for slurry-type mixing operations. For other applications, the 
process equipment shall be flushed with a compatible solvent and 
drained, with the process repeated as often as necessary to remove the 
pyrotechnic composition. High-pressure water wash may be used when 
compatible with the pyrotechnic composition. Precautionary measures 
shall be taken when a solvent represents a fire or toxicological 
threat. Runoff from cleaning operations shall be controlled to preclude 
the creation of a secondary hazard from the spread of contamination.
    (c) When remote cleaning cannot be used, personal protective 
equipment shall be designed and proven by test to afford operator 
protection from the maximum quantity of material that could be present, 
and its use shall be required.


Sec. 184.85  Personal protective equipment.

    (a) Personal protective equipment shall not be relied upon as the 
primary means of operator protection. The primary means should be by 
reducing the quantities being handled to the minimum necessary or by 
using operational shields. Supplemental operator protection should be 
afforded by high-speed deluge systems designed and installed for such 
purposes. The personal protective apparel prescribed in an SOP shall be 
based upon the hazards associated with the operation.
    (b) The minimum protective apparel for personnel exposed to open 
containers of pyrotechnic or energetic raw materials shall consist of 
the following:
    (1) Cotton undergarments and socks.
    (2) Conductive-soled safety shoes.
    (3) Flame retardant coveralls.
    (4) Hair coverings.
    (c) All employees exposed to hazardous quantities of pyrotechnic 
compositions shall wear the additional items described in Sec. 184.85 
(c)(1) through (c)(3), or their equivalent. The definition of hazardous 
quantities will depend on the composition's energy output and 
sensitivity (as determined by hazard analysis or tests) and the nature 
of the operation. Required levels of protective apparel shall be 
specified in appropriate SOP steps.
    (1) Aluminized, thermally protective suit with hood and face plate.
    (2) Aluminized, thermally protective trousers.
    (3) Aluminized, thermally protective gloves or equivalent.
    (d) When the items described above are required, the design and 
wearing shall ensure that no areas of the body are exposed. Appropriate 
seals or joints shall be used to preclude flame intrusion where apparel 
items overlap or are joined. Particular attention shall be given to 
possible gaps in coverage provided by the hood in order to prevent 
flame or hot gas impingement on the face, head, or neck.


Sec. 184.86  Additional controls.

    (a) Many materials used to produce pyrotechnics are toxic, 
represent fire hazards, or both. Operations shall provide protection 
from these threats. Vapor-and dust-removal and collection systems shall 
be provided where toxic or flammable dusts or gases are generated. 
Design and installation of such equipment shall meet safety 
requirements.
    (b) Blankets should be provided in easily opened containers within 
25 feet of operations where they could be required for wrapping burned 
employees. Alternate means of achieving the same effect should be 
provided when blankets are not.
    (c) When required, conductive shoes shall be checked for 
conductivity daily before the beginning of work, and retested upon 
reentry into the building if the employee has walked over surfaces 
(grass, mud, oil, paint, etc.) which could render the shoes 
ineffective. A log of the testing shall be maintained.


Sec. 184.87  Reworking pyrotechnic components.

    (a) All repair, reassembly, or similar operations on loaded 
pyrotechnic compositions shall take place in a separate bay used only 
for that purpose.
    (b) Consolidated or extruded pyrotechnic compositions shall 
normally be destroyed, not pulverized for reblending. While HC smoke 
and such compositions are reusable, more sensitive materials, such as 
IR flare compositions, are not.


Sec. 184.88  Fire protection.

    When compatible with process materials, deluge systems may be used 
for the protection of mixing and blending operations, screening, 
granulation, drying, and pressing or extrusion operations. The response 
time of the deluge system should be selected to minimize the damage to 
process equipment and facilities. Hazard analysis of the operation may 
dictate other applications.

Subpart I--Storage of Explosives and Ammunition


Sec. 184.90  General.

    A properly sited segregated and separate storage area is preferred 
for explosives storage. Earth-covered magazines (igloo or other 
subsurface) offer the greatest protection to explosives. Such magazines 
are preferred for the storage of all explosives. Earth-covered 
magazines provide protection from weather and fire, and relatively 
constant temperature control.


Sec. 184.91  Storage considerations.

    Factors to consider when designating a structure for explosive 
storage are:
    (a) Magazine construction and location.
    (b) Quantity and characteristics of explosives to be stored.


Sec. 184.92  Magazine operational regulations.

    (a) No loose ammunition components, packing materials, conveyors, 
skids, dunnage, empty boxes, or other such items shall be stored in 
magazines containing ammunition or explosives.
    (b) No crew shall work in a spot that requires passing a second 
crew's work aisle or position to reach an exit in a magazine. The 
number of crews should not exceed the number of exits. Doors shall 
remain unlocked and permit rapid egress.
    (c) Flammable liquids, except when used as the chemical filler of 
ammunition, or as a prepackaged storable liquid propellant, shall not 
be stored in magazines containing explosives.


Sec. 184.93  Stacking.

    (a) Ammunition and explosives should be stored in original shipping 
containers or equivalent. Explosives or ammunition in stacks should be 
grouped and identified according to lots. General rules set forth in 
Sec. 184.93 (b) and (c), shall be followed in the absence of applicable 
storage drawings.
    (b) Methods used for stacking shall provide for good ventilation to 
all parts of the stack. Adequate dunnage shall be used for this 
purpose.
    (c) Aisles shall be maintained so that units in each stack may be 
inspected, inventoried, and removed for shipment or surveillance tests. 
Block storage is permitted, provided adequate ventilation of stacks 
exists. Unobstructed aisles shall be maintained to permit rapid egress.
    (d) Only one light box, pallet, or unit should be allowed per lot 
in storage. Stacked light units should be readily visible and 
immediately accessible.


Sec. 184.94  Loose rounds, damaged containers.

    Loose rounds of ammunition, or single fiber containers with rounds 
therein, shall not be stored in magazines containing ammunition items 
packed in original shipping containers; however, they may be stored in 
magazines set aside for their exclusive storage. Incomplete boxes of 
ammunition and explosives may be stored in magazines containing 
complete boxes packed in original shipping containers. Conspicuously 
marked to identify contents and quantities, the incomplete boxes shall 
be placed in designated locations. Explosives and ammunition in damaged 
containers should not be stored in a magazine with ammunition in 
serviceable containers. Such containers should be repaired or the 
contents transferred to new or serviceable containers. Open containers 
and containers with covers not securely fastened shall not be allowed 
in magazines. Containers that have been opened shall be properly closed 
before being restored. Stored containers should be free from loose dust 
and grit.


Sec. 184.95  Repairs to magazines.

    (a) Repairs should not be made to the interiors of magazines 
containing bulk explosives. Repairs to roofs, ventilators, lightning 
rods, doors and other parts of, or appendages to, the exteriors of 
magazines containing bulk explosives shall not normally require 
removing the explosives. Minor repairs may be made to the interiors of 
magazines containing finished ammunition or ammunition components.
    (b) The general safety requirements set forth in this part, 
particularly the elimination of fire hazards, shall be followed when 
magazines are repaired. When necessary, baffles and screens should be 
used to confine sparks and flames to heating apparatus.


Sec. 184.96  Open storage (outdoors).

    Open storage of A&E is prohibited.


Sec. 184.97  Storage of bulk initiating explosives.

    Bulk initiating explosives shall not be stored dry nor exposed to 
the direct rays of the sun. Containers of ample size to hold the double 
bag of explosives are used for normal storage. Covers designed and 
constructed to prevent friction and pinch points should be used. Covers 
of shipping containers used for long-term storage shall be equipped 
with a port for observing the level of the liquid contents. The viewing 
port shall have a transparent plastic cover proven compatible with the 
initiating explosives being stored. Bulk initiating explosives may, for 
expediency, be stored in shipping containers without viewing ports, 
provided they are stored in magazines that will prevent freezing; with 
containers on end, only one tier high; with passageways for inspection 
and handling. Bags of initiating explosives in storage containers shall 
be under distilled water. Alcohol may be added to the distilled water 
to prevent freezing.


Sec. 184.98  Rockets and rocket motors.

    (a) In aboveground magazines, rockets and rocket motor items (in a 
propulsive state) should be pointed in the direction least exposing 
personnel and property in case of fire or explosion.
    (b) Rockets should be stored in dry, cool magazines, out of the 
direct rays of the sun. Prolonged exposure of rocket ammunition to 
either high or low temperatures may increase the normal rate of 
deterioration or render the motors more susceptible to ignition if 
handled improperly later.

Subpart J--Fire Protection


Sec. 184.100  General.

    This subpart provides general requirements for personnel developing 
and effecting fire protection and prevention programs in A&E 
environments.


Sec. 184.101  Fire plan.

    A written fire plan shall be prepared. Although details may vary, 
plans for all establishments shall itemize the emergency functions of 
each department or outside agency, indicating responsible individuals 
and alternates.


Sec. 184.102  Firefighting agreements.

    Voluntary and mutual agreements with nearby municipalities or 
industrial centers should include firefighting procedures as 
established by the plant officials. Plant officials are responsible for 
informing the assisting firefighters of particular procedures to be 
followed. Outside firefighters should not assist in fires involving 
A&E. If the practical need for their doing so can be anticipated, they 
shall receive advance instruction in A&E firefighting procedures. 
Outside firefighters shall never attack fires involving Hazard 
Divisions 1.1 and 1.2.


Sec. 184.103  Smoking.

    Smoking may take place only in safe, specifically designated and 
posted ``smoking locations.''
    (a) Cigarettes, tobacco, and matches shall be discarded in ash 
receptacles only. They shall not be dropped into trash cans.
    (b) Electric lighters with automatic pressure cutoffs shall be 
fixed, ensuring against removal.
    (c) At least one fire extinguisher shall be provided at smoking 
locations.
    (d) Persons wearing clothing contaminated with explosives or other 
dangerous material should not be permitted in smoking areas.


Sec. 184.104  Hot work permits.

    A written permit shall be required for the temporary use of heat-
producing equipment or devices when explosives or highly flammable 
materials are involved.


Sec. 184.105  Portable fire extinguishers.

    Hand extinguishers within buildings can squelch incipient fires 
before major damage is done. Portable equipment may provide similarly 
valuable outside aboveground magazines and other buildings with 
explosives.


Sec. 184.106  Hazards in fighting fires involving ammunition and 
explosives.

    A fire hazard identification system shall be adopted. This shall 
assess relative dangers, up to the most hazardous material stored.
    (a) The following fire symbol system is provided as a guide:
    (1) Fire divisions, numbered ``1'' through ``4,'' shall correspond 
to Hazard Divisions 1.1 through 1.4.
    (2) The lower the number, the greater the hazard:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
           Fire division                       Hazard involved          
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1..................................  Mass detonation.                   
2..................................  Explosion with fragment hazard.    
3..................................  Mass fire.                         
4..................................  Moderate fire.                     
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) Distinctively shaped placards, instantly recognizable from a 
distance, signify the different divisions. Each placard, or symbol, 
shows the fire division number:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                  Fire  
                            Shape                               division
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Octagon......................................................          1
Cross........................................................          2
Inverted triangle............................................          3
Diamond......................................................          4
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) Black numbers appear on orange backgrounds as used by NATO, 
UNO, IMO, and DOT. Relectorized or luminous symbols are preferred.
    (b) Firefighting procedures. (1) General
    (i) Fires should be immediately reported and may be fought without 
specific authorization. However, personnel should evacuate and seek 
safety if fires involve explosive materials or cannot be controlled by 
equipment at hand. Training of operational personnel shall cover the 
characteristics of explosive materials, including their reactions to 
heat and fire, as well as what to do in case of fire.
    (ii) Firefighters should be thoroughly informed of the specific 
reactions of A&E exposed to heat or fire.
    (iii) Firefighters should be briefed on conditions at the scene 
before proceeding.
    (iv) Ammunition contained both explosives and chemicals require 
special precautionary measures. See Subpart K of this part.
    (2) Specific. (i) Personnel shall not attempt to fight fires 
involving A&E in Hazard Divisions 1.1 and 1.2. Because this material 
detonates with a fragmentation hazard, personnel shall evacuate 
immediately, using protective cover and activating deluge systems and 
fire alarms while escaping. Individuals remain in danger until they 
reach shelters, although reaching inhabited building distances in the 
open affords some safety. During exit drills, employees shall be 
advised of the safest escape routes.
    (ii) If the fire in a Hazard Division 1.1 or 1.2 buildings involves 
nonexplosive material and is small or in a segregated container, an 
attempt may be made to extinguish the fire. After summoning 
firefighters, responsible parties should attempt to meet them as they 
approach to brief them. When 1.1 or 1.2 materials are directly 
involved, firefighting forces should maintain inhabited building 
distance from the fire. The safety of personnel fighting a 1.1 or 1.2 
fire depends on the accuracy of the information made available to all 
firefighting forces. No person shall reenter a burning building 
containing 1.1 or 1.2 materials.
    (iii) Personnel in the immediate vicinity of Hazard Division 1.3 
explosives should activate deluge systems and alarms. Unless the fire 
is minor, involves no explosive, and appears controllable, the 
firefighting organization shall confine its efforts to preventing it 
from spreading to other buildings. Fire in Hazard Division 1.3 
materials creates a wide area of intense radiant heat, dangerous to 
personnel and equipment. The firefighting organization should exercise 
extreme caution.
    (iv) Hazard Division 1.4 A&E present a moderate fire hazard. Fires 
involving them shall be fought until extinguished.


Sec. 184.107  Automatic sprinkler systems.

    Properly installed and maintained automatic sprinklers reduce fire 
losses. They are particularly useful for load lines; explosives 
manufacturing; receiving, shipping, inspection, and ammunition 
workshops; and demilitarization.


Sec. 184.108  Clearance under sprinklers.

    At least 18 inches shall separate sprinkler deflectors from store 
materials piled 15 feet high or less; in all other cases, the clearance 
shall be at least 36 inches. A minimum clearance of 36 inches shall be 
maintained between sprinklers and extremely hazardous materials, and 
between sprinklers and baled storage, regardless of height.


Sec. 184.109  Deluge systems.

    (a) Deluge systems should supplement sprinklers when the hazards 
are high, as in powder hoppers and cutters. Rate of rise, light-
actuating, ultraviolet, or other quick-action devices for automatic 
control of deluge systems are recommended. Quick-acting manual controls 
should serve as backup.
    (b) To ensure immediate drenching of all parts of the machine, the 
distribution outlets (nozzles, sprays, heads, etc.) should be as near 
the explosive's exposed surface as permitted by the outlet discharge 
pattern. When explosives are under tight hoods or covers inside 
machines, distributing outlets belong inside the enclosed space.
    (c) Nonmetallic, internally spring-held caps should protect outlets 
exposed to explosive vapors, gases, or dust. Upon exertion of pressure 
within the outlet, the cap shall pop immediately. Caps should be 
attached to outlets to prevent their dropping into equipment during a 
deluge.
    (d) Required water flow and pressure should be determined for the 
hazard.
    (e) Periodic inspections of deluge systems shall ensure that they 
are in proper operating condition.
    (f) The deluge valve should allow for automatic and manual 
activation. Manual activation devices shall be placed at exits in 
explosives-operating buildings. They may also be located at the 
operator stations when hazard analysis determines the risk to personnel 
acceptable.
    (g) National Fire Protection Association Standards No. 13,\7\ 
Installation of Sprinkler Systems, and No. 15,\8\ Water Spray Fixed 
Systems, contain basic installation rules.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \7\Copies may be obtained from the National Fire Protection 
Association, Batterymarch Park, Attn: National Fire Codes 
Subscription--Service Department, Quincy, MA 02269.
    \8\See footnote 6 to Sec. 184.109(g).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------


Sec. 184.110  Hazards in fighting fires involving liquid propellants.

    For safety's sake, firefighters shall know the burning 
characteristics and specific hazards of liquid propellants. Burning 
liquid propellants fumes are generally toxic, so firefighters should 
remain on the upwind side. Protective clothing should include an 
approved, self-contained breathing apparatus.


Sec. 184.111  Firebreaks.

    The primary purpose of vegetation control is to limit the 
probability of fires causing a hazard to ammunition and explosives 
areas. Therefore, a firebreak, at least 50 feet wide in all directions, 
shall be maintained around magazine areas, aboveground magazines and 
explosives operating buildings/locations. Firebreaks need not be devoid 
of vegetation but the growth shall be controlled to prevent rapid 
transmission of fire. Maintenance of firebreaks around earth-covered 
magazines is not required. However, combustible material and large 
trees shall be removed. Vegetation around ventilators on earth-covered 
magazines shall be controlled to prevent transmission of fire into the 
magazine.

Subpart K--Specific Chemicals


Sec. 184.113  General.

    This section covers specific chemicals used during explosives 
manufacturing processing and provides basic guidance for the 
establishment of local safety requirements. Publications listed below 
are acceptable as guides in the formulation of safety requirements 
except where they conflict with the requirements of this part:
    (a) Chemical Data Sheets, National Safety Council.\9\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \9\Copies may be obtained from the National Safety Council, P.O. 
Box 558, Itasca, IL 60143-0558.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Liquid Propellant Handling, Storage and Transportation, CPIA 
publication No. 194,\10\ dated 1970.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \10\Copies may be obtained from Johns Hopkins University, 
Chemical Propulsion Information Agency (CPIA), 10630 Little Patuxent 
Parkway, Suite 202, Columbia, MD 21044-3200.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Patty's Industrial Hygiene and Toxicology.\11\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \11\Copies may be obtained from Wiley Interscience, John Wiley & 
Sons, Inc., 605 Third Avenue, New York, NY 10158-0012.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (d) Industrial Fire Hazards Handbook.\12\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \12\Copies may be obtained from the National Fire Protection 
Association, Batterymarch Park, Attn: National Fire Codes 
Subscription--Service Department, Quincy, MA 02269.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (e) Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials.\13\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \13\Copies may be obtained from Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, 
Inc., 135 West 50th Street, New York, NY 10020.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------


Sec. 184.114  Repairs to acid equipment.

    (a) Before a pipeline, pump, or other equipment exposed to acid is 
dismantled for repairs, it should be drained and washed down with 
water. All pressure shall be relieved; valves, switches, etc., shall be 
tagged or locked to prevent the accidental application of pressure or 
the introduction of acid into the line. Branch lines where pockets may 
exist require particular attention. All pumping on the system connected 
with parts under repair should cease, with starters tagged and locked, 
unless blank flanges in the lines cut off the affected parts from the 
pump. In breaking a flange, the bottom bolts should be loosened first 
and the first line allowed to sag slightly, permitting the liquid to 
run out by gravity. Spilled liquid shall be disposed of properly after 
the repairs. Absent other information, chemical pipelines shall be 
assumed to contain liquid.
    (b) Repairing used-steel acid tanks presents two types of hazards. 
Even a trace of weak acid or weak acid sludge shall violently react on 
the metal, generating gases. These could cause an explosion if welding 
is carried out on the tank. Personnel working inside the tank risk 
serious poisoning from the gases. Therefore, before repairs start, the 
tank shall be washed out, filled with water, then drained. If any acid 
remains, it may be necessary to apply soda ash solution and steam, then 
fill the tank with water, repeating the original procedure. Before 
entering tanks, check that sufficient oxygen is present. When someone 
is working inside the tank, an observer shall be present, with at least 
one other person available for rescue work, should the worker in the 
tank be overcome; such personnel shall receive training in tank rescue 
work. Those entering tanks shall have respiratory protective equipment, 
life belts, or harnesses and lifelines.
    (c) Neutralizing spills. Slaked (hydrated) lime shall be available 
to neutralize spilled acid. A 10 to 20 percent solution of sodium 
bicarbonate shall remove acid from floors or equipment. Because 
neutralization generates heat, care shall be taken in cleaning large 
quantities of acid. Soda or other alkaline solutions shall neutralize 
all places made slippery by acid, which shall then be flushed with 
water.
    (d) Mixing acid with water. The acid shall be added to the water, 
never the water added to the acid, when significant amounts are being 
diluted. Acid should be added slowly with agitation. Weak acid 
replacing water as the diluting agent requires similar precautions. 
Solutions shall be thoroughly mixed, particularly in steel tanks.
    (e) Empty containers. Carboys that have contained acids shall be 
thoroughly drained before being offered for transportation. They shall 
be shipped in the same manner as full items.


Sec. 184.115  Mixed acids.

    Mixed acids include mixtures of sulfuric and nitric acids used in 
the nitration of various explosives constituents. The pressure of 
liberated gases sometimes causes carboys of mixed acids to rupture 
violently. Mixed acids can start fires, generate gases that cause 
explosions, and emit poisonous oxides of nitrogen. Mixed acid 
containing not less than 10 percent of nitric acid shall not freeze at 
ordinary temperatures and shall not actively attack steel storage 
tanks.


Sec. 184.116  Waste acids (spent acids).

    Waste acids usually contain small amounts of nitrobodies, so 
present the hazard of explosive material. Spent acid from the 
manufacture of nitroglycerin and liquid esters are particularly 
hazardous.


Sec. 184.117  Nitric acid.

    Nitric acid forms explosive compounds with most organic materials. 
With most oxidizable material, it forms flammable compounds, some of 
which are subject to spontaneous ignition. Nitric acid fire creates 
exceedingly toxic oxides of nitrogen. Buildings where nitric acid is 
used shall have proper ventilation. Enough space shall separate them to 
allow for firefighting forces; also, to prevent the accumulation of 
acid ``fumes'' (sometimes colorless, at other times identifiable, 
ranging from dark yellow to brown). The first symptoms of nitrous 
poisoning are usually followed by a latent period, when the victim 
feels comfortable though the poisoning continues. For this reason, 
anyone with even mild symptoms of nitrous poisoning shall immediately 
be made completely still and attended by a physician as soon as 
possible.


Sec. 184.118  Sulfuric acid (oil of vitriol).

    Concentrated sulfuric acid chars wood, cotton, and vegetable 
fibers, usually without causing fire, but oleum (fuming sulfuric acid) 
usually does cause fire in these materials. The addition of water may 
create heat sufficient to cause a fire or explosion, and greatly 
increases the corrosive properties of oleum. This does not preclude the 
use of large quantities of water to dilute or dissipate small 
quantities of acid. Sulfuric acid shall not be stored with nitric acid, 
volatile or flammable liquids, or oxidizing agents. It may be stored in 
carboys, drums, tanks, glass bottles, and in large outdoor tanks. All 
precautions listed for sulfuric acid apply to oleum. In an emergency, 
sand, earth, or other noncombustibles may be used to absorb oleum 
spilled or leaking from storage containers. Once the crisis has passed, 
the oleum-soaked mass can be neutralized with solid carbonates, such as 
calcium carbonate.


Sec. 184.119  Oxidizing agents.

    The following discussion is limited to the inorganic oxidizing 
agents, because the organic agents, such as nitrobenzene, are often 
violent explosives and should come with special storage and handling 
instructions. Inorganic oxidizing agents include the chlorates, 
perchlorates, peroxides, and nitrates of barium, sodium, potassium, 
strontium, ammonium, etc. Their ability to furnish oxygen renders 
oxiding agents hazardous, and violent explosions may occur when they 
are mixed or contaminated with minute quantities of certain 
carbonaceous and combustible materials such as wood, paper, metal 
powders, sulfur, etc. The violence of reaction depends upon 
subdivision, extent of contamination, degree of confinement, and type 
of initiation. Shoes, clothing, and other combustible materials covered 
with dust or solutions of oxidizing agents also represent dangers. 
Intimate mixtures of finely divided oxidizers and fuels are very 
sensitive to heat, friction, and impact.


Sec. 184.120  Handling oxidizing agents.

    (a) Oxidizing agents shall be stored and processed only in fire-
resistive rooms or buildings. They shall be separated from fuels, 
flammable materials, metal powders, and acids until processing.
    (b) Equipment for processing oxidizing agents shall not be used for 
fuels, flammable substances, metal powders, etc. It should be 
constructed of non-combustible materials only.
    (c) Solutions of oxidizing agents shall be placed in nonabsorbent, 
non-combustible containers only.
    (d) Damaged combustible containers shall not be repaired in the 
storage building because of the risk of contamination and ignition. 
Discarded containers shall serve no other purpose, but shall be burned 
in the open. Combustible containers infused with oxidizing agents burn 
fiercely if ignited, and may explode.
    (e) Employees handling oxidizing agents should wear flame-resistant 
clothing as minimal protection. Contaminated clothing should be stored 
in metal cabinets until laundered.
    (f) Spills of small quantities of oxidizing agents during 
processing shall be cleaned up immediately. If large quantities are 
spilled, the uppermost layers may be salvaged if free of contaminants.


Sec. 184.121  Chlorates.

    (a) Chlorates mixed with sulfur, sulfides, or other readily 
oxidizable material may cause spontaneous ignition. Sulfur presents a 
greater hazard than sulfides. Adding phosphorus to a sulfur-chlorate 
mixture increases the danger. Shellac, potassium, sodium nitrate with 
petroleum derivatives, and powdered metals render chlorates sensitive; 
mixtures of trinitrocresol or picric acid and chlorates should be 
avoided since they are particularly sensitive. Chlorates shall never be 
mixed with ammonium salts since the ammonium chlorate that could form 
could spontaneously explode. Moisture of 0.5 percent or more in 
mixtures containing chlorates is considered dangerous because of the 
possible formation of chloric acid.
    (b) Substituting sodium chlorate for potassium chlorate in any of 
the above-described mixtures increases the hazard.
    (c) Ammonium chlorate decomposes spontaneously. When mixed with 
perchlorates it constitutes a major hazard.
    (d) Barium chlorate is very toxic. In storage, it poses a greater 
danger than potassium chlorate.
    (e) Zinc chlorate, in contact with certain organic materials, 
explodes under the influence of slight friction, percussion, or shock. 
When involved in a fire, it is life-threatening.
    (f) Storage of chlorates should preclude contact with other 
combustible material, organic or inorganic. Broken or damaged 
containers and spilled material should be promptly removed and 
destroyed.
    (g) Fires involving chlorates should be fought with solid streams 
of water or with water fog. With solid streams, firefighters can 
maintain a greater distance but steam explosion becomes a danger 
requiring precautionary measures. Water fog offers the advantage of 
quicker cooling. Its normal smothering action, however, is obviated by 
the ability of chlorates to furnish oxygen to the fire.


Sec. 184.122  Perchlorates.

    Perchlorates form slightly less sensitive mixtures than do 
chlorates and should be substituted whenever possible. Advantages of 
using perchlorates include this reduced sensitivity to impact and 
friction, the nonformation of a free acid when moisture is present, and 
greater safety in the event of accidental contact with the weak acids 
that form the principal part of many gums used in binding pyrotechnic 
mixtures.
    (a) Ammonium perchlorate alone does not easily explode. It is 
stable at ordinary temperatures, but decomposes at a maintained 
temperature of 302 deg.F (150 deg.C). It has the same degree of 
sensitivity to impact as picric acid. It becomes a high explosive when 
mixed with flammable materials and metal powders.
    (b) Containers for perchlorates and chlorates in storage include 
lined wooden boxes, kegs, barrels, and iron drums. All damaged and 
broken containers shall be removed from the storehouse and spilled 
material swept up and destroyed promptly.
    (c) Fires involving perchlorates alone may be fought with water.


Sec. 184.123  Peroxides.

    (a) General. Solid peroxides decompose easily in the presence of 
moisture and shall therefore be stored in a cool, dry place. They pose 
a severe fire hazard, particularly when incorporated with combustible 
materials. Sodium peroxide shall be protected from contact with water, 
which renders it explosive. Hydrogen peroxide of approximately 30 
percent strength is unstable, liberates oxygen, and resembles the solid 
peroxides.
    (b) High-strength hydrogen peroxide. (1) High-strength hydrogen 
peroxide (90 percent or greater) is shipped in specially designed 
containers with vents and stored only in containers vented to the 
atmosphere, constructed so that foreign material shall not enter the 
containers. It shall be stored in a cool, shaded location used only for 
that purpose. Containers of hydrogen peroxide shall never exceed 15 or 
20 above ambient temperatures. Larger increases in temperature may 
indicate a decomposition of the hydrogen peroxide. Operators shall 
report any undue heating of hydrogen peroxide drums to the person in 
charge, and the area shall be evacuated immediately. A water spray 
system, installed in every hydrogen peroxide storage location, shall be 
turned on immediately upon observation of overheated storage drums. If 
hydrogen peroxide is to be stored for long periods, high-purity 
aluminum containers shall be used.
    (2) All tanks, tubes, and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned. The 
recommended procedure involves immersing parts in a pickling solution 
of 0.5 percent sodium hydroxide at room temperature for 1 hour, washing 
with clear water, drying, immersing in a 5 percent solution of CP 
sulfuric acid at room temperature for 1 hour; washing, drying, and 
leaving in a 25 to 30 percent solution of hydrogen peroxide for at 
least 24 hours, then draining off the solution. The part is then ready 
for use.
    (3) Hydrogen peroxide burns and discolors skin. All persons 
handling this material should wear face shields, rubber gloves, and 
rubber trousers on the outside of rubber boots. Running water shall be 
available in the storage area; any part of the skin touched by hydrogen 
peroxide shall be immediately washed with water. Spillages of hydrogen 
peroxide shall be immediately washed away with water.
    (4) Only the following materials should be used in equipment coming 
in contact with high strength hydrogen peroxide: ``Pyrex'' glass, high-
purity aluminum, pure tin, ``Keroseal'' or equivalent. Stainless steel 
types 304, 309, 310, 316, 321, and 347 are suitable for periods of 2 
months or less.
    (c) Fires. Fires involving peroxides, except sodium peroxide, may 
be fought with water. Sodium peroxide fires shall be smothered with 
sand, ashes, dirt, or rock dust.


Sec. 184.124  Nitrates.

    (a) General. Many nitrates are not flammable in themselves, and are 
usually stored in wooden boxes, kegs, or barrels. Ammonium nitrate, 
however, is shipped in special waterproof bags or metal containers. 
Barium nitrate is sometimes stored in iron drums. Regardless of the 
type of container, it shall be moisture-proof. Nitrates shall be stored 
in a dry place, since they cake in the presence of moisture.
    (b) Ammonium nitrate. (1) Ammonium nitrate in confinement can 
detonate with the violence of a high explosive, but this would require 
a relatively heavy initiator. Under the effect of heating alone, 
ammonium nitrate shall decompose. Contamination with chlorides, sulfur, 
nitrobodies, charcoal, metallic nitrates, metal powders, petroleum 
derivatives, and oxidizable carbonaceous materials sensitizes ammonium 
nitrate, accelerates its decomposition, and increases the violence of 
the reaction. Zinc or lead contamination lowers the decomposition 
temperature to 200  deg.F. Galvanized metals and lead solder shall not, 
therefore, be used in the vicinity of ammonium nitrate operations. The 
burning of ammonium nitrate and combustible material such as wood or 
paper containers, produces a gas mixture that under proper conditions 
of pressure may detonate with sufficient force to initiate the 
detonation of ammonium nitrate. Fires involving ammonium nitrate shall 
be vented to the greatest practicable extent because air acts as a 
diluent for the hazardous gases, minimizing the probability of 
explosion.
    (2) In high pan (evaporating) operations, deluge systems should be 
provided over the pans for use in case of fire. Temperatures used to 
heat the liquor may not exceed 317  deg.F (saturated steam at 100 psi). 
High pan operations shall be located at class 1.1 distances from 
adjacent structures other than the graining building. The graining 
building, however, shall be protected from the high pans by a 
barricade. The class 1.1 distances specified above may be based on the 
maximum quantity of ammonium nitrate contained in any one high pan.
    (3) Fires involving nitrate should be fought with large quantities 
of water, never with steam. Solid hose streams enable the fire to be 
fought from a greater distance but introduce the hazard of steam 
explosion, particularly if the nitrate is molten; therefore, the hose 
streams shall be directed from behind a protective barrier. Under some 
circumstances, when the fire is in the incipient stage and accessible, 
water fog may be used to an advantage but it shall have no smothering 
action since the burning material provides its own oxygen.
    (4) Storage of ammonium nitrate in explosives storage magazines is 
preferred. When stored in an area where there is a possibility that 
explosives may be projected into the nitrates, the requirements for 
class 1.1 explosives are applicable. When stored in an area with fire 
hazards only and separated by more than intraline distances from areas 
containing ammunition, ammonium nitrate may be stored in accordance 
with the requirements governing the storage of a class 1.3 solid 
propellant.
    (i) Buildings, other than earth-covered magazines, used for the 
storage of ammonium nitrate, shall be of a type easily vented if fire 
occurs, in order that the gases produced during combustion and 
considered potential sources of explosion to the commodity are 
dissipated. The floors of such buildings shall be of a type to prevent 
hazardous impregnation by the nitrate.
    (ii) Stacking within storage buildings other than earth-covered 
magazines should anticipate stacks no larger than the 12 by 12 feet 
plan dimension, and not higher than 7 feet. Aisles not less than 3 feet 
wide shall be maintained around each stack and between the sides of the 
building. The use of wood dunnage should be restricted to reduce the 
quantity of combustible materials present.
    (iii) Broken packages or containers shall be removed from the 
building and the spilled material swept up and destroyed promptly.


Sec. 184.125  Powdered metals: aluminum, magnesium, and aluminum 
alloys.

    (a) Since a rise in the temperature of metal powders can result 
from contact with water and ignition may ensue, precautions shall be 
taken to prevent water from contacting the material. All buildings 
where powdered metals are stored or processed shall be vented 
adequately at the highest point of the room or building to prevent the 
accumulation of evolved hydrogen gas that results from the reaction 
between powdered metals and moisture, except when stored in watertight 
containers.
    (b) Exposed material that may be at a low temperature should be 
brought to or near the room temperature under conditions of low 
relative humidity before being placed in the operating room.
    (c) Heating equipment shall be installed in service magazines, when 
required, to bring the closed containers and contents to a temperature 
approximately that of the operating building.
    (d) Efforts should be made to maintain relative humidity between 50 
and 55 percent in locations where metal powders are exposed, so as to 
avoid the hazard of static electricity while preventing condensation.
    (e) Operators should be cautioned to wear sweatbands on their 
foreheads and take other precautions to prevent perspiration from 
falling onto powdered metals.
    (f) Care should be exercised in locating pipes, to prevent 
condensation on cold pipes forming droplets of water and falling upon 
hazardous material. Leaking water pipes can cause ignition.
    (g) Powdered metals in metal containers with tight covers may be 
stored in general warehouses, provided that they are remote from 
oxidizing agents. The storage place shall be dry.
    (h) When compounded with oxidizing agents, powdered metals present 
a dangerous fire and explosion hazard.
    (i) Very fine suspended dust from powdered metals is an explosion 
hazard comparable to that of explosive gases and may be initiated 
easily by discharges of static electricity.
    (j) Powdered metals exposed to air are dangerous fire hazards and 
burn with intense heat. Metallic oxide formed by the burning within 
drums effectively blankets such fires, confining them, if undisturbed, 
to the place of origin.
    (k) Fires shall not be fought with ordinary streams of water 
because of the danger of liberating large quantities of hydrogen gas, a 
severe explosion hazard. Fires involving small quantities of powdered 
metals may be combated with a fog nozzle or specially designed 
commercial extinguishing powders gently applied to prevent the fire 
from spreading. If large quantities of powdered metals become involved 
in a fire and escape from their storage containers, firefighting 
efforts shall be directed primarily to prevention of fire spreading to 
other facilities. Where friction sensitivity is not a concern, 
smothering fire with sand may be effective.
    (l) Trained personnel shall repair or maintain buildings or 
equipment where metallic powders are involved, and then only with the 
following precautions: powder or dust shall be removed, nonsparking 
tools shall be used, hammer impacts that could cause sparks shall be 
avoided, flashlights shall be of approved type, equipment shall be 
grounded, undue friction shall be prevented, and open flames shall not 
be used.
    (m) Zirconium powder can explode violently when in contact with 
cupric oxide or lead oxide. Other metallic powders exhibit this 
property under certain conditions. National Fire Prevention 
Association, 491M,\14\ Hazardous Chemical Reactions, provides 
information regarding reactions between metallic powders and other 
chemicals.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \14\Copies may be obtained from the National Fire Protection 
Association, Batterymarch Park, Attn: National Fire Codes 
Subscription--Service Department, Quincy, MA 02269.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------


Sec. 184.126  Charcoal.

    (a) Charcoal is subject to spontaneous ignition in the presence of 
moisture, although pit charcoal is less likely than the chemical 
byproduct charcoal, and soft wood charcoal less so than hardwood 
charcoal. The following conditions promote the spontaneous ignition of 
charcoal: forced cooling after burning; drying after absorbing 
moisture; and contact with alcohols and oils (particularly for charcoal 
in which a fire has been extinguished). Pulverized charcoal is a 
definite fire hazard. The gases from burning charcoal contain carbon 
monoxide and are toxic.
    (b) Permanent or reserve storage of large quantities of charcoal is 
not recommended. Charcoal should be stored in airtight containers or in 
bags piled in tiers with skeleton or gridwork floors between tiers to 
provide ventilation. It should be isolated and remove from oxidizing 
agents. Bulk storage of charcoal is prohibited.


Sec. 184.127  Sulfur.

    (a) Sulfur compounded with chlorates and several other oxidizing 
agents forms highly sensitive explosive mixtures. Sulfur presents a 
spontaneous ignition hazard when mixed with carbon, lamp black, fats, 
and oils. Burning sulfur produces toxic gases and fumes.
    (b) Sulfur may be stored in wooden boxes, kegs, or barrels. Large 
quantities may be stored in bulk. It should be isolated and remote from 
oxidizing agents with which it forms highly sensitive explosive 
mixtures.


Sec. 184.128  Flammable solids.

    Guanidine nitrate, dinitrophenol, DNT, and dinitrobenzene are 
examples of flammable solids. These materials may be stored in wooden 
boxes or barrels lined with moisture-proof paper. They should be stored 
in fire-resistant locations, preferably in magazines. When strongly 
initiated they may act as explosives. Dinitrophenol may explode at 
elevated temperatures.


Sec. 184.129  Volatile flammable liquids.

    (a) Common examples of volatile flammable liquids are ether 
acetone, gasoline, ethyl alcohol, methyl alcohol (wood alcohol), 
benzene, toluene, xylene, and amyl acetate. These volatile liquids may, 
if unconfined, evolve vapor in explosive concentrations. Ethyl and 
isopropyl ethers tend to form explosive peroxides, especially when 
anhydrous. Evaporation to near dryness shall be prevented. Volatile 
flammable liquids shall not be used to wash or clean equipment or parts 
of buildings except when specifically authorized as process 
requirements.
    (b) Some flammable liquids such as paints, varnishes, and enamels 
may, under certain conditions, be subject to spontaneous ignition. They 
shall therefore be isolated from sources of heat, in locations where 
any heat produced shall readily dissipate. Only noncombustible sweeping 
compounds should be used for cleaning up materials of this type.


Sec. 184.130  Calcium carbide.

    Small quantities of calcium carbide may be stored in general 
warehouses in airtight tin cans or iron drums. Large quantities should 
be stored only in separate noncombustible buildings or detached 
weatherproof sheds. The storage place should be dry and well 
ventilated. Calcium carbide, in itself a slight fire hazard, reacts 
violently with water, liberating large quantities of acetylene gas 
which, with air, forms explosive mixtures.


Sec. 184.131  Sodium hydroxide (caustic soda) and potassium hydroxide.

    These materials may be stored in general warehouses in airtight 
iron drums. Permanent storage of large stocks is not recommended. These 
chemical products may become a fire hazard when mixed with nitro 
compounds or other materials. Their action is corrosive and caustic; 
mixed with water, they create heat.


Sec. 184.132  Metallic sodium.

    Metallic sodium may be stored in airtight steel drums and may be 
stored under kerosene or nitrogen, but not under chlorinated 
hydrocarbons. Its violent reaction with water liberates hydrogen and 
causes heat, producing a serious fire and explosion hazard.


Sec. 184.133  Nitrocellulose and derivatives.

    Nitrocellulose includes various types of nitrated cotton or wood 
pulp, depending on the nitrogen content. When dry, it is extremely 
sensitive to shock and friction and readily accumulates static charges. 
It is highly flammable and explosive, burning rapidly and producing 
very little smoke or residue. Impure, it is subject to spontaneous 
ignition. Storage of dry nitrocellulose is not permitted as it 
possesses all the hazards of a sensitive and easily ignited high 
explosive. Nitrocellulose with 25 to 30 percent moisture content is 
stored in zinc-lined boxes or metal drums and is substantially 
nonexplosive when stored in an area where explosives or ammunition 
cannot be projected into it.


Sec. 184.134  Red phosphorus.

    Red phosphorus forms sensitive mixtures with oxidizing agents, 
posing a dangerous fire hazard. It may be stored in general warehouses 
in metal drums or metal containers included in wood boxes. Phosphine 
gas may form in containers of red phosphorous; protective measures 
should be used when opening these.


Sec. 184.135  Thermite (TH).

    Thermite, a mixture of iron oxide, aluminum, and other substances, 
is a dark gray granular mass. To burn, it requires an igniter. At 4300 
deg.F, iron oxide reduces to molten iron, causing rapid burning. 
Thermate is a mixture of thermite, grained aluminum, barium nitrate, 
sulfur, and lubricating oil.


Sec. 184.136  Incendiary bombs.

    Incendiary bombs may consist of a combustible body of magnesium 
metal alloy containing an igniter composition such as thermate. When 
ignited, the body of the bomb burns at about P3700  deg.F. Other types 
(such as IM, NP, PTI) have steel cases filled with thickened fuel. 
These operate by ejecting the burning fuel over a wide area. Incendiary 
bombs are difficult to extinguish.


Sec. 184.137  Colored smoke mixtures.

    These mixtures contain dye for smoke and some fuels. They do not 
contain hexachloroethane (HC). Respiratory protection shall be worn for 
protection against heavy concentrations of smoke.


Sec. 184.138  Smoke.

    FM or FS in smoke form shall not usually produce effects requiring 
treatment. Smoke in high concentrations from CN-DM, CN, and HC is 
toxic, and anyone unprotected by a mask subjected to this should 
receive medical attention. Corrosive on the skin, liquid FS or FM 
should be immediately washed with copious quantities of water, then 
flushed with mild sodium bicarbonate solution.


Sec. 184.139  Adamsite (DM).

    DM is a greenish yellow to black solid, melting at 383  deg.F. 
Smoke from the burning agent causes irritation in the nose and throat 
even in minimal concentrations. Longer exposure causes tightness of the 
chest, headache, sneezing, coughing, intense nausea, and weakness. The 
symptoms increase in severity for some time after exposure, and 
temptation to remove the mask should be resisted. Irritation produced 
by this agent is so intense that an intolerable concentration is 
reached long before it becomes dangerous to life. The effects may last 
for several hours, but no permanent injury is caused. If DM is spilled, 
it should not be swept or handled in any way so as to cause dust 
formation: DM should be wet thoroughly before it is swept. For first 
aid treatment, remove victim to fresh air and flush nose and throat 
areas with bicarbonate of soda solution. Let victim breathe an alcohol, 
chloroform, and ammonia mixture. Evacuate to hospital for medical 
treatment.


Sec. 184.140  O-chlorobenzylidene malononitrile (CS).

    (a) CS is a white crystalline powder similar to, but more powerful 
than, CN. It has a minimum purity of 96 percent; insoluble in water and 
ethanol, it is soluble in methylene chloride. CS1 is a micropulverized 
powder. CS2 is a modified CS1, treated with liquid silicone to increase 
fluidity and persistency.
    (b) A protective mask; ordinary coveralls secured at the neck, 
wrist, and ankles; and rubber gloves shall provide protection.
    (c) Exposure incapacitates within 20 to 60 seconds and, after the 
affected individual reaches fresh air, the effects continue for 5 to 10 
minutes. Eyes burn, tear copiously, and involuntarily close. Exposure 
also causes coughing, difficulty breathing, chest tightness, a stinging 
sensation, a running nose, and dizziness or a swimming sensation in the 
head. Heavy concentrations of CS, which has a pepper-like odor, shall 
also cause nausea and vomiting. To prevent stinging and reddening of 
the skin, personnel touched by CS dust or particles should not shower 
for 6 hours. Individuals affected by CS should move to fresh air, face 
the wind, and should not rub their eyes. To remove accidental gross 
contamination, personnel should remove clothing and immediately flush 
the body with copious amounts of water to remove most of the agent; 
apply 5 percent sodium bisulfite solution to remove remainder (except 
in or around eyes); then rinse the entire body.
    (d) Area decontamination is required with CS, which settles as a 
dust. Any such accumulation shall be removed, either by vacuuming or 
washing down the area with detergent solution followed by a clear water 
rinse.


Sec. 184.141  Sulfur trioxide-chlorosulfonic acid mixture (FS)

    This is a heavy liquid acid with an acrid odor. It fumes strongly 
in air, decomposes above 154  deg.F, and is used solely as a smoke-
producing agent. Exposure to heavy concentrations may cause severe 
irritation to the skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Inhalation of 
concentrated fumes causes coughing and strangulation, a constricted 
feeling around the chest, and a burning sensation in the nose and 
throat. When the mixture comes in contact with moisture, it forms 
hydrochloric and sulfuric acids, both of which corrode metals and 
fabrics. Any FS on clothing or skin should be wiped off with a dry 
cloth, and the contaminated area flushed with large amounts of water. 
Itself nonflammable, FS may cause fires if spilled on flammable 
material, particularly under damp conditions. Leaking munitions 
containers should be removed from the magazine and contents poured on 
the ground in a suitable area. Spillage can be removed with large 
quantities of water. Small quantities of water added to FS react 
violently.


Sec. 184.142  Titanium tetrachloride (FM).

    Titanium tetrachloride is a heavy, colorless liquid acid with a 
pungent odor. When it leaks it produces a massive amount of smoke. It 
is used solely to produce smoke and has slight toxic effects. Liquid FM 
shall burn the skin, however; and quantities of smoke cause a choking 
sensation and difficulty breathing; a protective mask is required for 
the comfort of the worker. In extremely heavy concentrations, 
protective mask canisters may become clogged to such an extent as to 
render breathing difficult; in enclosed places, serious injury can 
result. Large quantities of water can remove liquid FM from the skin. 
Leaking munitions containers should be removed from the magazine and 
destroyed by pouring contents on the ground in a disposal area. 
Spillage can be removed with large quantities of water.


Sec. 184.143  Hexachloroethane mixture (HC).

    HC, a gray-colored powder without characteristic odor, consists 
largely of a hexachloroethane, zinc oxide, and aluminum mixture. HC 
reacts with water which can start it burning; it burns rather slowly 
with the evolution of a dense cloud of smoke. Respiratory protection 
shall be worn by personnel exposed to any concentration of HC smoke.


Sec. 184.144  Burning mixture (CN-DM).

    CN-DM is a mixture of chloroacetophenone and diphenylamine 
chloroarsine with pyrotechnic material. Respiratory protection is 
required when this mixture burns.


Sec. 184.145  Phosphorus munitions agents.

    (a) General. At present, white phosphorus (WP) and plasticized 
white phosphorus (PWP) are the only two chemical agents in this group; 
they have somewhat similar characteristics.
    (b) White phosphorus. WP is a yellowish, wax-like substance, 
melting at 110  deg.F. Its most characteristic property is that it 
spontaneously ignites when exposed to air, burning with a yellow flame 
and giving off a large volume of white smoke. Smoke in field 
concentrations is not toxic, fumes are toxic. WP is intensely poisonous 
when taken internally.
    (c) Plasticized white phosphorus. PWP is finely divided WP 
suspended in a gel of rubber and xylene.


Sec. 184.146  Storage for phosphorus munitions.

    (a) General. Phosphorus munitions should be stored in fire-
resistive magazines with concrete floors or in earth-covered magazines 
in a manner facilitating inspection.
    (b) Temperature control. White phosphorus filling in munitions 
becomes liquid at 111  deg.F. When exposed to air, WP shall ignite; in 
cases when a burster is in the projectile, it may explode. Below 111 
deg.F the filling is solid and shall not leak; for this reason, the 
temperature shall be kept below 111  deg.F.
    (c) Position of munitions. Where temperature is likely to reach 111 
 deg.F, WP munitions shall be stacked upright, sitting on their bases, 
so that a subsequent drop in temperature shall not solidify the WP in a 
position affecting the ballistics of the item.


Sec. 184.147  Special protective equipment for phosphorus munitions.

    (a) General. Special equipment, including that required for first 
aid, should be readily available to personnel working where phosphorus 
munitions are stored, processed, or handled.
    (b) Personal protective equipment. Personal protective equipment 
consisting of flameproof gloves and coveralls and face shield, 
sufficient in number to equip all personnel required to work with 
phosphorus munitions, shall be centrally stored and maintained under 
close supervision. These items shall be issued to personnel working 
with WP- or PWP-filled items and shall be worn whenever munitions 
containers leak.


Sec. 184.148  First aid for phosphorus burns.

    Phosphorus buried in the flesh is absorbed and may result in 
systemic poisoning. The tissues immediately around the burn are 
particularly affected by the absorbed phosphorus. Untrained personnel 
administering first aid should immediately plunge burned areas into 
water, then wrap them in wet gauze.


Sec. 184.149  Leaking phosphorus munitions.

    (a) General. White smoke immediately alerts observers to leaks in 
WP munitions. Spontaneous ignition occurs when air contacts the WP. 
Only prompt action can combat the great risk of fire posed by leaking 
WP munitions.
    (b) Immediate action on discovering leaking munitions. During 
operations, the person discovering the leaking munitions shall, when 
practicable, submerge the leaker in one of the tubs provided. (Rubber 
protective equipment does not give adequate protection when exposed to 
high temperatures such as produced by burning phosphorus. When burning 
phosphorus adheres to gloves, the gloved hands should be dipped in 
water.)
    (c) Disposal of leaking munitions. After a single leaking item has 
been immersed in water, it should be disposed of in an area where 
fragmentation shall not be a hazard, smoke shall not create a nuisance, 
and no dry vegetation could be ignited.
    (1) An item that does not contain a fuze or burster shall be 
removed to the demolition ground and destroyed by static firing. All 
personnel shall retire to a safe distance before the projectile is 
exploded.
    (2) The fire shall be extinguished before a filled item with a fuze 
or burster, not in a container, is handled or moved. This is extremely 
hazardous, and shall be carried out under the direction of an expert in 
demolition techniques, familiar with chemical munitions. After the 
flames have been extinguished, the instructions given in 
Sec. 184.149(c) shall be followed.


Sec. 184.150  Removal of phosphorus munitions.

    (a) General. After leaked phosphorus has been doused and contained 
by water, the water can evaporate, making it possible for the 
phosphorus to reignite. Phosphorus that has self-extinguished by 
forming a crust can reignite if the crust is broken.
    (b) Procedures. Small amounts of phosphorus are best removed by 
first scraping with a putty knife or other such implement, then 
removing what remains with a blowtorch or similar appliance. This 
method of removing phosphorus shall not be attempted until all loaded 
munitions have been removed.
    (c) Surveillance. The magazine should be kept under surveillance 
for at least 2 weeks, as fire may recur. Any deep cracks or crevices in 
the floor should be filled up with cement mortar before munitions are 
returned in the magazine.


Sec. 184.151  Incendiary and smoke munitions.

    Munitions in this group include incendiaries and signaling smokes.


Sec. 184.152  Special protective equipment for incendiary and smoke 
munitions.

    Boxed and unboxed incendiary and smoke munitions may be handled 
without special protective equipment. Respiratory protection should be 
available, however. Personnel exposed to burning munitions or bulk 
chemicals should wear protective masks.


Sec. 184.153  First aid for incendiary and smoke munitions injuries.

    No unusual first aid treatment is required for personal injuries 
incurred handling incendiary-to-incendiary or smoke-to-smoke munitions. 
Burns should be treated in the same manner as those caused by flame. 
Persons exposed to high concentrations of smoke should be hospitalized.


Sec. 184.154  Leaking incendiary and smoke munitions.

    Personnel handling leaking items need not generally wear protective 
equipment, but masks should be worn during exposure to burning 
munitions. Leaking munitions containing incendiary and smoke agents 
shall be segregated.


Sec. 184.155  Fire in incendiary and smoke munitions magazines.

    In magazines containing incendiary or smoke munitions, primary 
firefighting efforts shall be confined to preventing fire from 
spreading. Water is not used to fight fires of thermite or mixtures 
containing fine metallic powders such as magnesium or aluminum. 
Incipient fires may be smothered by spraying with dry chemical fire 
extinguishers or covering with sand. Fire in magazines containing 
incendiary-to-incendiary or smoke-to-smoke munitions shall be fought 
with water only when large quantities of water can completely douse 
relatively small quantities of munitions.

Subpart L--Safety Requirements for Explosives Facilities


Sec. 184.157  General.

    This subpart contains minimum safety requirements for existing, 
new, or modified explosives facilities and equipment. For facilities 
primarily used for general industrial operations, the requirements of 
this subpart shall apply in areas performing explosives work.


Sec. 184.158  Requirements.

    Special properties of materials and operational hazards may require 
that national, Federal, and local requirements be exceeded. In such 
cases, requirements in this subpart shall apply.


Sec. 184.159  Requirements for buildings.

    (a) Building exteriors. Exterior wall and roof coverings of 
operating buildings should be noncombustible and, whenever possible, 
frangible, of ``breakaway'' construction. The buildings should have no 
basements and should not exceed one story, except to meet process 
requirements.
    (b) Interior walls, roofs, and ceilings. Interior wall surfaces and 
ceilings of operating buildings which might house loose, finely divided 
explosives materials shall be smooth, free from cracks and crevices, 
fire resistive and, if painted, be covered with high-gloss paint, to 
minimize dust accumulation and facilitate cleaning. As further 
protection against dust, ledges should be avoided; any that exist shall 
be beveled or kept clean. Wall joints and openings for wiring and 
plumbing shall be sealed against dust. Roofs and walls should be as 
light as practicable, constructed and supported to vent an internal 
explosion with the formation of few large fragments. Firewalls and 
dividing walls constitute exceptions. When class II hazard locations 
exist as defined by the National Electric Code (NEC), 
(National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard No. 70,\15\ 
suspended ceilings and hollow walls are prohibited in explosives 
facilities. Recommended practice is to install insulation and covering 
directly on the underside of the roof deck.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \15\Copies may be obtained from the National Fire Protection 
Association, Batterymarch Park, Attn: National Fire Codes 
Subscription--Service Department, Quincy, MA 02269.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Floors and work surfaces. Floors and work surfaces shall be 
constructed to facilitate cleaning, with no cracks or crevices in which 
explosives could lodge. Nonsparking floors and work surfaces are 
required in all locations where exposed explosives or hazardous 
concentrations of flammable vapor or gas are present. When grounding is 
necessary, conductive floors (mats or similar static-dissipating floor 
surfaces), tabletops, and other work surfaces shall be provided. Cove 
bases at the junctions of walls and floors are preferred. No exposed 
nails, screws, or bolts in work surfaces shall be permitted.
    (d) Substantial dividing wall. (1) Substantial dividing walls, 
constructed in accordance with the requirements of TM 5-1300,\16\ 
Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions, separate 
independent concentrations of high explosives so they do not need to be 
added when determining Q/D requirements.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \16\Copies may be obtained from Naval Publications and Forms 
Center, 5801 Tabor Avenue, Philadelphia, PA 19120.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Openings in dividing walls for conveyors, pass-through boxes, 
or other uses, should be avoided. However, in locations where 
operationally necessary, the following apply:
    (i) The opening(s) shall not be larger than the minimum needed for 
the material's safe passage.
    (ii) Closures shall have equivalent wall-strength characteristics 
and fusible links.
    (e) Exits and doors. No explosives hazard shall occupy space 
between an operator and an exit. Exit doors in buildings containing 
explosives, except storage magazines, should be casement-type and 
glazed with non-shatterable plastic material. All interior doors should 
open in the direction of the flow of material through the building and 
should open onto unobstructed passageways.
    (f) Emergency egress. When standard exits and fire escapes do not 
provide for rapid enough egress from work levels above the ground 
floor, other means of emergency egress (that is, safety chutes) shall 
be provided.
    (g) Passageways. Weather-protected passageways between buildings or 
magazines should be of noncombustible construction and equipped with 
fire stops to interrupt a fire's progress.
    (h) Roads and walkways. Good all-weather roads should be provided. 
Only roads serving a single magazine or explosives processing building 
(including its service facilities) may dead end, and then, only at the 
magazine or building. The road system should be designed to make it 
unnecessary to pass through an explosives area to travel from one place 
to another. Walkways and roads at the entrance to or between adjacent 
buildings containing explosives should be boardwalks or hard surfaced, 
preventing employees from tracking stones, grit, and other foreign 
material into operating buildings.
    (i) Windows and skylights. Non-shatterable glazing is preferred 
where an explosion accompanied by falling or projected glass could 
cause injury. When glazing with conventional glass is used, the hazard 
may be reduced by covering it with properly fixed plastic or wire mesh 
screening.
    (j) Drains and sumps. (1) All drain lines handling explosive wastes 
shall have sumps or basins of sufficient capacity for the removal of 
explosives by settling. The drains shall be of adequate capacity; free 
of pockets; and with slopes of at least one-quarter inch per foot to 
prevent explosives settling-out in the drain line, rather than in the 
sump or settling basin intended to collect them. Sumps shall be so 
designed that suspended and settleable solid explosive material cannot 
be carried beyond the sumps in the wash waters, and so overflow shall 
not disturb any floating solids. The settling rate of the material and 
the usual rate of flow shall be taken into account in determining the 
sump's capacity. The design shall also permit easy removal of collected 
explosives, and shall allow for retention of those that float on water 
until they can be skimmed off. Bolted sump tanks or other types of 
construction that permit the explosives to settle in obscure or hidden 
spaces are prohibited.
    (2) Care shall be taken to preclude deposition of explosives from 
sump effluent due to drying, temperature changes, or interaction with 
other industrial contaminations. Sweeping and other dry collecting 
measures should be used to keep appreciably water soluble explosives 
out of the drainage system.
    (3) Drains between the source of explosive and the sump shall be 
troughs with rounded bottoms and with removable ventilated covers to 
facilitate inspection for accumulation of explosives. Waste liquids 
shall not be run into close drains and sewers. Drains shall be 
inspected periodically and necessary steps taken to prevent the buildup 
of explosives deposits in them. Drains and sewers containing explosive 
waste materials shall not be connected in a manner to empty such wastes 
into the normal sewage systems carrying inert or sanitary wastes.
    (k) Hardware: (1) Hardware in buildings containing exposed 
explosive materials, explosive dusts, or vapors should be of 
nonsparking material. Installation of hardware (piping and ducts) 
should not be affixed to blowout panels or walls.
    (2) Fasteners such as nuts and bolts which could accidentally drop 
into explosives or explosive constituents shall be prevented from doing 
so by being drilled and thonged or otherwise secured.
    (l) Ventilation. Exhaust fans through which combustible dust or 
flammable vapor pass shall be equipped with nonferrous blades, or the 
casting shall be lined with nonferrous material. Motors shall be of the 
proper National Electric Code (NEC) class for the hazard (National Fire 
Protection Association Standard No. 70). Exhaust systems shall be 
cleaned and serviced on a regular scheduled. The entire system shall be 
bonded and grounded.
    (m) Steam for processing and heating. Process steam is that which 
is in direct contact with explosives, used directly in their 
manufacture; or that which, in case of equipment failure, would exhaust 
directly into contact with explosives or explosive fumes. Steam used 
for heating operating buildings containing explosives should have a 
maximum pressure of 5 psi (228  deg.F). When necessary, process steam 
may exceed 5 psi, up to 15 psi. The exterior of stem or hot water pipes 
in contact with wood, paper or other combustible materials shall not 
exceed 160  deg.F. When steam temperature must exceed 228  deg.F in 
hazardous locations, steam lines shall be covered and painted with an 
impervious material or otherwise protected against contact with 
explosives. Requirements for steam pressure exceeding 15 psi shall be 
evaluated by the contracting officer on a case-by-case basis. When a 
reducing valve is used, no relief valve shall be bypassed in a manner 
permitting circumvention of the pressure reducing equipment. The 
production of superheated steam caused by the throttling action of 
reducing valves shall be prevented. Use of a ``water leg'' or water 
column to control steam pressure of 5 pounds or less is recommended. 
When close control of steam temperature is necessary, indicating and 
recording pressure or temperature gauges shall be installed. Such 
devices should be tested periodically and the test results recorded. 
When electrical resistance to ground is high, steam lines shall be 
properly grounded where they enter buildings.
    (n) Tunnels. To prevent possible communication of an explosive, 
shockwave and blast shall receive special consideration in designing 
and constructing tunnels between buildings containing explosives.


Sec. 184.160  Electrical requirements.

    The installation and use of electrical equipment within explosives 
buildings, magazines, and explosives facilities shall comply with the 
latest edition of the NEC (NFPA Standard 70), at a minimum, except as 
otherwise specified herein. In planning electrical equipment for 
special occupancies or for hazardous locations as defined in the NEC, 
it is often possible to locate equipment in less hazardous or 
nonhazardous areas, reducing the quantity of special equipment required 
and decreasing the hazard.
    (a) Hazardous locations. (1) Electrical equipment and installations 
in hazardous locations (classes I, II, and III, as defined in the NEC 
(NFPA Standard No. 70) shall in all cases comply with the requirements 
of the code for division 1.
    (2) When electrical equipment is installed in those areas that fall 
into the categories of both class I and class II, the equipment shall 
be of a type used in both locations. The installations shall be in 
accordance with the requirements for division I hazardous locations.
    (b) Alternate power source. In special processes and operations 
requiring a continuous supply of power, provisions shall be made for an 
alternate source.
    (c)  Electric power lines. To prevent broken wires from hitting the 
building, the distance separating overhead transmission and service 
lines from magazines and buildings containing explosives shall be 
greater than that between the poles or towers supporting the lines, 
unless an effective means is provided to ensure that energized lines on 
breaking cannot come into contact with the facility or its 
appurtenances; for example, cable trays and messenger lines. In no case 
shall overhead transmission lines pass within 50 feet of magazines or 
other explosives buildings. Service lines of all types shall, except 
for local telephone connections and similar low-voltage intercom or 
alarm systems, be run underground from a point at least 50 feet away 
from the building. With regard to siting, electric transmission lines 
(those carrying 69 KV or more) and the tower or poles supporting them 
shall be located no closer to PES's than:
    (1) Inhabited building distance if the line in question is part of 
a grid system serving a large area off the establishment.
    (2) Public traffic route distance if loss of the line shall not 
create serious social or economic hardships. (Public traffic route an 
inhabited building distances shall be based on airblast overpressure 
only; fragment distances shall not be used.)
    (3) Electric transmission lines which can be interrupted without 
loss of power, i.e., power is rerouted through existing lines and/or 
networks, shall be separated from explosives sites in accordance with 
Sec. 184.160(c).
    (d) Motors. Electric motors should not be installed in class I or 
class II hazardous locations. They should be outside any such room or 
building. They should be connected to the process building only through 
mechanical glands or apertures adequately sealed against entrance of 
hazardous materials into both the location where motors are positioned 
and the motor enclosure itself.
    (e) Motor controls, circuit breakers, and safety switches. (1) 
Circuit breakers, safety switches, service entrance switches, and speed 
controllers for hazardous locations should be installed on steel racks:
    (i) In separate buildings connected only by electrical conduits 
between the small building housing the control equipment and the 
buildings containing the electrical equipment for hazardous locations. 
Such conduits shall be provided with sealing fittings to prevent 
communication of flame or arcs from the starters to the hazardous area.
    (2) Limit switches, pressure switches, float switches and any other 
control devices which for practical operating reasons cannot be located 
outdoors shall bear the approval of the Underwriters' Laboratories, 
Inc., or other nationally recognized testing agencies. Electrical 
conduit connections to such equipment shall comply with the 
requirements of the latest edition of the NEC (NFPA Standard No. 70) 
for the specific hazard.
    (3) The primary electric supply to an entire explosive area should 
be so arranged that it can be cut off by switches located at one or 
more central points away from the area.
    (f) Flashlights and lanterns. Flashlights and hand lanterns powered 
by low-voltage dry cell batteries and miners' cap lamps, approved as 
``Permissible'' by the United States Bureau of Mines or, for class I 
hazardous locations, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other 
nationally recognized testing agencies, may be used in both class I and 
class II hazardous locations.


Sec. 184.161  Lightning protection.

    When lightning protection systems are installed, the installation, 
inspection, and maintenance shall be in accordance with the National 
Fire Protection Association, Lightning Protection Code,\17\ at a 
minimum.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \17\See footnote 12 to Sec. 184.259.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------


Sec. 184.162  Static electricity and grounding.

    (a) Detailed discussions of the hazards of static electricity and 
ways of reducing it are published by the National Fire Protection 
Association, Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., the United States 
Department of Commerce, and the Bureau of Mines, U.S. Department of the 
Interior. Where static spark discharge may be hazardous, NFPA Standard 
No. 77,\18\ Static Electricity, shall apply except as otherwise 
specified herein.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \18\See footnote 12 to Sec. 184.259.3
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Grounding of equipment. Bonding straps shall bridge contact 
points where oil, paint, or rust could disrupt electrical continuity. 
Permanent equipment in contact with conductive floors or tabletops is 
not considered adequately grounded. Static grounds shall not be made to 
gas, steam, or air lines, dry pipe sprinkler systems, or air terminals 
of lightning protection systems. They may be made to water pipes, 
ground cones, buried copper plates, driven ground rods, or to down-
conductors of lightning protection systems. All grounds shall be 
interconnected if a structure is equipped with a lightning protection 
system. Metallic bonding and grounding cables, straps, or clamps shall 
be compatible with the explosives being processed.
    (c) Belts. Conductive belting shall be used wherever static is a 
hazard. Such belting shall have a resistance to ground not exceeding 
600,000 ohms. Static combs shall not be used to drain off static 
generated from belting or pulleys used in the presence of hazardous 
concentrations of explosives dust or flammable vapors.
    (d) Testing equipment grounds. Grounding systems shall be tested 
for electrical resistance and continuity when installation has been 
completed and, in the case of active equipment, at locally determined 
intervals. The ground systems of equipment inactive longer than 1 month 
shall be tested for resistance and continuity before reactivation. All 
exposed explosive or hazardous materials shall be removed before 
testing. All test records should be kept. In ground-resistance testing, 
equipment should be considered as a unit. All conductive parts of 
equipment shall be grounded so that resistance does not exceed 25 ohms, 
unless 10 ohms is required for lightning protection. To ensure 
compliance with ohmic requirements, resistance of the belting is to be 
excluded in measuring the total resistance to ground for belt-drive 
machinery. The rate of static generation should be considered before 
changes in grounding systems are made.
    (e) Conductive floors. Conductive floors and conductive shoes shall 
be used for grounding personnel at operations with exposed explosives 
with electrostatic sensitivity of 0.1 joule or less, such as primer, 
initiator, detonator, igniter, tracer, and incendiary mixtures. 
Materials sensitive to static sparks, easily ignited or detonated, 
include lead styphnate, lead azide, mercury fulminate, tetrazene, 
diazodinitrophenol, potassium chlorate-lead styphanate mixtures, 
igniter compositions, grade B magnesium powder, and exposed layers of 
black powder dust. Dust from solid propellants can be ignited from 
spark energy, making conductive floors and shoes necessary where such 
dust is present. Air and dust mixtures of ammonium picrate, tetryl, 
tetrytol, and solid propellants are also sensitive to static 
electricity discharge. Many flammable liquids and air mixtures tested 
(ethyl ether, ethyl alcohol, ethyl acetate, acetone, and gasoline) can 
be ignited by human static discharge. Therefore, areas where personnel 
might come into contact with the kinds of explosives or mixtures 
enumerated above shall be equipped with conductive floors, except when 
the hazards of dust/air or flammable vapor/air mixtures are eliminated 
by adequate housekeeping, dust collection, ventilation, or solvent 
recovery methods.
    (1) Conductive floors are also required when operations involve the 
following:
    (i) Exposed electro-explosive devices such as squibs, detonators, 
primers, etc.
    (ii) Electrically initiated items, such as rockets, with exposed 
circuitry.
    (iii) Hazardous materials that could be ignited by human static 
discharge.
    (2) When a hazard remains localized, conductive floors and footwear 
are not required throughout an entire building or room. In such cases, 
conductive mats or runners may be used. These mats and runners shall 
meet all the specifications and test requirements that apply to 
conductive floors.
    (f) Conductive floor specifications. Conductive floors, made of 
nonsparking materials such as lead, conductive rubber, or conductive 
flooring compositions, shall meet the following requirements:
    (1) The flooring and its grounding system shall provide for 
electrical resistance not to exceed 1 million ohms.
    (2) The surface of the installed floor shall be free from cracks 
and reasonably smooth, and the material shall not slough off, wrinkle, 
or buckle under operating conditions. Conductive tiles are not 
recommended for areas where explosives dust can cause contamination, 
because the large number of joints, and the tendency of tiles to 
loosen, create areas where explosives dust can lodge, not amenable to 
normal cleanup procedures. Where conductive floors and shoes are 
required, the resistance of conductive shoes on a person plus the 
resistance of floor to ground shall not exceed 1 million ohms total. 
Tabletops used with exposed explosives or dusts should be covered with 
a properly grounded conductive material meeting the same requirements 
as those for the flooring. The conductive floors shall be compatible 
with the particular materials to be processed.
    (g) Initial tests of conductive floors shall be followed by others 
at least semiannually. The test results shall be permanently recorded. 
Testing shall proceed only when the room is free from exposed 
explosives and flammable gas mixtures.
    (1) The resistance of the floor shall be more than 5,000 ohms in 
areas with 110 volts service and 10,000 ohms in areas with 220 volts 
service, and less than 1 million ohms in all areas as measured between 
a permanent ground connection and an electrode placed at any point on 
the floor and also as measured between two electrodes placed 3 feet 
apart at any points on the floor. Measurements shall be made at five or 
more locations in each room and at least two of the points shall be 
heavily trafficked areas. If the resistance during a measurement 
changes appreciably with time, the value observed after the voltage has 
been applied for about 5 seconds shall be considered to be the measured 
value. These resistance values do not apply to metallic floors.
    (2) The operation and maintenance of test instruments shall be 
entrusted to competent personnel.
    (h) Humidification. Humidification that maintains relative humidity 
above 60 percent effectively prevents static electricity accumulations 
and subsequent discharges. This technique involves pre-operational 
checks and regular monitoring of the humidity levels throughout the 
day. It cannot be used with metallic powders, some pyrotechnical 
mixtures, and other materials susceptible to spontaneous ignition in 
air with 60 percent relative humidity.
    (i) Ionization. Ionization is electrical neutralization and serves 
as an effective method of removing static charges from certain 
processes and operations. Methods of application can be found in NFPA 
Standard 77, Static Electricity.
    (j) Neither ionization or humidification may be substituted for 
conductive floors (where required).

Subpart M--Safety Requirements for Specific Explosive Materials and 
Operations


Sec. 184.164  General.

    This subpart provides the minimum safety requirements necessary for 
the prevention of mishaps involving specific explosives materials and 
operations that, unless properly controlled, make casualties to 
personnel, material, equipment, and facilities highly probable. They 
apply to similar operations and equipment, specifically addressed or 
not. These requirements, to be used as a basis for developing local 
program requirements, are in no way comprehensive. The contractor is 
responsible for analyzing each operation and developing procedures to 
control or eliminate actual or potential hazards.


Sec. 184.165  Properties of explosives.

    Knowledge of properties of specific types of explosives is critical 
to the establishment of proper hazard controls.
    (a) Properties of initiating explosives. Initiating explosives 
include lead azide, mercury fulminate, lead styphnate, and tetracene. 
They manifest extreme sensitivity to friction, heat and impact. When 
involved in a fire, they can be expected to detonate without burning. 
In storage, initiating explosives shall be kept wet with water or 
water/alcohol mixtures. Every effort shall be made to prevent the 
liquid from freezing; frozen explosives material shall not be handled. 
Emphasis shall be placed upon cleanliness and general housekeeping 
since contamination of these explosives with foreign, particularly 
gritty, material markedly increases their sensitivity. Water used for 
storage shall be free of bacteria-forming impurities which could react 
to form gases. Lead azide shall not be allowed contact with copper, 
zinc, or alloys containing any concentration of such metals because of 
the likely formation of other azides that are more sensitive than the 
original lead azide. Likewise, mercury fulminate shall not be allowed 
contact with aluminum, magnesium, zinc, brass, or bronze.
    (b) Properties of boostering explosives. Explosives used for this 
purpose include tetryl, RDX, PETN, and RDX with added ingredients. 
These explosives have sensitivities between initiating explosives and 
those of explosives used as bursting charges such as TNT. They may be 
ignited by heat, friction, or impact and may detonate when burned in 
large quantities or at too great a depth. Some of these materials are 
toxic when taken internally or by skin contact and special precautions 
are necessary to protect personnel. Local exhaust ventilation, enclosed 
process systems, automatic handling systems, etc., should be used to 
minimize dust in the employee's breathing zone.
    (c) Properties of bursting explosives. Bursting explosives include 
explosive D (ammonium picrate), amatol, picric acid, TNT, tritonal, RDX 
compositions, HMX compositions, torpex, DBX, and HBX. In general, these 
materials are less sensitive than initiating or boostering explosives. 
Alkaline cleaning agents or other alkaline products should not be 
permitted in buildings where large quantities of these explosives are 
handled. Amatol forms sensitive compounds with copper and brass. Where 
explosive D is processed, lead fusible links and solder-type sprinkler 
heads should not be used. DBX is an aluminized explosive that is 
somewhat hygroscopic and reacts with metals in the same manner as 
amatol. HBX is also an aluminized explosive that outgasses when exposed 
to water and may create internal pressure when loaded into ammunition. 
HMX compositions usually result in a very powerful explosive with a 
high degree of thermal stability. Pentolite tends to separate into its 
ingredients (PETN and TNT) and should, therefore, be handled as 
carefully as PETN. Picratol is a mixture of TNT and explosive D; the 
precautions necessary when handling either shall be observed. Picric 
acid is highly acidic, corrosive, and toxic; it shall be isolated from 
lead and lead compounds. Tetrytol is a mixture of tetryl and TNT which 
is stable in storage but exudes at 149  deg.F. Dry tetrytol slightly 
corrodes magnesium and aluminum alloys, and wet tetrytol slightly 
corrodes a copper, brass, aluminum, magnesium, mild steel, and cadmium-
plated mild steel. TNT is stable and does not form sensitive compounds 
with metals. It shall, however, form sensitive compounds in the 
presence of alkalies. It also exhibits well-recognized toxic 
properties. Torpex is an aluminized explosive used mainly in underwater 
ordnance. Non-hygroscopic and noncorrosive, it is stable in storage but 
may outgas (hydrogen) and produce internal pressure when loaded into 
ammunition. Tritonal is a mixture of TNT and aluminum powder and is 
more sensitive to impact than TNT. Tritonal shall not be exposed to 
water. Plastic bonded explosives are conventional high explosives with 
plastic binders such as polystyrene, viton, estane, etc. Their 
sensitivity varies with the composition. The series most frequently 
encountered are identified by prefix PBX or LX and a number.
    (d) Properties of other explosives. Other military explosives 
frequently encountered include black powder and nitroglycerin. Black 
powder is a mixture of potassium or sodium nitrate, charcoal, and 
sulfur, highly sensitive to friction, heat, and impact. It deteriorates 
rapidly on absorption of moisture but retains its explosive properties 
indefinitely if kept dry. Nitroglycerin's extreme sensitivity to impact 
and friction is such that it is manufactured only as needed. Frozen 
nitroglycerin, while less sensitive than liquid, may undergo internal 
changes upon thawing and, if enough heat is generated, may detonate.
    (e) Research of additional properties. The foregoing does not 
comprehensively catalog explosives and properties, but indicates how 
significantly they can differ. For this reason, it is imperative that 
contractors investigate pertinent properties before handling these or 
other explosive materials. Contractors are responsible for 
understanding all aspects of ammunition and explosives needed to 
fulfill contractual obligations.


Sec. 184.166  Handling low-energy initiators.

    Typical precautions, such as shielding and safety glasses, shall be 
supplemented by the following measures, as appropriate, when 
manufacturing, processing, using, or testing low-energy initiators 
(initiated by 0.1 joule of energy or less).
    (a) All metal parts of equipment shall be electrically bonded 
together and grounded.
    (b) Personnel shall wear clothing that prevents generation of 
static electricity. Conductive shoes shall be tested with a resistance 
meter before an operator enters an area where low-energy initiators are 
being processed.
    (c) When low-energy initiators are being handled, personnel shall 
be directly grounded by wrist straps. The resistance reading, taken 
once daily when the operator is wearing the strap, shall be between 
250,000 and one million ohms when measured from opposite hand to 
ground. Special contact creams may be used to decrease the resistance 
to the required value.
    (d) Glass, acrylic, or polycarbonate materials required for 
transparent shielding shall be periodically coated with an anti-static 
material to prevent buildup of static electricity.
    (e) The sounding of a static electricity alarm, installed with the 
setting best able to provide ample warning, signals that work shall 
stop until the problem has been located and corrective action taken.
    (f) Work shall not start in air-conditioned areas until relative 
humidity and temperature have been checked (see Sec. 184.162(h)).
    (g) No metal surface subjected to rubbing or friction shall be 
painted. If a lubricant is necessary, it should be of a composition 
that shall not increase the metal's surface resistance above 25 ohms.
    (h) Work on or with initiators shall be performed in areas equipped 
with conductive floors and table tops. Exceptions may be made with the 
initiators are in their original packaging, or are in part of a 
finished metallic end item affording them complete protection from 
electromagnetic or electrostatic energy.
    (i) Work shall not be done in the vicinity of actual or potential 
electromagnetic or electrostatic fields. Sources of static electricity 
and electromagnetic energy include radio transmission, electrical 
storms, transformer stations, high voltage transmission lines, 
improperly grounded electric circuitry, rotating equipment, belts, etc. 
Adequate lightning protection and grounding and adequate resistances 
for fixed sources of energy shall be established for locations with 
low-energy initiator operations. These shall be shielded to afford 
protection against local mobile radio transmission.
    (j) Electrical equipment shall be located out of the range of an 
operator working with a low-energy initiator. With soldering irons, it 
may be advisable to ground and limit energy to levels below initiating 
thresholds.
    (k) When not part of an end item or end item subassembly, 
initiators shall be transported only when packed according to the 
latest packing specifications for low-energy initiators.


Sec. 184.167  Laboratory operations.

    (a) Research and development laboratories and testing facilities 
constitute a separate category involving guidance, restrictions, and 
relief from certain requirements prescribed in this part.
    (b) Each operation at facilities designed for blast and fragment 
confinement shall be reviewed to ensure that the explosives limits are 
within the laboratory or test area capability. Explosives limits and 
safe separation distances shall be adjusted as the capability to 
confine fragment and blast decreases.
    (c) A total-confinement facility shall be inspected after a 
detonation to ensure structural integrity, possibly reducing the 
explosives limits to prevent future blasts from exceeding the retention 
capability.
    (d) Each proposed program for the laboratory or test facility shall 
be reviewed to determine all potential hazards. Considerations shall 
include:
    (1) Structural limitations of the facility.
    (2) Remote control viewing and operating equipment, if required.
    (3) Special safety precautions for personnel elsewhere in the 
building.
    (4) Safe separation distances.
    (5) Required deviations from other sections of this part.
    (6) SOPs, which shall at a minimum include the following:
    (i) Protective clothing.
    (ii) Warning signals.
    (iii) Fire and other emergency procedures.
    (iv) Special testing of equipment needed before operations (such as 
stray voltage and calibration checks).
    (v) Removal of all explosives not needed for the operation.
    (vi) Arrangements for overnight storage of necessary explosives.
    (vii) Inspection and cleanup procedures after a test or detonation.
    (e) Laboratories shall use no more explosives than absolutely 
required for a given operation. Particularly hazardous laboratory 
operations involving new or relatively unknown explosives should be 
done by remote control. Operational shields shall be used in these 
operations and in new or untested applications of explosives.
    (f) When laboratories and testing facilities are shielded properly 
to prevent the release of fragments, the minimum incremental safe 
separation distances of Appendices A and B to this subpart shall apply 
to operations, facilities, and personnel.
    (g) If the proposed storage facilities will confine the blast and 
fragments, or if the incremental safe separation distances are as 
indicated in Sec. 184.167(f), up to 15 pounds of explosives, may be 
stored without consideration of storage compatibility. However, the 
operation shall be reviewed, as stated in Sec. 184.167(d).


Sec. 184.168  Electrical testing of ammunition and ammunition 
components.

    (a) Type of test equipment. Electrical and electronics test 
equipment should use the weakest possible power source. Batteries shall 
be preferred to 110-volt power sources. No Power source should be 
capable of initiating the explosives item being tested. When exceptions 
shall be made because more power is needed, steps shall be taken to 
prevent delivery of power to the explosives item in quantities 
sufficient to initiate. Safeguards shall be provided against the 
possibility of human error.
    (b) Layout of test equipment. Test equipment shall be placed in 
hazardous atmospheres only when absolutely necessary. Unless the test 
equipment is, under all circumstances, incapable of initiating the test 
item, operational shields are required for personnel protection. The 
most reliable way of attaining and retaining this initiation 
incapability is by protecting the test equipment, including leads, from 
electromagnetic induction and radiation fields and electrostatic 
energy, and by providing the test equipment with a weak power source.
    (c) Use of test equipment. Test equipment shall be used only as 
intended by original design. The equipment shall be maintained by 
qualified personnel, with operator adjustments limited to those 
required for testing.


Sec. 184.169  Heat-conditioning of explosives and ammunition.

    (a) All ovens, conditioning chambers, dry houses, and similar 
devices and facilities shall be provided with dual independent fail-
safe heat controls. For devices or facilities heated by steam only, the 
requirement for dual heat controls shall be satisfied if the steam 
pressure is controlled by a reducing valve (maximum pressure of 5 psi, 
unless otherwise authorized) on the main building steam supply, and a 
thermostat.
    (b) Heat-conditioning devices shall be able to discharge 
overpressure from an internal explosion. Barriers or catching devices 
shall restrain blowout panels, doors, and other venting apparatus, to 
prevent excessive displacement during an accidental explosion.
    (c) Heat-conditioning devices shall be vented to permit any gases 
produced to escape.
    (d) Steam should be used to heat conditioning devices; when 
electric heating elements are unavoidable, they shall be located where 
there is no possibility of contact with explosives or flammable 
materials.
    (e) The blades of a fan in a heat-conditioning device shall be of 
non-sparking material; its electric motor shall be installed 
externally. The air shall not recirculate if the heating surfaces 
exceed 228 deg.F or if the air contains materials that could collect on 
the heating coils.
    (f) Electrical equipment and fixtures in or on a heat-conditioning 
device used for explosives or flammable material shall be approved for 
use in the hazardous atmosphere in question.
    (g) The interior of a heat-conditioning device shall be free of 
crevices, openings, and other protuberances not easily cleaned, where 
dust or flammable material could lodge.
    (h) All noncurrent-carrying metal parts of a heat-conditioning 
device shall be interconnected and electronically grounded.
    (i) Heat-conditioning devices should be installed in isolated 
locations, set up to give personnel maximum protection from the effects 
of an incident. When warranted, operational shields and other personnel 
protection measures shall be used.
    (j) Safe separation distances or protective construction shall 
ensure against an explosives incident in one heat conditioning device 
from propagating to others. No hazardous materials shall be placed in a 
room or cubicle containing a heat-conditioning device, unless it can be 
shown that an accident in the conditioning device would not involve the 
other materials.
    (k) Heat-conditioning device operating procedures require:
    (1) Limiting the explosive materials in the device to the type and 
quantity authorized for the specific device.
    (2) Familiarity with the critical parameters of explosives 
compositions before processing in a heat-conditioning device. The 
device shall not exceed limits established for the hazardous 
composition being conditioned.
    (3) Checking heat-conditioning device temperatures at specified 
intervals during operation.
    (4) Cleaning the conditioning devices, ducts, vacuum lines, and 
other parts of the equipment subject to contamination by hazardous 
materials, before introducing a different item or composition for 
conditioning.


Sec. 184.170  Spray painting.

    (a) Loaded ammunition shall not be electrostatically spray painted.
    (b) Water wash or dry filter-type spray booths shall be used for 
loaded ammunition.
    (c) Controls for ventilating fan motors for spray painting booths 
shall be interlocked with the controls for the paint sprayer. With this 
arrangement, failure of the ventilating system will shut off power to 
the paint sprayer.
    (d) High-voltage electrically powered paint-spraying equipment 
shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of National Fire 
Protection Association, Standard No. 33,\19\ Static Electricity, as 
applicable.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \19\Copies may be obtained from the National Fire Protection 
Association, Batterymarch Park, Attn: National Fire Codes 
Subscription--Service Department, Quincy, MA 02269.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (e) Conventional equipment used for spray painting in standard 
spray booths shall meet the requirements of NFPA Standard No. 33. The 
nozzles of all spray guns shall be electrically grounded because of the 
static electricity generated.


Sec. 184.171   Drying freshly painted loaded ammunition.

    Ovens used in drying loaded ammunition shall comply with the 
National Fire Codes. Other requirements include the following:
    (a) Automatic thermostatic controls shall regulate temperatures 
once they reach a maximum determined by the ammunition and explosives 
involved. It is recommended that temperatures not exceed 170  deg.F.
    (b) Automatic internal sprinkler systems shall equip each oven and 
shall conform with NFPA Standard No. 13,\20\ Installation of Sprinkler 
Systems. Automatic operation of the system may be accomplished by 
approved electrical heat-actuated devices, installed as required for 
NEC-defined class I, division 1, group D, hazardous locations. Refer to 
NFPA Standard No. 70, National Electric Code.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \20\See footnote 15 to Sec. 184.170.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Hot air or other means may supply heat, provided ammunition and 
explosives are kept from contact with coils, radiators, and heating 
elements.
    (d) In case of power failure, the heat supply for any conveyor 
system shall automatically stop.
    (e) Electric drying units that are not approved for use in class I 
hazardous locations should be designed so that solvent vapor 
concentration in the oven is kept below 25 percent of its lower 
explosive limit.


Sec. 184.172   Rework, disassembly, renovation, and maintenance.

    (a) Rework and disassembly operations shall not usually be 
conducted with other inert or explosives operations. However, when 
concurrent scheduling cannot be avoided, operations shall be 
sufficiently distanced from one another to protect adjacent personnel 
and equipment, and prevent propagation to adjacent explosives. Such 
separation may be accomplished with Q/D, operational shielding, or the 
remote control of operations.
    (b) The operator and all other personnel shall be fully protected 
during rework and disassembly operations known or expected to use force 
exceeding assembly specifications.
    (c) If A&E items have been assembled normally, the same equipment, 
tools, methods, and applied forces may be used to disassemble them. In 
such cases, only that personnel protection required during the assembly 
operations is also required during the rework or disassembly 
operations. Care shall be taken, however, to ascertain that the 
assembly was normal and that the surfaces to be separated are not 
corroded and not sealed with metallic applicants.
    (d) When renovation or maintenance not adequately addressed in the 
contract is required, the contractor shall request specific safety 
guidance through contract channels.


Sec. 184.173   Munitions loading and associated operations.

    (a) Screening and blending high explosives. Bulk high explosives 
intended for processing shall be screened or visually inspected and 
passed over a magnetic separator to detect extraneous material for 
removal. Screening equipment shall not subject explosives to pinching, 
friction, or impact. Explosives screening units without exhaust 
ventilation shall be thoroughly cleaned as often as necessary and after 
every shift, to prevent hazardous accumulations of explosives dusts.
    (b) Screening and blending initiating explosives. Suitable 
operational shields shall be provided for screening and blending 
operations involving initiating explosives, or operators shall be 
located at intraline distance from screening and blending facilities.
    (c) Explosives melting. (1) Temperatures used for melting 
explosives and keeping explosives molten should not exceed 228  deg.F. 
However, steam pressures up to 15 psi (250  deg.F) may be used to melt 
composition B and similar binary explosives and to maintain a molten 
state.
    (2) Melt unit valves and melt mix draw-off or other lines carrying 
molten explosives shall provide against friction or impact capable of 
initiating the explosives. Diaphragm-type valves should be disassembled 
and inspected regularly. Damaged or old diaphragms shall be replaced so 
no cracks allowing metal-to-metal contact can develop. Draw-off lines 
should be constructed to prevent exposure of threads, fastening screws, 
and bolts, both outside and between the flanges. A sealing compound 
should be used to prevent explosives seepage or vapor condensation on 
the contacting surfaces of the bolts, flanges, screws, and nuts. Melt 
mix kettle draw-off pipes should be electrically connected to items 
being filled during draw-off operations. Items shall be individually 
grounded unless tests show that grounding through contact surface is 
adequate.
    (3) Wet-type collectors effectively remove dust and vapors from 
exhausted air, and are recommended for melt mix exhausting systems. 
Water in the wet collector will not be recirculated unless the system 
removes hazardous suspensions. Water retaining such explosives shall be 
discharged to a sump designed to keep such explosives wet. The exhaust 
and collecting equipment shall be regularly inspected and flushed of 
explosives accumulations. When protective construction prevents 
propagation of a detonation between melt kettles, a complete dust and 
vapor collection system shall equip each kettle.
    (d) Agitation. Agitation nitrators, washers, and other machines 
which, because of the hazard of the process and the possibility of the 
process material decomposing, are equipped with mechanical agitators, 
shall have at least two means of agitation, each operating from an 
independent power source to maintain agitation if one fails.
    (e) Machining of explosives. (1) High explosives, cased or uncased, 
that may be machined without special personnel protection and without 
coolant, if no metal-to-metal contact is involved, include: Amatol, 
Octol, TNT, composition B, explosive D, and RDX/TNT compositions 
containing 60 percent or less RDX.
    (2) High explosives, cased or uncased, that may be machined without 
special personnel protection provided a coolant is directed on the tool 
and explosives at their point of contact and no metal-to-metal contact 
is involved, include: baratols, pentolite (50-50 and 10-90), tetrytol, 
and cyclotols (composition B less than 60-40; that is, 70-30).
    (3) When essential, other high explosives may be machined by remote 
control, with the operator protected by a suitable operational shield; 
however, initiating explosives should not be machined if desired shapes 
or sizes can be obtained by other means, such as forming.
    (4) When an unprotected operator is involved in drilling, only a 
single drill, with a diameter greater than 1/4 inch, shall be used.
    (5) Machining of cased explosives is permitted in an operation 
requiring removal of metal before or after tool contact with the 
explosives filler, provided that operators are protected by operational 
shields and perform it by remote control.
    (6) Where wet machining is to be performed, automatic interlocking 
devices shall prevent machining from starting until coolant is flowing. 
These controls shall also be capable of stopping the machining if the 
coolant flow is interrupted. When coolant flow must stop for adjustment 
of machining tools, positive means shall be devised to ensure that flow 
of coolant is restored and all automatic control devices are operating 
before machining can resume.
    (7) The lineal and rotational speeds of tools used for the 
machining of explosives shall be maintained at the minimum necessary to 
perform the operation safely and efficiently. These shall not exceed 
210 linear feet per minute nor 525 revolutions per minute. The rate of 
feed should likewise be the lowest consistent with safety and 
efficiency, based on the explosive materials being machined.
    (8) Pneumatically or hydraulically driven machine tools are 
preferred for all machining operations on high explosives. Control 
mechanisms for hydraulic and pneumatic equipment shall prevent 
unauthorized personnel from tampering with speeds.
    (9) In all machining operations on cased or uncased high 
explosives, procedures during tool adjustments shall prevent contact 
between moving parts of the machining equipment and metallic parts of 
the case or holding fixtures.
    (10) Machining tools shall be compatible with the explosives being 
processed. Dull or damaged tools shall not be used for machining high 
explosives.
    (11) The explosives products resulting from machining operations 
shall be removed by an exhaust system meeting NEC requirements, or by 
immersion in a stream of water flowing away from the operation. Refer 
to NFPA Standard No. 70.
    (12) Machining of explosives of questionable quality during an 
ammunition and explosives demilitarization process shall be 
accomplished by remote control, with operators protected by operational 
shields.
    (f) Assembly and crimping of complete rounds. Each assembly and 
crimping operation shall be separated from other operations by 
structures or shielding sufficient to contain any fragments produced.
    (g) Pressing explosives. (1) Each pelleting operation involving 
black powder, tetryl, TNT, or other explosives of similar sensitivity; 
and each operation involving the pressing or reconsolidating of 
explosives, shall be conducted in a separate room or cubicle having 
walls of sufficient strength to withstand an explosion of all 
explosives present.
    (2) Pressing or reconsolidating explosives in small caliber rounds, 
tracer bodies, tetryl lead-ins, detonators, and similar items shall be 
performed on machines having consolidating stations designed to 
preclude propagation between stations and provide adequate operator 
protection. Operators shall be behind tested protective barriers during 
such operations.
    (3) Punches and dies shall be in matched sets that have passed 
inspection. All punches and dies used in explosives pressing operations 
shall undergo a rigid test, such as a magnaflux or X-ray, before use 
and regularly thereafter. In a pelleting press, punches and dies shall 
be replaced with matched sets checked and calibrated by a control 
laboratory.
    (h) Protection of primers. Equipment, transportation, and 
operations shall be designed to protect loose primers or primers in 
components from accidental impact or pressure. When feasible, a 
protecting cap shall cover the primer.
    (i) Explosives washout and flashing facilities. When washout 
operations are placed in operating buildings or other locations, they 
shall be separated from other operations by operational shields or 
proper distances. Ammunition items subjected to washout operations 
shall be subsequently inspected to ensure against residual explosives 
contamination. When contamination is confirmed, decontamination shall 
precede disposal. Decontamination of ammunition items by flashing 
(exposure to flame) shall be performed at the explosives destruction 
(burning) area or in approved incinerators.
    (j) Heat sealing equipment. Electric heat sealing machines should 
be separated from other operations. Temperature limits for heat sealing 
equipment shall be established, with a safety factor below the ignition 
temperature of explosives, propellants, or pyrotechnics involved.
    (k) Rebowling operations. Rebowling operations involving lead azide 
and primer mixes shall be performed by remote control, with the 
operator protected by an operational shield.
    (l) Thread cleaning. (1) Nonferrous picks shall be used for thread 
cleaning. Stainless steel brushes may be used to clean threads of 
explosives-loaded projectiles if a fuze seat liner separates the thread 
cleaning operation from the explosive charge. Operators do not need 
operational shields; however, thread cleaning operations should be 
separated from unrelated operations.
    (2) Power-actuated thread-chasing tools may be used to clean loaded 
projectiles when threads are imperfect because of previously applied 
sealers, provided the operation is performed within a separate cubicle 
and by remote control. Hand-operated thread-chasing tools may be used 
when no explosives are present in the threads.
    (3) Neither correcting cross threads nor thread cutting shall be 
performed on projectiles containing explosives. Straightening crossed 
threads is considered thread cutting.
    (m) Profile and alignment gaging operations. (1) Operational 
shields shall enclose each profile and alignment gaging operation, 
excluding small arms ammunition, to protect adjacent operations. The 
layout of the equipment and the operational procedures shall be 
developed to minimize personnel injury and property damage in case of 
accident.
    (2) During chamber gaging of high caliber fixed ammunition, the 
gage should be pointed toward a dividing wall or other barrier and the 
round inserted and removed by the same operator. In no case shall the 
round be left in the gage. Rounds of mortar ammunition shall be gaged 
before attaching propellant increments and, unless prohibited by the 
design characteristics, before assembly of the ignition system.

 Appendix A to Subpart M of Part 184.--Hazard Division 1.1--Laboratories
                                   Q/D                                  
------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Quality (lbs)                       Distance (ft)\1\       
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                          Inhabited   Public            
             Over                 Not     building    traffic  Intraline
                                  over    distance     route            
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.............................        1          40        25        20 
1.............................        2          50        30        25 
2.............................        5          70        40        30 
5.............................       10          90        55        35 
10............................       20         110        65        45 
20............................       30         125        75        50 
30............................       40         140        85        55 
40............................       50         150        90       60  
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\The distance above may be used only when structures, blast mats, and 
  so forth, can completely contain fragments and debris. If fragments   
  cannot be contained or the quantity of high explosives exceeds 50     
  pounds, then the distances shall be obtained from the Q/D appendices  
  of Subpart F of this part.                                            


 Appendix B to Subpart M of Part 184.--Hazard Division 1.3--Laboratories
                                   Q/D                                  
------------------------------------------------------------------------
              Quantity (lbs)                       Distance (ft)        
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                           Inhabited   Public           
              Over                  Not     building  traffic  Intraline
                                    over    distance   route            
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0...............................        5         10       10        10 
5...............................       10         15       15        15 
10..............................       20         20       20        20 
20..............................       30         25       25        25 
30..............................       50         30       30        30 
50..............................       80         35       35        35 
80..............................      100         40       40        40 
100.............................      150         45       45        45 
150.............................      200         50       50        50 
------------------------------------------------------------------------

Subpart N--Testing Requirements


Sec. 184.175  Program requirements.

    The contractor is responsible for the safety of testing programs 
and shall designate an individual to be responsible for each program. 
Technical information about the ammunition items, explosives, and 
weapon systems shall be considered so that the required safety measures 
may be engineered into the test plans.


Sec. 184.176  Operating precautions.

    Special safety precautions to be considered during SOP development:
    (a) Protection for percussion elements, i.e., primers, caps, etc., 
shall be provided in the design of equipment, transportation, and 
operations to protect them from accidental initiation.
    (b) Cartridges and projectiles larger than 60mm, when hand carried, 
shall be handled one at a time.
    (c) Fuzed projectiles shall not be handled by the fuzes alone.
    (d) Powder charges shall be transported in closed containers to 
prevent accidental ignition.
    (e) Only trained personnel shall perform operations on explosives-
loaded ammunition components.
    (f) No work, adjustment, or observation should be permitted on a 
weapon system that is loaded and ready for firing, except to check and 
adjust azimuth and elevation. In no case shall a lanyard be attached 
until the piece is ready to be fired. No one shall step over the 
lanyard once it is attached. On weapons equipped with safety locks, the 
lock may be released after the lanyard has been attached. In the case 
of small arms, the bolt shall be kept open at all times except where 
actually firing.
    (g) Ammunition and explosives material, except inert components, 
shall not be delivered to machine shops or other locations not 
specifically designated for this work or modification without the 
approval by responsible contractor authority.
    (h) The premature or improper mixing of fuels and oxidizers, as 
associated with liquid propellants, shall be avoided. This applies 
particularly at test stands and test facilities when transferring 
liquid propellants.
    (i) Remote control of mechanical devices shall replace manual 
activation whenever possible.
    (j) Guns operated by remote control shall be equipped with cease 
fire devices for halting operations when a hazardous condition occurs. 
These devices shall be independent of the regular controls so 
operations can be stopped if the regular controls should fail.


Sec. 184.177  Test hazards.

    (a) Inert-loaded or minimum-charged ammunition should be used in 
lieu of explosives-loaded items when the test objectives are not 
affected.
    (b) When temperature-conditioning rooms or boxes are utilized, the 
following shall apply:
    (1) Firings from temperature-controlled facilities shall be on an 
azimuth approved by the contractor's responsible representative. No 
weapon shall be fired in an enclosed area unless the muzzle is located 
outside the port opening. Destruction tests, excess pressure tests, and 
tests of classes of guns known to be unsafe (where the possibility of 
breech failures exists) shall be conducted with portable shields or 
equivalents placed on each side of the breech and with a protective 
plate to the rear of the mount, forming a barrier.
    (2) All equipment used in the temperature conditioning of 
explosives shall comply with Q/D requirements, unless in explosives 
buildings.
    (3) Hot temperature conditioning equipment shall have dual, 
independent, automatic controls to prevent the desired testing 
temperature from being exceeded. Controls shall be designed to fail in 
the off position.
    (c) No firing shall be permitted unless people in the area are 
under adequate cover.


Sec. 184.178  Test clearance.

    (a) Clearance, to be obtained before performing each test, shall be 
granted only by responsible contractor personnel with jurisdiction in 
the danger area where the test is to be performed. When reburied, air 
space clearances shall be obtained in accordance with local and Federal 
Aviation Administration Handbook\21\ requirements.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \21\Copies may be obtained from Superintendent of Documents, 
U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) The contractor personnel responsible for the test areas where 
the weapon system is located shall obtain the necessary coordination 
and clearance from their counterparts when a test may encroach upon 
other danger areas.
    (c) To ensure that danger areas are clear of personnel and ships, 
vessels, and other craft, clearance for impact and airburst danger 
areas shall be obtained before firing on or over water.


Sec. 184.179  Warning and communication systems.

    A warming system shall be established for each testing program, 
comprising some combination of flags, lights, and sound signals. If 
personnel authorized to enter a test area are not familiar with the 
system, they shall be escorted by knowledgeable personnel. Test areas 
should be equipped with adequate communication facilities, such as 
telephone and radio.


Sec. 184.180  Specific items for test.

    The safety requirements for testing specific items of ammunition 
vary according to the type of ammunition, design features, explosives 
characteristics, test facilities, climate and terrain environment, and 
other related factors. These factors shall be considered and specific 
test criteria included in the test plan.
    (a) Recoilless weapons. (1) All personnel shall be protected 
against breech blast and malfunction of the round. The danger area in 
open range firing shall extend to the rear of the weapon: 300 feet for 
calibers up to and including 75mm and 450 feet for all others. The 
danger zone may be reduced only when effective barricades confine the 
blast effect.
    (2) The safety switch on a rifle shall not be advanced to the 
firing position until the breechblock is closed and all preparations 
for firing are completed.
    (3) Because the blast from salvo firing can obscure a misfire, 
ripple firing is preferred. When salvo firing cannot be avoided, a wait 
of at least 2 minutes shall precede the opening of any breechblock 
after a one-volley salvo.
    (4) Unburned propellant from any test firing shall not accumulate 
in the surrounding area. Safe methods shall be developed for cleanup, 
decontamination, and disposal.
    (b) Pyrotechnics. Shielded enclosures should be used when testing 
pyrotechnic items inside a building. Enclosures should be vented to the 
outside, preferably through the roof, to prevent exposure of personnel 
to flame, toxic gases, and heat, and to prevent rupture of the 
enclosures.
    (c) Static tests of propellant motors and engines. Static test 
stands are used for solid propellant motors and liquid propellant 
engines in any combinations. Fire, blast, and fragments shall be 
considered in establishing safe distances. Static test stands shall be 
designed to restrain motors and engines undergoing tests.


Sec. 184.181  Malfunctions.

    For the purposes of this part, malfunction applies to the 
ammunition and the weapon systems or pieces involved.
    (a) Cook-off. Automatic function, or cook-off, of a round left in a 
hot gun for an extended period is possible in tests involving a high 
rate of fire, particularly with machine guns and anti-aircraft guns. 
This possibility largely depends upon the gun's rate of heat 
dissipation. High air temperature, low wind velocity, low elevation of 
the gun, and confinement of the gun are also factors. To prevent cook-
off, the barrel of the empty gun shall be frequently cooled. If a round 
is retained or remains in a hot gun with the breech closed, people in 
the vicinity shall remain under cover until the gun has cooled. If a 
round jams and the breech fails to close, personnel in the danger zone 
shall take cover and remain there until the gun has cooled.
    (1) Adequate cooling periods are:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Time   
                       Type of cooling                         (minutes)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Water.......................................................           5
Air (machine guns)..........................................          15
Air (other guns)............................................          30
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) The danger zone for personnel in the vicinity of the gun firing 
explosive ammunition shall be:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Radius\1\
                         Type of gun                            (feet)  
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Machine guns................................................         600
Less than or equal to 75mm..................................       1,200
Over 75mm through 105mm.....................................       1,800
Over 105mm..................................................       2,400
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\Radii may be halved when ball ammunition or rounds with inert        
  projectiles are used. The use of barricades to confine blast effects  
  may also reduce the danger zone.                                      

    (3) The danger zone down range shall be maintained as for actual 
firing until the danger of cook-off has passed.
    (b) Premature burst. If a premature burst occurs, the test shall be 
suspended or the lateral limits of the danger zone increased in 
accordance with prescribed safety distances before the test continues. 
The increased lateral limits shall be maintained until the particular 
test is completed.
    (c) Misfire. After a misfire, all persons shall stand clear of the 
breech, in case the round functions and the gun recoils. All electrical 
connections that could cause firing of the gun shall be disconnected. 
The appropriate danger zone for the actual firing shall be maintained 
during the waiting period, until the danger of cook-off has passed. The 
removed round shall be immediately placed where subsequent detonation 
could not cause injury or damage. In the case of misfires involving 
small-caliber rockets and small-arms ammunition, the rounds should be 
immersed in water (unless the results of prior analyses or 
investigations preclude such practice). Misfire procedures shall be 
established to include attempts to refire weapons, waiting periods, 
cooling, operational precautions, and disposition of ammunition. Once 
these procedures have been carried out, the firing pin and mechanism 
shall be checked, and the barrel of the gun examined to ensure that it 
is clear; then firing may resume. Appendices A through H of this 
subpart provide general guidance on what to do when misfires occur.
    (d) Hangfire. A hangfire is a delayed firing occurring as a short 
time lag between the striking of the firing pin on the primer and the 
ignition of the primer, igniter, or propellant. All hangfires shall be 
immediately reported to responsible personnel. This is particularly 
important for early detection of trends. In these cases, the firing of 
a particular lot of ammunition shall be suspended unless responsible 
authorities advise differently.


Sec. 184.182  Ammunition and dud recovery.

    Open-air test area recovery requirements follow:
    (a) Making. When projectiles or bombs with live fuzes, live 
boosters, or high explosive are fired for impact on, or burst over, a 
recovery field, observers stationed in a protected place shall record 
the location of duds and exploded rounds. Before leaving a recovery 
field or impact area, personnel in charge of cleaning the fields shall 
mark duds and exploded rounds with the appropriate color-coded flag or 
device. Where locations cannot be marked, fields shall be posted with 
warning signs and entry shall be restricted.
    (b) Policing. Personnel shall be prohibited from touching or in any 
way disturbing dud ammunition. Unfuzed or inert-fuzed live ammunition 
or ammunition components that have failed to function during a test 
shall be recovered only in accordance with the SOP developed by the 
contractor.
    (c) Destruction. All types of ammunition and explosives shall be 
disposed of in accordance with this part, contract requirements, or 
instructions provided by the contracting officer.


Sec. 184.183  Personnel shelters.

    (a) General. Responsible personnel shall require all within the 
danger zone to take cover during tests where fragmentation might occur. 
The person charged with attaching the lanyard shall be the last to 
leave the gun emplacement, and shall advise the responsible person that 
all personnel are clear before any firing.
    (b) Portable bombproofs for fire observation. All portable 
bombproofs used for fire observation shall be on the gun side of the 
impact point; no closer than 200 yards from the impact point; and in 
the sectors between compass headings 45 and 80 degrees and between 280 
and 315 degrees (compass centered on impact point with 0 and 360 
degrees at the firing point). When the impact will result in 
fragmentation, the bombproof should be located behind the firing line 
in the sectors between compass headings 100 and 135 degrees and between 
225 and 260 degrees (compass centered on firing point with 0 and 360 
degrees at the impact point). It should be so oriented with respect to 
the impact that no wall surface is presented to fragmentation at an 
angle greater than 60 degrees. This can usually be done by centering 
one intersection of the walls of a square or U type bombproof, or 
pointing the apex of a pointed V type, toward the impact point. Under 
no circumstances shall the orientation expose the rear of the bombproof 
to gunfire and fragmentation. Observations from bombproofs shall be 
indirect, using mirrors, periscopes, or other suitable devices. Refer 
to Appendix I to this subpart.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
            Type                   Location and use            Wall     
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Portable reinforced          At firing fronts when        12 inches.    
 concrete bombproof (open     alongside or to rear of                   
 back)\1\.                    gun and offset from line                  
                              of fire for any class of                  
                              fire.                                     
Armored railway mounts.....  At firing fronts when        armorplate.   
                              alongside or to rear of                   
                              gun and offset from line                  
                              of fire for any class of                  
                              fire.                                     
Portable boiler-plate        At firing fronts for inert   \3/4\-inch    
 barrier.                     shrapnel or low explosive    steel plate. 
                              up to and including 155 mm                
                              and all small-arms                        
                              ammunition.                               
Portable armor-plate         At firing fronts when to     3-inch        
 barrier.                     rear and offset from line    armorplate.  
                              of fire for any classes                   
                              except high explosive or                  
                              plate firing.                             
Armorplate sheets..........  At firing fronts for         \1/2\-inch    
                              grenades, primer             armorplate.  
                              detonators, and ground                    
                              troop signals.                            
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\This type may be used for fire observation in the field, provided the
  bombproof is offset from the line depending upon the caliber of guns  
  used, and in accordance with Sec. 184.182(c).                         

Sec. 184.184  Testing of ammunition or devices for small arms.

    (a) Ammunition shall not be placed in any gun until it is in firing 
position and ready to shoot.
    (b) Safety devices on gun mounts and ranges shall be kept in 
operating condition and tested before use. If a malfunction occurs, 
test operations shall cease and a report made to the responsible 
supervisors.
    (c) Every weapon removed from a firing position, storage case, or 
rack; or picked up by any operator, shall be inspected for the presence 
of ammunition in the chamber, magazine, or feed mechanism, and for 
obstruction in the bore.
    (d) The chamber, magazine, and feed mechanism of all guns should be 
open during handling and transportation. When practicable, a safety 
block should be used in the chambers of weapons.
    (e) Primers of misfired rounds may be hypersensitive; precautions 
should be taken during their removal from the gun, handling, and 
disposal.
    (f) Firing on ballistic ranges, expect in function and casualty 
tests, shall be from fixed rests.
    (g) When sand butts are used to stop bullets, a reinforced concrete 
wall should be constructed at sufficient distance behind the retaining 
wall to permit inspection. This is necessary because bullets tend to 
tunnel through the sand and penetrate the retaining wall after 
continued firing. To discover any such penetration, the inner face of 
the second wall should be inspected frequently. If terrain effectively 
protects the rear of the range, no concrete wall is necessary.
    (h) Because bullets tend to ricochet from a sand bank, the roofs of 
enclosed ranges should be protected, to prevent penetration.
    (i) When water traps are used to receive a fired bullet, interlocks 
shall be provided to prevent firing of the test weapon if water 
pressure failure occurs.
    (j) Unburnt propellant from any test firing shall not accumulate in 
the surrounding area. Safe methods shall be developed for cleanup, 
decontamination and disposal.


Sec. 184.185  Velocity and pressure tests.

    Special high pressure tests or tests of unknown pressure ammunition 
shall be performed only when personnel are protected against injury 
from gun failures. Operational shields or remote control firing of guns 
serves this purpose.


Sec. 184.186  Primer drop tests.

    (a) Cases continuing live primers shall be marked and separated 
from those containing fired primers.
    (b) The collecting tube and areas where primer dust could 
accumulate shall be regularly inspected and cleaned.

BILLING CODE 5000-04-M

TP16DE94.005


TP16DE94.006


TP16DE94.007


TP16DE94.008


TP16DE94.009


TP16DE94.010


TP16DE94.011


TP16DE94.012


TP16DE94.013

      

BILLION CODE 5000-04-C

Subpart O--Collection and Destruction Requirements for Ammunition 
and Explosives


Sec. 184.188  General.

    This subpart provides safety requirements for the collection and 
destruction of ammunition and explosives. At this writing, the 
Environmental Protection Agency is developing rules which apply to each 
contractor beyond the scope of this part. Explosive safety should not 
be compromised while meeting environmental considerations.


Sec. 184.189  Protection during disposal operations.

    (a) Operational shields and special clothing shall protect 
personnel in facilities with explosives materials. Fragmentation 
hazards require, at a minimum, overhead and frontal protection for 
personnel. Shelters should be located at the inhabited building 
distance appropriate for the quantity and type of materials being 
detonated. Personnel shall use such protective measures when destroying 
explosive materials by detonation and when burning explosive materials 
that may detonate. Personnel shall not approach the burning site, but 
shall wait until the fire is out.
    (b) Personnel shall never work alone during disposal and 
destruction operations. Warning sings or roadblocks shall restrict the 
area. One person, available in an emergency, should observe from a safe 
distance while another performs the operations.


Sec. 184.190  Collection of ammunition and explosives.

    (a) Water-soluble materials. Enough water should be used in 
neutralizing ammonium picrate (explosive D), black powder, and other 
soluble materials to ensure their complete dissolution. As little 
material as practicable should be dissolved at one time. Sweeping 
floors before washing them down reduces the amount of dissolved 
material in the wash water. When uncertainty exists concerning the 
purity and composition of wash water, experts shall be consulted.
    (b) Solid wastes. Explosive-contaminated solid waste material shall 
be collected; placed in closed containers; and swiftly removed to 
buildings for treatment or holding, or to the burning ground for 
destruction.
    (c) Explosives dusts. (1) High explosives dusts such as TNT, 
tetryl, explosive D, composition B, and pentolite should be removed by 
a vacuum system. A ``wet collector'' that moistens the dust near the 
point of intake and keeps it wet until the dust is removed for disposal 
is preferred for all but explosive D, which should be collected in a 
dry system.
    (2) More sensitive explosives such as black powder, lead azide, 
mercury fulminate, tracer, igniter, incendiary compositions, and 
pyrotechnic materials may be collected by vacuum, provided they are 
kept wet close to the point of intake. Collect each type, representing 
a different hazard, separately, so that black powder, for example, 
cannot mix with lead azide. Provision should be made for releasing any 
gases that form. The use of vacuum systems for collecting these more 
sensitive materials should be confined to operations involving small 
quantities of explosives, that is, operations with fuzes, detonators, 
small-arms ammunition, and black powder igniters. To minimize the fire 
and explosion hazard, collection of scrap pyrotechnic, tracer, flare, 
and similar mixtures in No. 10 mineral motor oil or equivalent is 
required. Materials collected in the dry state shall be placed in an 
oil-containing receptacle available at each operation throughout the 
shift. The oil level should be about 1 inch above the level of any 
pyrotechnic mixture in the container. Containers of scrap explosive 
shall be removed from the operating buildings for disposal at least 
once per shift. Applicably rated class B firefighting equipment shall 
be available when oil is used.
    (d) Design and operation of collection systems. (1) Collection 
systems and chambers shall be designed to prevent pinching thin layers 
of explosives or explosive dust between metal parts. Pipes or ducts 
used to convey dusts require flanged, welded, or rubber connections. 
Threaded connections are prohibited. The system shall prevent 
explosives dusts from accumulating in parts outside the collection 
chamber. Pipes or ducts conveying high explosives shall have long 
radius bends. Systems for propellant powder may use short radius bends 
provided they are stainless steel, with polished interior. Vacuum 
application points should be kept to a minimum. Each room requiring 
vacuum collection should have a separate exhaust line to the primary 
collection chamber; if this is not possible, no more than two bays 
shall be serviced by a common header. Wet primary collectors are 
preferred. The length of vacuum line from points of application of 
vacuum to the wet collectors should be short. A single secondary 
collector shall service as few primary collectors as possible. Not more 
than two dry primary collectors shall be connected to a single 
secondary collector (wet or dry type). If an operation does not create 
a dust concentration potentially posing a severe health hazard, manual 
operation of the suction hose to remove explosives dust is preferred, 
since permanent attachment to the explosive dust-producing machine 
increases the likelihood of propagation through the collection system 
of a detonation at the machine. Manually operated hose connections to 
explosive dust-producing machines should not interconnect.
    (2) Two collection chambers shall be serially installed ahead of 
the pump or exhauster to prevent explosives dust from entering the 
vacuum producer in a dry vacuum collection system.
    (3) Slide valves for vacuum collection systems are permitted; 
however, there shall be no metal-to-metal contact. An aluminum slide 
operating between two ebonite spacer bars or similar, compatible 
materials will eliminate unacceptable metal-to-metal contact.
    (4) Dry-type portable vacuum collectors, limited to five pounds of 
explosives, shall be located in a separate cubicle having substantial 
dividing walls, or outside the building; never in a bay or cubicle with 
explosives. Wet-type portable vacuum collectors may be placed in 
explosive operating bays or cubicles, provided the quantity of 
explosives in the collector is limited in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 184.190(e)(1) through (e)(3). For dry collection 
of quantities in excess of five pounds or wet collection of quantities 
in excess of 15 pounds, the provisions of Sec. 184.190(e)(1) through 
(e)(3) also apply.
    (5) The design of wet collectors shall provide for proper immersion 
of explosives, breaking up air bubbles to release airborne particles; 
and for removal of moisture from the air leaving the collector, to 
prevent moistened particles of explosives from entering the small 
piping between the collector and the exhauster or pump.
    (6) At lease once every shift, explosives dust shall be removed 
from the collection chamber to eliminate unnecessary and hazardous 
concentrations of explosives. The entire system should be cleaned 
weekly, with parts dismantled as necessary.
    (7) The entire explosives dust collecting system shall be 
electrically grounded. The grounding shall be tested on a locally 
determined schedule.
    (8) Small vacuum systems positioned close to work stations shall be 
shielded.
    (e) Location of collection chambers. (1) Whenever practicable, dry-
type explosives dust collection chambers, except portable units, shall 
be located in the open, outside operating buildings, or in buildings 
set aside for the purpose. To protect operating personnel from blast 
and fragments from the collection chamber, a barricade or operational 
shield appropriate for the hazardous quantities involved, shall be 
provided between the operating building and the outside location or 
separate building housing the collection chamber. At least 3 feet shall 
separate the collection chamber from the barrier wall.
    (2) When locating dry-type collection chambers outside the 
operating building is not feasible, a separate room shall be set aside 
for this purpose in the building. This room shall neither contain other 
operations nor be used as a communicating corridor or passageway 
between other operating locations when explosives are being collected. 
Walls separating the room from other portions of the operating building 
shall meet the requirements for operational shields for the quantity of 
explosives in the collection chamber. If more than one collection 
chamber is to be located in the room, the room shall be subdivided into 
cubicles, with only one collection chamber per cubicle.
    (3) Stationary and portable wet-type collectors may be placed in 
explosives operating bays or cubicles, provided the quantity of 
explosives in the collectors does not exceed five pounds. Placed in 
separate cubicles, quantities may increase to 15 pounds. For wet 
collectors containing more than 15 pounds, location requirements set 
forth in Sec. 184.190 (e)(1) through (e)(2) apply.
    (f) Explosives/munitions awaiting destruction. Material awaiting 
destruction when stored in the open shall be inhabited building 
distance from explosives being destroyed. Provided with adequate 
frontal and overhead protection, material awaiting destruction may be 
stored at intraline distance from the explosives being destroyed. All 
such material shall be protected against accidental ignition or 
explosion from ambient storage conditions or from fragments, grass 
fires, burning embers, or blast originating in materials being 
destroyed.
    (g) Containers for waste explosives. Containers for these 
explosives shall be the original closed packages or equivalent. 
Closures shall prevent spillage or leakage of contents when handled or 
overturned, and shall not pinch or rub explosives during closing and 
opening. Containers shall be marked clearly to identify contents. No 
containers constructed from spark-producing or easily ignited material 
shall be used.


Sec. 184.191  Destruction sites.

    (a) Site criteria. (1) Destruction of ammunition and explosives 
shall occur as far as possible from magazines, inhabited buildings, 
public highways, runways, taxiways, and operating buildings. Separation 
distances shall be at least 1,250 feet or the applicable fragmentation 
distance unless pits or similar aids limit the range of fragments. 
Natural barricades should be used between the site and operating 
buildings or magazines. The possibility that the explosives may 
detonate when being burned requires use of appropriate protective 
barriers or separation distances for the safety of personnel and 
property. Explosives shall not be burned or detonated on concrete, nor 
in areas having large stones or crevices.
    (2) In all disposal and destruction activities, the number of A&E 
units or the explosives quantity that may be destroyed safely at one 
time shall be predetermined consistent with safe and efficient 
operations. When tests or other substantiated documentation reveal that 
fragments and debris are adequately controlled, appropriate inhabited 
building distances may be used for separation of the destruction site 
based on the maximum amount of explosives to be destroyed.
    (3) Firefighting equipment should be available to extinguish grass 
fires and to wet down the area between burnings and at the close of 
operations.
    (4) Ordinary combustible rubbish should not be disposed of near 
areas where explosives and explosives-contaminated material are 
destroyed.
    (b) Material and equipment usage. (1) Detonation of ammunition or 
explosives should be initiated by electric blasting caps, using 
blasting machines or permanently installed electric circuits energized 
by storage batteries or conventional power lines. When items to be 
detonated are covered with earth, the initiating explosives should be 
primed with enough primacord to allow connecting the blasting cap above 
ground level.
    (2) Special requirements for using electric blasting caps and 
electric blasting circuits follow.
    (i) The shunt shall not be removed from the lead wires of the 
blasting cap until the moment of connection to the blasting circuit. If 
the shunt shall be removed to test the blasting cap before priming the 
charge, short circuit the lead wires again following the test by 
twisting the bare ends of the wires together. The wires shall remain 
short circuited in this manner until the moment of connection to the 
blasting circuit.
    (ii) When uncoiling the leads of blasting caps, the following shall 
apply:
    (A) No one shall hold the cap at its explosives end.
    (B) The explosives end of a hand-held cap should be pointed down, 
away from the body, to the rear.
    (C) The wires shall be held carefully so that there is no tension 
where it connects to the cap.
    (iii) The lead wires of electric caps shall be straightened as 
necessary by hand. These wires shall not be thrown, waived through the 
air, or uncoiled by snapping as a whip.
    (iv) Firing wires shall be twisted pairs. The connection between 
blasting caps and the circuit firing wires shall not be made unless the 
power ends of the circuit leads (firing wire) are shorted and grounded.
    (v) Electric blasting or demolition operations and unshielded 
electric blasting caps shall be at safe distances from radio frequency 
energy transmitters.
    (vi) The blasting circuit shall be tested for extraneous 
electricity before electric blasting caps are connected to firing 
wires. To do so, arrange a dummy test circuit similar to the actual 
blasting circuit except that a radio pilot lamp of known good quality, 
using no electricity, shall substitute for the blasting cap. If this 
pilot lamp glows in the dark, indicating possibly dangerous amounts of 
RF energy, blasting operations shall proceed with non-electric blasting 
caps and safety fuses. Other instruments, such as the DuPont ``Detect-
A-Meter'' or ``Voltohmeter,'' may be substituted for the radio pilot 
lamp used in testing.
    (vii) If the exposure is to radar, television, or other microwave 
transmitters, the actual blasting circuit, with blasting cap included 
but without other explosives, shall be used to test for extraneous 
electricity. Personnel performing such tests shall be protected from 
the effects of an exploding blasting cap.
    (viii) Blasting and demolition operations shall be suspended during 
electrical storms, approaching as well as in progress. At first sign of 
an electrical storm, cap wires and lead wires shall be short-circuited, 
and all personnel removed from the demolition area to a safe location.
    (ix) A galvanometer shall test the firing circuit for electrical 
continuity before it connects with the blasting machine. Before 
completing the circuit at the blasting machine or panel and signaling 
for detonation, the individual assigned to make the connections shall 
confirm that everyone in the vicinity is in a safe place. This 
individual shall not leave the blasting machine or its actuating device 
for any reason and, when using a panel, shall lock the switch in the 
open position until ready to fire, retaining the only key.
    (x) When transported by vehicles with two-way radios, and when in 
areas presumed to have extraneous electricity, blasting caps shall be 
in closed metal boxes.
    (3) When conditions prevent the use of electrical initiators for 
detonation, safety fuses shall be used. At the beginning of each day's 
operation and whenever a new coil is used, the safety fuse's burning 
rate shall be tested. The fuse shall be long enough for personnel to 
retire to a safe distance. Under no circumstances shall the fuse length 
be less than that required for a 2-minute burning time. Approved 
crimpers shall be used to fix fuses to detonators. Only fuses small 
enough in diameter to enter the blasting cap without forcing shall be 
used. All personnel except the fuse-actuator shall retire to the 
personnel shelter or leave the demolition area before ignition.
    (c) Servicing of destruction site. (1) Vehicles transporting 
explosive material to burning or demolition grounds shall meet the 
requirements of this part. No more than two persons shall ride in the 
cab. No one shall ride in the truck bed.
    (2) Vehicles should be unloaded immediately and withdrawn from the 
burning or demolition area until destruction operations are completed. 
Containers of explosives shall not be opened before the vehicle has 
departed.
    (3) Containers of explosives or ammunition items to be destroyed at 
the destruction site shall be spotted and opened at least 10 feet from 
each other and from explosive material set out earlier, to prevent 
rapid transmission of fire if premature should occur.
    (4) Empty containers shall be closed and removed to prevent 
charring or damage during burning of explosives. Delivery vehicles on 
the return trip shall pick up empty containers.


Sec. 184.192  Destruction by burning.

    (a) No mixing of an explosive with extraneous material, other 
explosives, metal powder, detonators, or similar items shall occur 
without authorization.
    (b) Because of the danger of detonation, ammunition and explosives 
shall not be burned in containers or in large masses, except as 
directed by competent contractor authority.
    (c) Beds for burning explosives shall be no more than 3 inches 
deep. Wet explosives may require a thick bed of readily combustible 
material underneath and beyond to ensure that all the explosives shall 
be consumed upon ignition. An ignition train of combustible material 
leading to the explosives shall be arranged so that both it and the 
explosives burn against the wind. When wind velocity exceeds 15 miles 
per hour, no disposal by burning shall take place. For direct ignition 
of a combustible train, either a safety fuse long enough to permit 
personnel to reach protective shelter or a black powder squib initiated 
by an electric current controlled from a distance or protective 
structure shall be used. Tying two or more squibs together may be 
necessary to ensure ignition of the combustible train. Combustible 
materials are not needed for burning solid propellants ignited by 
squibs. The sites of misfires shall be evacuated for at least 30 
minutes, after which two qualified persons shall approach the position 
of the explosives: one shall examine the misfire; the other shall act 
as backup. Watching the examination from a safe distance, with natural 
or artificial barriers or other obstructions for protection, the backup 
shall be prepared to rush to the examiner's aid should an accident 
occur.
    (1) Loose, dry explosives may be burned without being place on 
combustible material if burning shall be complete, leaving the ground 
uncontaminated. The ground shall be decontaminated often, for the 
safety of personnel and operations. Volatile flammable liquids shall 
not, at any stage, be poured over explosives or the underlying 
combustible material to accelerate burning.
    (2) Wet explosives shall always be burned on beds of nonexplosive 
materials.
    (3) RDX should be burned in wet form to prevent detonation.
    (4) Pyrotechnic materials in oil containers shall be emptied into 
shallow metal pans before burning. The open containers may be burned 
with the explosives.
    (d) Parallel beds of explosives prepared for burning shall be 
separated by not less than 150 feet. In subsequent burning operations, 
care shall be taken to prevent material being ignited from smoldering 
residue or from heat retained in the ground from previous burning 
operations. Unless a burned-overplot has been saturated with water, 
then passed a safety inspection, 24 hours shall elapse before the next 
burning.


Sec. 184.193  Destruction by detonation.

    (a) Detonation of ammunition or explosives being destroyed should 
occur in a pit not less than 4 feet deep and covered with not less than 
2 feet of earth. The components should be placed on their sides or in 
that position exposing the largest area to the influence of initiating 
explosives. Demolition blocks shall be placed in intimate contact on 
top of the item to be detonated, secured by earth packed over them. 
Under certain circumstances, materials such as bangalore torpedoes and 
bulk high explosives may be substituted for demolition blocks.
    (b) Local regulations, atmosphere conditions, earth strata, etc., 
determine how many projectiles and explosives shall be destroyed at one 
time, both in pits and open sites. Taking these variables into account, 
the acceptable quantity shall be based on criteria in Subpart D of this 
part. The procedure should be used for destruction of fragmentation 
grenades, HE projectiles, mines, mortar shells, bombs, photoflash 
munitions, and HE rocket heads that have been separated from motors. 
When a demolition area is remote from inhabited buildings, boundaries, 
work areas, and storage areas, detonation may be accomplished without 
the aid of a pit, space permitting.
    (c) After each detonation, the surrounding area shall be searched 
for unexploded material and items.
    (d) In cases of misfires, the procedures in Sec. 184.182(c) shall 
apply.


Sec. 184.194  Destruction by neutralization.

    Certain ammunition and explosives may be disposed of by 
neutralization. Methods of neutralization include dissolving water-
soluble material and chemical decomposition. The contractor, 
responsible for investigation which of these is most appropriate, shall 
comply with all applicable local, State, and Federal requirements for 
disposal and contamination operations.


Sec. 184.195  Destruction chambers and incinerators.

    (a) General. Small, loaded ammunition components such as primers, 
fuzes, boosters, detonators, activators, relays, delays and all types 
of small-arms ammunition, should be destroyed in destruction chambers 
and deactivation furnaces. Explosives scrap incinerators should be used 
for burning tracer and igniter compositions, small quantities of solid 
propellant, magnesium powder, sump cleanings, absorbent cleaning 
materials, and similar materials. Destruction chambers and incinerators 
should be equipped with suitable pollution-control devices, such as 
multiple chamber incinerators with thermal incinerator afterburners. 
The final incineration should take place at 1400 deg.F, minimum.
    (b) Operation of incinerators. (1) The feeding conveyor shall not 
be operated until the incinerator temperature is high enough to ensure 
complete destruction. Temperature recording devices should be 
installed.
    (2) To remove accumulated residue, incinerators shall be shut down 
and thoroughly cooled. Repairs shall be made only during shutdown. 
Personnel entering the incinerator to clean it shall be provided with 
respiratory protection, to prevent inhalation of toxic dusts or fumes, 
such as mercury from tracers and lead from small-arms ammunition.
    (c) Operation of destruction chambers and deactivation furnaces. 
(1) Operation shall be by remote control.
    (2) Operators shall not approach the unprotected side of the 
concrete barricade to replenish fuel, adjust the oil flame, or for any 
other reason, until enough time has elapsed for explosives in the 
chamber to go off. To keep the feedpipe chute or conveyor obstruction-
free, regular inspections shall take place.
    (3) Components shall be fed into the chamber a few at a time. The 
exact number permitted at one time for each type of component shall be 
posted in a place easily seen from the operator's working position.
    (4) Guards shall be installed on conveyor-feeding mechanisms to 
facilitate feeding and to prevent items from jamming or falling.


Sec. 184.196  Support in disposal of waste.

    If Government-owned ammunition items or explosives are declared 
excess or residual and the contract says nothing about disposition, the 
contractor shall request instructions from the responsible Contract 
Administration Office. A contractor having trouble safely disposing of 
residual (scrap) ammunition items or explosives related to contractual 
operations may request help from the Contract Administration Office.

Subpart P--Manufacturing and Processing Propellants


Sec. 184.198  General.

    (a) These requirements are applicable to propellant manufacturing 
and augment other requirements contained in this part.
    (b) The safety precautions for fabrication of solid propellants, 
propellant loaded items, gun ammunition, and rocket motors follow the 
generally accepted principles used for many types of explosives and 
energetic materials. Solid propellants can be divided into general 
categories such as single, double, and triple base, castable composite, 
and modified double base composite; e.g., castable composite propellant 
modified with explosive plasticizer such as nitroglycerin.
    (c) Although processing safety considerations for finished 
propellant items and loaded rocket motors are similar, each propellant 
type has its own characteristics for processing of raw materials, 
intermediate compositions, and final processing. Hazards data testing 
of intermediate and finished propellant shall be accomplished to define 
the requirements that ensure safety in processing. Initiation 
thresholds to such stimuli as impact, friction, heat, and electrostatic 
discharge shall be known for specific processes and handling 
situations. Response of the materials in terms of energy input 
sensitivity and magnitude of energy release shall be considered to 
evaluate and properly apply the guidelines in this subpart. Safety 
precautions for ignition system fabrication shall follow the general 
requirements for manufacturing and processing of pyrotechnics given in 
subpart H of this part. (An exception to this requirement is the 
processing of a propellant grain igniter which shall be the same as 
motor propellant until grain is mated with the initiator assembly.)
    (d) In addition to generally accepted safety precautions for 
handling of explosives and other energetic materials, the following 
paragraphs provide general guidance pertinent to the manufacturing of 
solid propellants and loaded items and solid propellant rocket motors.


Sec. 184.199  In-process hazards.

    (a) During scale up from research and development of new materials 
to an existing solid propellant manufacturing process, determine the 
chemical, physical, physiological and explosive hazards of raw 
materials, intermediate compositions, processing aids, and final solid 
propellant, both uncured and cured.
    (b) Testing shall determine thermal stability, chemical 
compatibility of ingredients, exothermic reactions, and sensitivity to 
ignition or detonation from friction, impact, and electrostatic 
discharge. Additionally, deflagration-to-detonation and card-gap test 
data can be valuable. Applicable tests may be selected TB 700-2, 
Explosives Hazard Classification Procedures.
    (c) Minimum testing may satisfy the classification requirements for 
several in-process operations. For example:
    (1) If reliable data exists that indicate that the propellant 
mixing operations are class/division 1.1 no testing would be needed to 
adopt this classification.
    (2) If testing shows that uncured propellant will detonate, the 
casting and curing operations shall be considered exposed to class/
division 1.1 hazards.
    (3) If detonation tests show that the cured propellant will 
detonate, all operations with cured or curing propellant shall be 
considered as exposed to class/division 1.1 hazards.
    (d) Safety information for all materials used in the formulation 
shall be available as required. Personnel shall be trained on the 
hazards involved in propellant process situations.


Sec. 184.200  Quantity/distance (Q/D) requirements.

    New manufacturing and support facilities for processing of solid 
propellants and propellant loaded items shall be operated to conform to 
the latest Q/D requirements for the class/division of the material in 
the in-process condition.


Sec. 184.201  Separation of operations and buildings.

    (a) Propellant and rocket motor manufacturing and processing shall 
be done in special areas--operating lines--whose boundaries are 
separated from all other areas outside the line in accordance with 
appropriate Q/D criteria.
    (b) Sequential operations on rocket motors can generally be treated 
as one process operation in one building. Exception examples are shown 
in Appendix A to this subpart.
    (c) The required separation between buildings (sites, pads, or 
other such locations), which form a single production or operating 
line, shall be in accordance with quantity/distance criteria.
    (d) When the hazard classification of a propellant has not been 
established, classify the propellant during site and construction 
planning as the most hazardous class/division that might possibly apply 
during manufacturing and processing.
    (e) Safety shelters, lunch rooms, convenience buildings, and 
private vehicle parking for personnel working in an operating building 
should be constructed and shall be sited in accordance with applicable 
Q/D criteria.


Sec. 184.202  Equipment and facilities.

    (a) Except as provided for in other applicable documentation, the 
design, layout, and operation of facilities and equipment for solid 
propellant operations shall follow the mandatory provisions. Where 
guidance is not provided, operations should be governed by the results 
of hazard tests and analyses performed and documented to address 
specific operations. As some propellants can be sensitive to initiation 
by static electricity, bonding and grounding of equipment, tooling, and 
rocket motors along with other means of static elimination and control 
should be given special consideration. Conductive work surfaces and 
floors or floor mats shall be provided for assembly of igniters and 
igniter subassemblies.
    (b) Nonsparking and nonrusting materials, which are chemically 
compatible with the propellant material, shall be used for equipment, 
tooling, and machinery that will come in contact with propellant or 
propellant ingredients.
    (c) Certain solid propellant operations involve significant energy 
input which enhances the possibility of ignition. Examples are rolling 
mills, machining and drilling operations. In these situations, complete 
hazard analysis and evaluation shall be conducted prior to starting the 
operation.
    (d) Space heating, air conditioning, and propellant hot air cure 
oven equipment shall be designed and operated to prevent accumulation 
of solvent vapors (whether flammable or nonflammable), explosive dusts, 
and nitroglycerin vapors (or other nitroester vapors) that may present 
an ignition, explosion, or personnel hazard. Ovens shall have dual or 
redundant temperature controls.
    (e) Exposed radiant surfaces in the form of S-shaped smooth pipe or 
fin-type radiators, so positioned that they can be easily cleaned, are 
considered suitable types of radiators because of the ease with which 
they can be cleaned. Other types of radiators are acceptable, but are 
less desirable because of cleaning difficulties.
    (f) When mechanical ventilating equipment is used in operations 
involving potential concentrations of solvent vapors, dusts, and 
nitroester vapors, the electric motor and motor controls shall not be 
located directly in the potentially contaminated air stream and the 
system shall be provided with a suitable means of collecting 
condensate.
    (g) Air conditioning and cure oven air-circulating equipment of the 
closed system type shall be designed to prevent contaminated air from 
contacting the air motor and controls. Recirculated air shall be 
monitored to ensure concentration of vapors and dusts do not reach 
flammable (or explosive), or personnel threshold limits. Electric 
motors and controls shall be dustproof and vaporproof electrical 
equipment. Air mover blades should be nonmetallic.
    (h) The equipment shall be rigidly fixed and stable during mixing 
to preclude contact between fixed and movable parts. Any mix bowl lift-
mechanism (elevator) is to be designed so blade-to-blade and blade-to-
bowl clearances are assured during the complete operation cycle.
    (i) Positive controls shall be provided to physically block or stop 
bowl or mixer head movement in case of drive mechanism malfunction. 
Assure blade-to-blade and blade-to-bowl clearance is maintained at all 
times.
    (j) Mix blades and shaft shall be rigid and structurally strong to 
ensure minimum flex from viscosity of the mix and speed of the shaft.
    (k) Electrical components of all mixers shall meet the appropriate 
electrical classification, be remotely located, or shrouded and purged 
with inert gas. Purged systems shall be designed to provide automatic 
warning if gas pressure is lost.
    (l) Mixer blade shafts shall be equipped with seals or packing 
glands that prevent migration of liquids or solvent vapors into 
bearings. Submerged bearings and packing glands should be avoided. 
However, if used, they shall be periodically tested for contamination 
and cleaned.
    (m) A program shall be established to detect significant changes in 
blade/shaft position relative to mixer head. Clearances between mix 
blades and mixer bowls shall be checked at regular intervals based on 
operating time and experience to make sure the clearance is adequate. 
Maintain a record of such checks, mixer blade adjustments, and any 
damage to the mixer blades and bowls.
    (n) Mix bowl, blades, and drive unit are to be electrically bonded 
and grounded.
    (o) Inspect blades and other moving parts of new mixers and 
replacement parts for old mixers. Inspect (magnaflux and/or X-ray) for 
cracks, crevices, and other flaws.
    (p) Electric service to propellant mixers shall be interlocked with 
fire protection system controls so that the mixer cannot start when the 
fire protection system is inoperative.
    (q) All process equipment which applies energy to in-process 
propellant should be checked regularly for wear and misalignment. A 
record of these checks and maintenance performed should be maintained 
for the process equipment.
    (r) Equipment performing sequential operations on propellants, such 
as extrusion and cutting, shall be controlled to prevent interference.


Sec. 184.203  In-process quantities and storage.

    (a) Only the amount of propellant and loaded subassemblies needed 
to ensure a safe and efficient workflow shall be present in an 
operating building when operations are being conducted. This does not 
preclude short-term storage of larger quantities in an operating 
building when not in use for other operations.
    (b) Operating buildings of standard construction may be used for 
storage of completed assemblies with or without installed ignition 
system. There shall be no other operation in progress and quantity/
distance shall be in compliance with requirements.
    (c) Production igniters may be stored in designated areas within an 
assembly/disassembly facility.
    (d) Indoor storage is preferable for all types of explosives and is 
mandatory for bulk high explosives, solid propellants, and 
pyrotechnics. Priority of existing indoor storage should be given to 
items requiring the most protection from the weather (based on the 
method of packing). Solid propellant and propellant materials shall be 
protected from overheating by exposure to direct sunlight when in 
transit or on temporary hold.
    (e) The propulsive characteristics and the ignition probability of 
explosive items such as propellant loaded devices, rocket motors, 
assist take-off units, and missiles shall be taken into consideration 
during all logistical phases in order to obtain as much safety as 
possible under the circumstances. Because of the great number of types 
and sizes of propellant loaded devices and conditions of assembly 
encountered, it is not feasible to present anything other than general 
safety guidance in this part. Thus, every effort should be made to 
prevent ignition of any units being manufactured, assembled, 
disassembled, handled, stored, transported or deployed. Approved flight 
restraining devices (tie-downs) shall be used to the maximum extent 
possible and are required if probability of ignition is reasonably 
high. When doubt exists as to whether a given item or configuration 
(state of assembly) is propulsive or nonpropulsive, the item shall be 
treated as propulsive until pertinent technical information can be 
obtained.


Sec. 184.204  Ingredients processing.

    (a) Weighing, measuring, and handling raw materials. (1) Scales for 
weighing raw materials shall be electrically grounded, where needed, to 
properly protect the operation. This grounding is especially important 
where flammable or combustible materials are involved.
    (2) Separate weight or measurement rooms, cubicles, or areas 
(dependent upon the quantity and sensitivity of the materials handled) 
shall be provided. Oxidizers and metallic powders weighing shall be 
separated from each other and from other materials by physical barriers 
rather than distance.
    (3) It is important that containers, equipment, hand tools, scale 
pans, etc., used for weighing processes are not mixed with those 
weighing or measuring oxidizers and fuels, particularly where distance 
rather than physical barriers separates these areas. Positive measures 
shall be adopted to ensure the complete separation of such equipment 
and tools.
    (4) The designated use of space and equipment shall not be changed 
without a thorough cleaning and inspection to make sure that all traces 
of the previous material have been removed if any possibility exists 
that materials are incompatible.
    (b) Oxidizer processing. (1) Solid propellant oxidizing agents are 
perchlorates, nitrates, nitroesters, and nitramines used in solid 
rocket motor propellants.
    (2) Avoid contaminating an oxidizer agent with any metal or 
chemical (fuel) which may result in a more sensitive composition.
    (3) Use closed systems as much as possible for dust, humidity, and 
tramp material control.
    (4) Flexible connections (socks) in pipes or duct systems which 
convey oxidizer materials and dust socks in collectors or hoopers 
should be fabricated of fire-retardant materials. These materials shall 
be chemically compatible with the oxidizers to which they shall be 
exposed.
    (5) The pipes and duct systems shall be made electrically 
continuous. Threaded joints and fittings in contact with oxidizer 
should be avoided. Quick clamp neuter end pipe joints are preferred.
    (6) Static control measures shall be used to dissipate static 
charges to an acceptable level if oxidizer is transported by 
fluidization.
    (c) Oxidizer drying. (1) The safe temperature for drying each 
material shall be established and shall not be exceeded at any point in 
the drying apparatus or drying room.
    (2) Use thermostatic controls to prevent the maximum safe 
temperature from being exceeded in the drying process. Redundant 
controls are required.
    (3) Electrical heating elements that may contact the oxidizer or 
oxidizer dust shall not be used.
    (4) Dust should be held to a minimum in the drying process. A dust 
collection system shall be used if dusting can create a potential 
hazard.
    (5) Care should be exercised to ensure incompatible materials are 
not being dried simultaneously in the same drying process. An oven, 
drying room, etc., used for processing flammable or other incompatible 
materials should not be used for drying oxidizers until it has been 
cleaned, inspected, and found to be free of any contaminating residual 
materials.
    (d) Screening oxidizers. (1) When screening for process purposes, 
the screening equipment shall be constructed so oxidizer material is 
not subjected to pinching, friction, or impact as a result of metal-to-
metal contact. Rooms in which screening units are operated shall be 
kept thoroughly clean to eliminate hazardous accumulations of dust.
    (2) Oxidizer screens shall be electrically grounded and bonded to 
the receiving vessel.
    (e) Blending oxidizers. (1) If gases are generated during blending 
of oxidizer, a suitable means of gas pressure relief shall be designed 
into the blender.
    (2) The blender shall be electrically bonded throughout.
    (3) Blending equipment shall be constructed so oxidizer material is 
not subjected to pinching, friction, or impact between metal-to-metal 
surfaces.
    (4) When ammonium perchlorate is blended using powered mechanical 
equipment, operating personnel shall be protected. Remote control of 
mechanical blending is advisory.
    (5) When powered mechanical methods are used for blending mass-
detonating materials (such as REDX or HMX), the operation shall be 
remotely controlled and personnel protected (See Note 1 to Appendix A 
to this subpart).
    (f) Grinding oxidizers. (1) When impact-type mills are used, there 
shall be sufficient clearance between stationary and moving parts to 
prevent metal-to-metal contact. Clearances shall be checked as often as 
needed to ensure they are adequate. Mill bearings should be wind swept 
(purged) to prevent contamination. Impact-type grinders shall not be 
used for mass-detoning materials.
    (2) Oxidizer feed materials shall be passed through a screen mesh 
with openings no greater than the clearance between hammer and plate. 
Screen mesh size for ammonium nitrate should be the smallest that 
allows free flow of the prills. Magnetic separations shall be used if 
screening is not possible.
    (3) Use only compatible lubricants in grinding equipment.
    (4) Heat sensitive devices should be installed on the bearing 
housing of grinding and conditioning equipment.
    (5) Determine the cleaning cycle and method used for grinding 
equipment and include in operating procedures.
    (6) Grinding operations should be provided with wet dust-collection 
systems, where appropriate.
    (7) Pneumatic grinding operations shall be thoroughly grounded and 
bonded to provide for electrostatic charge dissipation.
    (g) Preparation of fuel compositions. (1) Sensitivity 
characteristics of fuel compositions should be determined prior to 
production mixing operations.
    (2) Establish compatibility of materials. Develop procedures that 
preclude the formation of highly sensitive compositions or hazardous 
conditions during processing, such as, dry AP and powdered metal 
mixtures.
    (3) Equipment, piping, and vessels used in fuel preparation should 
be bonded to form a continuous electrical path with each other and to 
building ground. When metallic powder and flammable liquids are 
transferred (poured) from one container to another, the containers 
should be bonded together prior to transfer.
    (4) Minimize the formation and accumulation of dust in all 
preparation operations.
    (5) Fume hoods, dust socks, closed systems, and dust/fume vacuum 
exhaust hoses are to be used, as appropriate, to prevent vapors and 
dust getting into the operating areas.
    (h) Transfer operations. (1) Finely divided powdered ingredients 
should be transferred by methods that control flow rate and minimize 
electrostatic charge generation which would result from ``slug'' 
dumping.
    (2) Flammable solvents should be transferred only after the 
transfer and receiving vessels have been electrically bonded to 
eliminate electrostatic potential differences.


Sec. 184.205  Mixing.

    (a) Secure hardware and associated equipment to prevent loose items 
falling into mixers.
    (b) Liquids and powders to be added to the mix vessels shall first 
pass through a screen or orifice with an opening(s) less than the 
smallest clearance in the mixer. Smaller amounts of material may be 
added directly, provided a positive means exists to ensure the material 
does not contain any foreign material.
    (c) Materials which cannot be screened and are opaque or not easily 
inspected should be examined by other means, such as X-ray.
    (d) When consistent with the process system and requirements, a 
cover shall be placed over the mixer bowl after changing or mixing 
operations are completed. This is to prevent the accidental 
introduction of foreign objects into the mixer and also to preclude 
sunlight impinging directly on the materials in the bowl.
    (e) Use only nonsparking devices to scrape down the sides and 
blades of mixtures by hand. Set up controls to prevent these and other 
devices from being accidentally introduced into the mixer.
    (f) Account for all loose tools and equipment before starting or 
continuing mixing operations.
    (g) Do not allow objects in the mixer operating area (such as 
jewelry, pens, and coins) that may accidentally be introduced into 
mixers. Suggest using pocketless coveralls.
    (h) Direct and unobstructed routes shall be provided for personnel 
egress from mixer buildings or bays.
    (i) Personnel shall not attempt to fight propellant fires.
    (j) Propellant mixers should be equipped, inside and outside of the 
mixing vessel, with a high-speed deluge system.


Sec. 184.206  Casting and curing.

    (a) Local attendance during cast operations is permitted provided a 
thorough safety review of the operation is conducted.
    (b) Multiple or production line type casting is permissible 
provided provision is made to prevent propagation of an incident 
between individual cast bells or pits.
    (c) All cast piping and tooling in contact with propellant shall be 
smooth for ease of cleaning and be free of cracks, pits, crevices, and 
weld slag. Threaded joints should be avoided as much as possible. 
Joints requiring disassembly as a process operation or for cleaning 
should not be threaded type.
    (d) Cast tooling and mandrel designs shall permit no metal-to-metal 
friction or impact sites.
    (e) Valves through which propellant flows shall be designed to 
prevent propellant from being pinched or compressed between two metal 
surfaces.
    (f) Pressurized casting vessels shall be capable of withstanding at 
least twice the maximum allowable working pressure.
    (g) Lids shall be secured to pressurized casting vessels in such a 
manner that they shall withstand the rated pressures of the vessels.
    (h) Line pressure for pressurizing the casting vessel shall not 
exceed the working pressure of the vessel. Pressure lines shall have a 
relief valve downstream of the regulator.
    (i) Equip each vessel with a blowout disk (burst diaphragm) 
designed to blow out at less than 120 percent of the vessel's maximum 
allowable working pressure. The design shall allow for the release of 
the potential rapid rise of pressure in the vessel should the 
propellant ignite.
    (j) Pressure relief is to be provided when propellant is cured or 
cast under pressure.
    (k) Pressurization and depressurization for propellant cure shall 
be done remotely.
    (l) Casting vessels should be physically or electrically 
disconnected from lifting devices during cast operations.


Sec. 184.207  Extrusion processes.

    (a) Extrusion presses and compression molding equipment should be 
designed to remove air from the propellant before compaction and 
extrusion begin. Assure that procedures provide for checking operation 
of the vacuum system and cleaning it of propellant residue and 
condensed vapors such as those generated from nitroglycerin 
volatization.
    (b) Ramheads should be checked for alignment with the press bore to 
preclude metal-to-metal contact. Flashing removal should be included in 
the process procedures.
    (c) Interlocks shall be provided to preclude press operation during 
loading or other attendant operations.


Sec. 184.208  Propellant loaded items.

    (a) When operations are performed on cured propellant contained in 
pressure vessels or rocket motor cases and there is a significant risk 
of ignition due to energy inputs (such as electrical check of 
pyrotechnic devices), the unit should be secured in a fixture capable 
of withstanding the rated thrust of the assembly times a factor 2.5, 
minimum.
    (b) When mechanically applied force is required to ``breakaway'' 
the mandrel or other tooling embedded in propellant, it should be 
applied by remote control. However, see Appendix A to this subpart for 
exceptions.
    (c) Moving loaded motors with cores in place is, generally, not 
recommended. If loaded motors containing cores shall be moved, however, 
the core and motor case shall be supported by or suspended from a 
common source or in some manner locked or tied together to prevent 
independent movement of either.
    (d) Hazard characteristics of individual propellants to be cut, 
machined, or contoured, shall be evaluated and considered in 
determining the safest method to use.
    (e) Propellant machining equipment shall be designed:
    (1) To prevent contact of cutting tools or blades with motor cases 
and other metal objects.
    (2) To minimize generation of heat.
    (3) To facilitate removal of dust and chips, and to afford 
personnel protection. The motor or grain should be X-rayed prior to 
trim if there is a possibility that metal or other foreign objects may 
be in the propellant.
    (f) Propellant dust, chips and shavings shall be removed frequently 
from the work area during machining and contouring.
    (g) Rocket motors in final assembly process should be positioned to 
permit ready access to all sides of the motor. Aisles and exit doors 
are to be kept clear and unobstructed. All exit doors shall have quick-
release hardware.
    (h) The number of items in the final assembly building shall be the 
minimum consistent with a safe and efficient operation.
    (i) Grounding of propellant loaded assemblies in storage is 
optional and is to be reviewed on a case-by-case basis.
    (j) If the process requires removing an igniter shorting clip, the 
igniter shall remain shorted until immediately before insertion. 
Igniter shall remain nonshorted for only the minimum time required for 
the operation.
    (k) Provide means for controlled dissipation of static electrical 
charges during igniter insertion.
    (l) Operations that involve electrical continuity checking/testing 
of ignition systems installed in rocket motors are to be conducted 
according to thoroughly reviewed and approved procedures. If review 
indicates that an unacceptable potential for ignition exists, these 
checks shall be conducted by remote control with the motor mounted in a 
test stand designed to withstand the thrust of the motor times a factor 
2.5, minimum.


Sec. 184.209  Disassembly.

    (a) Process equipment and tooling that requires disassembly as a 
process operation shall be designed as much as possible to avoid metal-
to-metal movement and trapping of explosive material.
    (b) Sanitary, external clamp fittings should be used on pipe 
assemblies for propellant transfer.
    (c) Disassembly of equipment and tooling which is nonroutine, such 
as necessary for equipment repair or for securing the process, should 
not be started until evaluation of potential hazards from trapped 
material or process residuals.

    Appendix A to Subpart P of Part 184--Remote Control and Personnel   
  Protection Requirements for Certain Propellant Processing Operations  
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Personnel   
            Operation                Remote controls      protected\1\  
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Blending and screening of         Advisory............  Advisory.       
 ammonium perchlorate.                                                  
Blending screening of nitramines  Mandatory\2\........  Mandatory.\2\   
 and perchlorates other than                                            
 ammonium.                                                              
Grinding, and mechanized drying   Mandatory...........  Mandatory       
 of perchlorates and nitramines.                         (adequate      
                                                         protective wall
                                                         for perchlorate
                                                         and intraline  
                                                         distance for   
                                                         nitramines).   
Grinding, blending, screening,    Advisory............  Advisory.       
 and mechanized drying of                                               
 ammonium nitrates.                                                     
Rotating blade propellant mixing  Mandatory...........  Mandatory.\4\   
Power-driven cutting, machining,  Mandatory\3\........  Mandatory.\3\   
 sawing, planing, drilling, or                                          
 other unconfined operations in                                         
 which rocket motors or                                                 
 propellant of Q/D Hazard                                               
 Division 1.1 and 1.3 are                                               
 involved\2\.                                                           
Mandrel break away removal from   Mandatory\3\........  Mandatory.\3\   
 cured propellant.                                                      
Pressing, extruding, pelletizing  Mandatory...........  Advisory at     
 or blending.                                            intraline      
                                                         distance       
                                                         mandatory at   
                                                         less than      
                                                         intraline      
                                                         distance.      
Casting propellants.............  Mandatory\3\........  Mandatory.\3\   
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\Operating personnel shall be at Q/D or in a control room that will   
  limit overpressure to less than 2.3 psi.                              
\2\Attended screening of wet material may be permitted if shown         
  acceptable by hazard analysis.                                        
\3\Attended operation permitted if shown to be acceptable by hazard     
  analysis.                                                             
\4\When the maximum credible event (MCE) is shown by hazard analysis to 
  be fire hazard only, non-attended operation is permitted.             

Subpart Q--Hazardous Component Safety Data Statements (HCSDS) 
[Reserved]

Subpart R--Bibliography


Sec. 184.230  List of Publications.

ANSI Z16.4, ``Uniform Record Keeping for Occupational Injuries and 
Illnesses''
DoD Instruction 6055.2, ``Personal Protective Equipment,'' May 3, 
1978--canceled by DoD Instruction 6055.1, ``DoD Occupational Safety 
and Health Program,'' October 26, 1984
DoD Instruction 6055.5, ``Industrial Hygiene and Occupational 
Health,'' January 10, 1989
DoD-STD 2105 (NAVY), ``Hazardous Assessments Tests for Navy Non-
Nuclear Ordnance,'' September 9, 1982
Joint Services Safety and Performance Manual, 1972
Military Standard (MIL-STD)-882B, ``Systems Safety Program for 
Systems and Associated Subsystems and Equipment,'' 30 March 1984
NAVAIR 00-130-ASR-2-1, Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual, ``Air-
to-Surface Joint Service Test Procedures for Bombs and Bomblets,'' 
December 1968

Subpart S--Glossary


Sec. 184.240  Terminology.

    The following are descriptions of terms and phrases commonly used 
in conjunction with ammunition, explosives, and other dangerous 
materials. These are listed to provide a degree of uniformity of 
description in the use of technical information throughout these 
standards.
    Aboveground magazines. Any type of magazines above ground other 
than standard or nonstandard earth-covered types of magazines.
    Administration area. The area in which administrative buildings 
that function for the installation as a whole are located, excluding 
those offices located near and directly serving components of 
explosives storage and operating areas.
    Aircraft parking area. Any area set aside for parking aircraft not 
containing explosives.
    Ammunition and explosives. As used herein, includes (but is not 
necessarily limited to) all items of ammunition; propellants, liquid 
and solid; high explosives; guided missiles; warheads; devices; 
pyrotechnics; components thereof; and substances associated therewith 
presenting real or potential hazards to life and property.
    Ammunition and explosives aircraft cargo area. Any area 
specifically designated for the following:
    (1) Aircraft loading or unloading of transportation configured 
ammunition and explosives.
    (2) Parking aircraft loaded with transportation configured 
ammunition and explosives.
    Ammunition and explosives area. An area specifically designated and 
set aside from other portions of an installation for the development, 
manufacture, testing, maintenance, storage, or handling of ammunition 
and explosives.
    Auxiliary building. Any building accessory to or maintained and 
operated to serve an operating building, line, plant, or pier area. 
Explosive materials are not present in an auxiliary building (examples: 
power plants and changehouses, paint and solvent lockers, and similar 
facilities).
    Barricade. An intervening barrier, natural or artificial, of such 
type, size, and construction as to limit in a prescribed manner the 
effect of an explosion on nearby buildings or exposures.
    Blast impulse. The product of the overpressure from the blast wave 
of an explosion and the time during which it acts at a given point 
(that is, the area under the positive phase of the overpressure vs. 
time curve).
    Blast overpressure. The pressure, exceeding the ambient pressure, 
manifested in the shock wave of an explosion.
    Change house. A building provided with facilities for employees to 
change to and from work clothes. Such buildings may be provided with 
sanitary facilities, drinking fountains, lockers, and eating 
facilities.
    Classification yard. A railroad yard used for the receiving, 
dispatching, classifying, and switching of cars.
    Compatibility. Ammunition and explosives are considered compatible 
if they may be stored or transported together without significantly 
increasing either the probability of an accident or, for a given 
quantity, the magnitude of the effects of such an accident.
    Deflagration. A rapid chemical reaction in which the output of heat 
is sufficient to enable the reaction to proceed and be accelerated 
without input of heat from another source. Deflagration is a surface 
phenomenon with the reaction products flowing away from the unreacted 
material along the surface at subsonic velocity. The effect of a true 
deflagration under confinement is an explosion. Confinement of the 
reaction increases pressure, rate of reaction and temperature, and may 
cause transition into a detonation.
    Demilitarize. To disarm, neutralize, and accomplish any other 
action required to render ammunition and explosives innocuous or 
ineffectual for military use.
    Detonation. A violent chemical reaction within a chemical compound 
or mechanical mixture evolving heat and pressure. A detonation is a 
reaction that proceeds through the reacted material toward the 
unreacted material at a supersonic velocity. The result of the chemical 
reaction is exertion of extremely high pressure on the surrounding 
medium forming a propagating shock wave that is originally of 
supersonic velocity. A detonation, when the material is located on or 
near the surface of the ground, normally is characterized by a crater.
    Dud. Explosive munition that is not armed as intended, or that has 
failed to function after being armed.
    Establishment. Any plant, works, facility, installation, or other 
activity.
    Explosion. A chemical reaction of any chemical compound or 
mechanical mixture that, when initiated, undergoes a very rapid 
combustion or decomposition releasing large volumes of highly heated 
gases that exert pressure on the surrounding medium. Also, a mechanical 
reaction in which failure of the container causes the sudden release of 
pressure from within a pressure vessel; for example, pressure rupture 
of a steam boiler. Depending on the rate of energy release, an 
explosion can be categorized as a deflagration, a detonation, or a 
pressure rupture.
    Explosive. Any chemical compound or mechanical mixture that, when 
subjected to heat, impact, friction, detonation, or other suitable 
initiation, undergoes a very rapid chemical change with the evolution 
of large volumes of highly heated gases that exert pressures in the 
surrounding medium. The term applies to materials that either detonate 
or deflagrate.
    Explosives facility. Any structure or location containing 
ammunition and explosives.
    Exposed site (ES). A location exposed to the potential hazardous 
effects (blast, fragments, debris, and heat flux) from an explosion at 
a potential explosion site (PES).
    The distance to a PES and the level of protection required for an 
ES determine the quantity of ammunition or explosives permitted in a 
PES.
    Fire-resistive. Applies to generally combustible materials or 
structures that have been treated or have surface coverings designed to 
retard ignition or fire spread.
    Firebrand. A projected burning or hot fragment from which thermal 
energy is transferred to a receptor.
    Firewall. A wall of fire-resistive construction designed to prevent 
the spread of fire from one side to the other. A firewall also may be 
termed a ``fire division wall.''
    Flame-resistant. Applies to combustible materials, such as 
clothing, which have been treated or coated to decrease their burning 
characteristics.
    Flammable. Combustible. A flammable material is one that is ignited 
easily and burns readily.
    Fragmentation. Breaking up of the confining material of a chemical 
compound or mechanical mixture when an explosion takes place. Fragments 
may be complete items, subassemblies, pieces thereof, or pieces of 
equipment or buildings containing the items.
    Hangfire. Temporary failure or delay in the action of a primer, 
igniter, or propelling charge.
    Hazard analysis. The logical, systematic examination of an item, 
process, condition, facility, or system to identify and analyze the 
probability, causes, and consequences of potential or real hazards.
    High explosive equivalent or explosive equivalent. The ratio of the 
weight of TNT to that of another explosive when both quantities produce 
equivalent blast effects at the same distance from their detonations. 
The ratio is expressed as a percent.
    Holding yard. A location for groups of railcars, trucks, or 
trailers used to hold ammunition and explosives for interim periods 
before storage or shipment.
    Hypergolic. The term used to describe the self-ignition of certain 
fuels and oxidizers upon contact with each other.
    Inhabited building. A building or structure, other than an 
operating building, occupied in whole or part by human beings; or a 
building or structure where people customarily assemble, such as a 
church, schoolhouse, railroad station and similar transportation 
facilities, store, theater, or factory, inside or outside the 
establishment.
    Inhabited building distance. That separation between explosives 
locations (PES) and non-associated locations (ES) requiring a high 
degree of protection from an accidental explosion. Such exposed sites 
include facility boundaries, wholly inert administrative facilities, 
the public, etc.
    Inspection station. A designated location at which trucks and 
railcars containing ammunition and explosives are inspected.
    Interchange yard. An area set aside for the exchange of railroad 
cars or vehicles between the common carrier and establishment.
    Intraline distance. The distance to be maintained between any two 
operating buildings and sites within an operating line, at least one of 
which contains or is designed to contain explosives.
    Launch pads. The load-bearing base, apron, or platform upon which 
the rocket, missile, or space vehicle and its launcher are positioned.
    Liquid propellant(s). Liquid and gaseous substances (fuels, 
oxidizers, or monopropellants) used for propulsion or operation of 
missiles, rockets, and related devices (see Appendix A to Subpart G of 
this part).
    Loading docks. Facilities structure, or paved areas, designed and 
installed for transferring ammunition and explosives.
    Lunchrooms. Facilities where food is prepared or brought for 
distribution by food service personnel. It may serve more than one PES. 
A breakroom in an operating building may be used by personnel assigned 
to the PES to eat meals.
    Magazine. Any building or structure, except an operating building, 
used for the storage of ammunition and explosives. The types and 
general specifications of various magazines for ammunition and 
explosives follow:
    (1) Reinforced concrete, arch-type, earth-covered magazines whose 
construction is at least equivalent in strength to the requirements of 
The Office of Chief of Engineers (OCE), Department of the Army, 
drawings 652-686 through 652-693, December 27, 1941, as revised March 
14, 1942, 33-15-06, 33-15-58 (atomic blast resistant), 33-15-61, and 
33-15-74. For new construction use drawings 35-15-74.\22\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \22\Copies available from U.S. Army, Chief of Engineers, Pulaski 
Building, 20 Massachusetts Ave., NW., Washington, DC 20001.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Magazines constructed according to Navy drawings 357428 through 
357430, August 19, 1944, and modified in accordance with NAVFAC drawing 
626739, March 19, 1954; and NAVFAC drawings 627954 through 627957, 
764597, 658384 through 658388, 724368, 751861, 764596, 793746, and 
793747.\23\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \23\Copies available from Commander, Naval Facilities 
Engineering Command, 200 Stovall Street, Alexandria, VA 22332-2300.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) Box-type A magazines constructed according to NAVFAC drawings 
1404000 through 1404007; box-type B magazines constructed according to 
NAVFAC drawings 1404018 through 1404025; box-type C magazines 
constructed according to NAVFAC drawings 1404430 through 1404440, dated 
20 September 1985; box-type D magazines constructed according to NAVFAC 
drawings 1404464 through 1404478, dated 20 September 1985; box-type E 
magazines constructed according to NAVFAC drawings 1404523 through 
1404535, dated 23 April 1987; and box-type F magazines constructed 
according to NAVFAC drawings 1404541 through 1404555, dated 23 April 
1987.
    (4) Earth-covered, corrugated steel, arch-type magazines at least 
equivalent in strength to those shown on Army OCE drawings numbered AW 
33-15-63, March 5, 1963; AW 33-15-64, May 10, 1963; 33-15-65, January 
10, 1963; and NAVFAC drawings numbered 1059128-30, 1059132, 1069906, 
and 1355460-61. OCE 33-15-73 (oval 1 -ga steel arch) is no longer 
approved for new construction; however, existing magazines are 
considered ``standard.'' For new construction of large magazines of 
this type use the earth-covered steel, semi-circular-arch magazine 
design shown on Army OCE drawing number 421-80-01, and for new 
construction of smaller magazines of this type use OCE drawing number 
AW 33-15-65 addressed above.
    Mass detonating explosives. High explosives, black powder, certain 
propellants, certain pyrotechnics, and other similar explosives, alone 
or in combination, or loaded into various types of ammunition or 
containers, most of which can be expected to explode virtually 
instantaneously when a small portion is subject to fire, to severe 
concussion or impact, to the impulse of an initiating agent, or to the 
effect of a considerable discharge of energy from without. Such an 
explosive will normally cause severe structural damage to adjacent 
objects. Explosive propagation may occur immediately to other items of 
ammunition and explosives stored sufficiently close to and not 
adequately protected from the initially exploding pile with a time 
interval short enough so that two or more quantities shall be 
considered as one for quantity-distance (Q/D) purposes.
    Maximum credible event (MCE). In hazards evaluation, the MCE from a 
hypothesized accidental explosion, fire, or agent release is the worst 
single event that is likely to occur from a given quantity and 
disposition of ammunition and explosives. Event shall be realistic with 
a reasonable probability of occurrence, considering the explosion 
propagation, burning rate characteristics, and physical protection 
given to the items involved. The MCE evaluated on this basis may then 
be used as a basis for effects calculations and casualty predictions.
    Military pyrotechnics. Ammunition manufactured specifically for use 
as signals, illuminants, and like items.
    Misfire. Failure of a component to fire or explode as intended.
    Navigable streams. Those parts of streams, channels, or canals 
capable of being used as highways of commerce over which trade and 
travel are or may be conducted, excluding streams that are not 
navigable by barges, tugboats, and other large vessels, unless they are 
used extensively and regularly for the operation of pleasure boats.
    NEW. Net Explosive Weight, expressed in pounds.
    Nitrogen padding (or blanket). Filling the void or ullage of a 
closed container with nitrogen gas to prevent oxidation of the chemical 
therein and to avoid formation of a flammable atmosphere above the 
liquid. Nitrogen padding (or blanket) also means maintaining a nitrogen 
atmosphere in or around an operation, piece of equipment, etc.
    Noncombustible. Not burnable.
    Operting building. Any structure, except a magazine, in which 
operations pertaining to manufacturing, processing, handling, loading, 
or assembly of ammunition and explosives are performed.
    Operating line. A group of buildings, facilities, or related work 
stations so arranged as to permit performance of the consecutive steps 
in the manufacture of an explosive or in the loading, assembly, 
modification, and maintenance of ammunition.
    Operational shield. A barrier constructed at a particular location 
or around a particular machine or operating station to protect 
personnel, material, or equipment from the effects of a possible 
localized fire or explosion. Operational shields, when designed in 
accordance with MIL-STD-398 should protect personnel and assets from 
thermal, pressure, and fragmentation hazards resulting from an 
accidental or intentional detonation and deflagration of ammunition or 
explosives. Existing reinforced concrete walls built to resist the 
effects of accidental explosions and designed and built in accordance 
with requirements applicable at the time of construction may be used as 
operational shields, with the following guidance as a minimum 
requirement:
    (1) A 12-inch reinforced concrete wall (see definition 
``substantial dividing wall'' of this subpart) provides adequate 
protection for operations involving an item containing 15 pounds TNT 
equivalent or less of high explosives when the nearest part of the item 
is at least 3 feet from the wall and the item is 2 feet from the floor. 
Care shall be taken to use appropriate equivalence data for close-in 
effects. Explosives characterized by greater brisance than that of TNT 
may have very high equivalencies at small distances from the 
explosives. When equivalence data is not available, existing 12-inch 
reinforced concrete walls may be used for operational shields for 
protection from items containing not more than 6 pounds of high 
explosives.
    (2) A 30-inch reinforced concrete wall provides adequate protection 
against the effects of an item containing not more than 50 pounds TNT 
equivalent of high explosives. The same separation distance as stated 
in paragraph (1) of this definition applies. When equivalence data is 
not available, a 30-inch wall may be used for an operational shield for 
protection from items containing not more than 20 pounds of high 
explosives.
    (3) A 36-inch reinforced concrete wall provides adequate protection 
against the effects of an item containing not more than 70 pounds TNT-
equivalency of high explosives. The separation distance as stated in 
definition ``operational shield,'' paragraph (1) of this definition 
applies. When equivalence data is not available, a 36-inch wall may be 
used for an operational shield for protection from items containing not 
more than 28 pounds of high explosives.
    Potential explosive site (PES). The location of a quantity of 
explosives that will create a blast, fragment, thermal, or debris 
hazard in the event of an accidental explosion of its contents. 
Quantity limits for ammunition and explosives at a PES are determined 
by the distance to an ES.
    Prohibited area. A specifically designated area at airfields, 
seadromes, or heliports in which all ammunition and explosives 
facilities are prohibited.
    Propellant. Explosives compositions used for propelling projectiles 
and rockets and to generate gases for powering auxiliary devices.
    Public highway. Any street, road, or highway used by the general 
public for any type of vehicular travel.
    Public traffic route. Any public street, road (including any on an 
establishment or military reservation), highway, navigable stream, or 
passenger railroad that is routinely used for through traffic by the 
general public.
    Pyrotechnic material. The explosive or chemical ingredients, 
including powdered metals, used in the manufacture of military 
pyrotechnics.
    Quantity/distance (Q/D). The quantity of explosives material and 
distance separation relationships providing defined types of 
protection. These relationships are based on levels of risk considered 
acceptable for the stipulated exposures and are tabulated in the 
appropriate Q/D tables. Separation distances afford less than absolute 
safety.
    Renovation. That work performed on ammunition, missiles, or rockets 
to restore them to a completely serviceable condition; usually involves 
the replacement of unserviceable or outmoded plants.
    Restricted area. Any area, normally fenced, from which personnel, 
aircraft, or vehicles, other than those required for operations, are 
excluded for reasons of safety.
    Runway. Any surface on land designated for aircraft takeoff and 
landing operations, or a lane of water designated for takeoff and 
landing operations of seaplanes.
    Service magazine. A building in an operating line used for the 
intermediate storage of explosives materials. The amount of explosives 
normally is limited to a minimum consistent with safe, efficient 
production.
    Standard earth-covered magazine (igloo). An earth-covered, arch-
type magazine, with or without a separate door barricade, constructed 
according to an approved standard drawing.
    Standard earth-covered magazines. These magazines are approved for 
all quantities of explosives up to 500,000 lbs (226,798 kg) net 
explosive weight.
    Static test stand. Locations whereon liquid propellant engines or 
solid propellant motors are tested in place.
    Substantial dividing wall. An interior wall designed to prevent 
simultaneous detonation of explosives on opposite sides of the wall. 
However, such walls may not prevent propagation (depending on 
quantities and types of explosives involved).
    (1) Substantial dividing walls are one way of separating explosives 
into smaller groups to minimize the results of an explosion and allow a 
reduction in Q/D. These walls do not protect personnel near the wall 
from high explosives because the spalling of wall surface opposite the 
explosion source may form dangerous secondary fragments.
    (2) Reinforced concrete-type walls may vary in thickness, but shall 
be at least 12 inches thick. At a minimum, both faces shall be 
reinforced with rods at least \1/2\ inch in diameter. The rods shall be 
spaced not more than 12 inches on centers horizontally and vertically, 
interlocked with the footing rods and secured to prevent overturning. 
Rods on one face shall be staggered with regard to rods on the opposite 
face and should be approximately 2 inches from each face. Concrete 
should have a design compressive strength of 2,500 psi or more. The 
capability to prevent simultaneous detonation is based on a limit of 
425 net pounds of mass-detonating explosives. All storage plans and Q/D 
calculations shall be based on the total quantity of mass-detonating 
explosives on both sides of a dividing wall when the quantity of either 
side exceeds 425 pounds. Explosives should be 3 feet or more from the 
wall.
    (3) Retaining walls filled with earth or sand shall be at least 5 
feet wide, with earth or sand packed between concrete, masonry, or 
wooden retaining walls.
    Suspect truck and car site. A designated location for placing 
trucks and railcars containing ammunition or explosives that are 
suspected of being in hazardous condition. These sites also are used 
for trucks and railcars that may be in a condition that is hazardous to 
their content.
    Taxiway/taxilane. Any surface designed as such in the basic 
airfield clearance criteria specified by 14 CFR part 77, Objects 
Affecting Navigable Airspace.\24\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \24\Copies may be obtained from Superintendent of Documents, 
U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Unit risk. The risk to personnel and/or facilities that is 
associated with debris, fragment and/or blast hazards that is the 
result of the detonation of a single round of ammunition.
    Waiver. Written authority that provides a temporary exception, 
permitting deviation from mandatory requirements of this part. It 
generally is granted for short periods of time pending cancellation as 
a result of termination of scheduled work commitments or correction of 
the waived conditions.

[FR Doc. 94-30503 Filed 12-15-94; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 5000-04-M